FINISHED PLAN

S.No.Ｓ１５２７

MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT (JSS-296)

NAVTEX RECEIVER (NCR-333)
RADAR TRANSPONDER (TRON SART20)
406MHz SATELLITE EPIRB (JQE-103)
(INCL. INST. MANUAL & TEST REPORT)

JUL. 17. 2012

LIST No. EE-1

 2MC-7143

Messrs. TSUNEISHI SHIPBUILDING CO.,LTD.

S．No．1527
MODEL: JSS-296
MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT
MODEL: NCR-333
NAVTEX RECEIVER
MODEL: TRON SART20
RADAR TRANSPONDER
MODEL: JQE-103
406 MHz SATELLITE EPIRB

FINISHED DRAWING
July 2012

Product Engineering Group

Engineering Department
Marine Electronics Division
TEL 0422-45-9061
FAX 0422-45-9957
checked by in charge
 MF / HF
MODEL: JSS-296
MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT
 １
JSS-296 COMPONENT LIST FOR RADIO EQUIPMENT

MASS
№ NAME TYPE REMARKS Q'TY INDEX
( ㎏ )
1. GMDSS Console NCU-331E 1 240 3
2. MF/HF Radiotelephone JSB-196GM Incorporated into NCU-331E (1) 3
3. DSC/NBDP Terminal NCT-196N Incorporated into NCU-331E (1) 3
4. PA Unit (built in Batt. Charger) NAH-692 Incorporated into NCU-331E (1) 3
5. Data Terminal NDZ-227 Incorporated into NCU-331E (1) 3
6. Keyboard NDF-369 Incorporated into NCU-331E (1) 3
7. Printer NKG-800 Incorporated into NCU-331E (1) 3
8. Roll Paper 5ZPCM00006 1 ― ―

9. Antenna Tuner NFC-296 1 13.0 3

10. Junction Box NQD-4190 1 1.2 3
11.

12. Circuit Tester PM3 1 0.05 9

13. Driver Set DK-06 Tools 1 ― 10
1
4
14. Whip Antenna NAW-60 L＝6m 1 3.5 11
0

11
1
3
3 15. Joint Box JQD-69C 1 1.0
構品表

1
E

1
16. Self-Supporting Antenna NAW-208S 1 27.0 11
5

11
～

2
17. Ant. Lead-in Insulator NG-158 1 1.2
7
1
5
3

12
1

18. Feeder Kit 6ZPKD00073 1 ―

.
j
t
d

19. Antenna Wire TH-19/1.2 25m ― ―

20. Installation Materials 6ZPKD00074 1 ― 12

21.

22. Spare Parts 7ZXJD0030 1 ― 13

23. Spare Parts 6ZXKD53125 Antenna Materials 1 ― 13
 １５

Ｓ１
５ ５０Ａ

ＮＯＴＥ：ＴＢ１－１～２６、２９、３０、４２～４５、５５～６２、６４、６５、６７～７３：Ｊ－ＷＫ／４９ ＮＣＵ－３３１Ｅ
ＴＢ１０１－１～６、ＴＢ１－３１～３８、４７～５４、７４～７７：Ｊ－ＷＫ／２０－９７／６ ＧＭＤＳＳ ＣＯＭＭＵＮＩＣＡＴＩＯＮ ＣＯＮＳＯＬＥ
ＴＢ１０２：Ｊ－９７／２
Ｎ Ｃ Ｕ － ３ ３ １ Ｅ １ １ ６ ０
2-2

3
 3
Model JSS-296 MF/HF RADIOEQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1 General
Frequency range : Transmit; 1.6 to 27.5MHz (100Hz steps)
: Receive; 0.1 to 29.9999MHz (100Hz steps)
Frequency tolerance : Within ±10Hz
Emission mode : J3E (TEL), F1B (DSC/TLX), A1A (CW), H2B,
: H3E (AME: reception only)
User definable channels : 200ch (20ch x 10 Groups)
Preset ITU channels : 1722ch [TEL; 283, DSC; 29, TLX; 891, CW; 519 ]
Scanning channel : 20 user defined channels
Communication mode : Simplex and semi-duplex
Antenna impedance : 50Ω
Operating temperature : -15 to +55°C
Power requirement : 90 to 132Vac/180 to 264Vac, Single-phase, 50/60Hz;
Tx; 2.0kVA max., Rx; 0.5kVA max.
: 21.6 to 31.2Vdc;
Tx; 30A max., Rx; 7A max.
Compass safe distance : 1.5m

2 Transmitter
Output power : AC power source; 200Wpx (1.6 to 4MHz), 250Wpx (4 to 27.5MHz)
: DC power source; 100Wpx (1.6 to 4MHz), 150Wpx (4 to 27.5MHz)
Occupied bandwidth : TEL; less than 3kHz, DSC/TLX/ CW; less than 0.5kHz
Carrier suppression : more than 40dB
Spurious suppression : less than 43dB
5-1

AF frequency response : 350 to 2700Hz (6dB bandwidth)

Microphone input : 600Ω (-40dBm standard)
Line input : 600Ω, 0dBm (balanced)

3 Receiver
Receiving system : Triple super-heterodyne
Intermediate frequencies : 70.455MHz, 455kHz, 20.217kHz
Sensitivity (SINAD 20dB) : TEL; less than 6.3uV(1.6 to 4MHz), less than 3.5uV(4 to 27.5MHz)
: DSC/TLX; less than 1.8uV(1.6 to 4MHz), less than 1.0uV(4 to 27.5MHz)
Selectivity : TEL; 2.4 to 3kHz at -6dB, within ±2.1kHz at -66dB
: DSC/TLX; 270 to 300Hz at -6dB, within ±550Hz at -60dB
Spurious response : more than 60dB
Clarifier range : ±200Hz in 1Hz steps
AF output : 5W max.
Line output : 600Ω, 0dBm (balanced)

4 DSC/NBDP
DSC Modem
Communications protocol : In conformity with ITU-R M.493 and M.541
Emission : F1B/J2B 100baud
Code : 10units error detection specified by ITU-R M.493.
Memory capacity : Received Distress messages 20
: Received Other messages 20
: Transmitted message 11
Clock : Within ± 30ppm
 3
Data backup time : 24hours (message content and time data)
Mark frequency : 1615 ± 0.5Hz
Space frequency : 1785 ± 0.5Hz
Output level : 0dBm (-20 to +10dBm variable/600Ω balanced)
Input frequency : 1700 ± 85Hz
Input level : -25 to +10dBm (600Ω balanced)
NBDP Modem
Communications protocol : In conformity with ITU-R M.476, M.490, M.491, M.492,
M.625 and ITU-T Rec. F130
Emission : F1B/J2B 100 baud
Code : 7-bit code 4B/3Y ratio constant mark signal
Clock : Within ± 30ppm
Mark frequency : 1615 ± 0.5Hz
Space frequency : 1785 ± 0.5Hz
Output level : 0dBm (-20 to +10dBm variable/600Ω balanced)
Input frequency : 1700 ± 85Hz
Input level : -25 to +10dBm (600Ω balanced load)

5 Watchkeeping Receiver
Receiving frequencies : 2187.5kHz, 4207.5kHz, 6312kHz, 8414.5kHz, 12577kHz, 16804.5kHz
Receiving system : Double super-heterodyne
Intermediate frequencies : 40.455MHz, 455kHz
Reception mode : F1B/J2B
Sensitivity : Symbol error rate of 1% or better at 1μV input
Frequency stability : Within ± 10Hz after 1-minute warm-up
Antenna impedance : 50Ω unbalanced
5-2

6 Antenna Tuner
Frequency range : 1.6 to 30MHz
Power capability : 300Wpx
SWR after tuning : 2:1
Tuning method : Automatic tuning and preset tuning
Tuning time : Automatic tuning; typical 3sec, Preset tuning; typical 0.5sec
Operating temperature : -25 to +55°C

7 Battery Charger
Charging current : Ordinary charge; 20A, Equalizing charge; 10A
Alarm function : Charge, Low voltage, High voltage

8 Data Terminal
Controlled item : NBDP function (Control the DSC/NBDP)

9 Key Board
Interface : Matrix
Contact method : Membrane sheet
Life : 5 million strokes

10 Printer
Print method : Serial impact dot matrix
Interface : Centronics
Paper feed method : Paper roll holder
Paper type : 209 to 216mm Roll paper
 3

4-7 (mounting hole) 7.5 • 15°

adjuster (2steps)
7

Name Plate
100 (panel)

250 (panel)

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 7.8kg
Color: Panel - Munsell N4
Body - Munsell N7

Outline Drawing of
JSB-196GM MF/HF Radiotelephone
 3
8

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 5.5kg
Color: Panel - Munsell N4
Body - Munsell N7

Outline Drawing of
NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem
 3
9

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 35kg
Color: Munsell N7

Outline Drawing of NAH-692 Power Amplifier

 3

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 2.0 kg
Color: Munsell N4

Outline Drawing of NDZ-227 Data Terminal

 3

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.4 kg
Color: Beige

Outline Drawing of NDF-369 Keyboard

 3
25

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 5.3kg
Color: Light Gray

Outline Drawing of NKG-800 Printer

 3
14

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 13kg
Color: Munsell N8

Outline Drawing of NFC-296 Antenna Tuner

 3

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 1.0kg
Color: Munsell 7.5BG7/2

Outline Drawing of NQD-4190 Junction Box

 4

TO ANTENNA
STAND-OFF
INSULATOR (SK-70)

SHIP WALL
250

MOUNTING BRACKETS
4-M10 (DOCK supply)

ANTENNA

JRC
TERMINAL
600

EARTH PLATE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
(DOCK supply)

SOLDERING WELDING

RUBBER
MAX. 500

VENTILATION TUBE
GROUNDING
RF CABLE TERMINAL(*1)
MOUNTING BRACKETS
(DOCK supply)
2

CONTROL CABLE

WELDING NQD-4190
JUNCTION BOX

4-M8
RG-10/U
MPYCS-12

UNIT [mm]
(*1) GROUND TERMINAL
6ZPKD00084 (JRC supply)

WIDTH: 50
M-P-5
LENGTH: 350
THICKNESS: 0.3
M-A-JJ

M-P-7
90

NFC-296
130 ANTENNA TUNER

Installation Drawing of NFC-296 Antenna Tuner

（for Indoor Installing）
 NFC-296 ANTENNA
TUNER

ATTACHED CABLE

CABLE SIZE
φ9.5～φ11.0 NQD-4190 JUNCTION BOX

Vinyl-shielded wires
Gather and twist shielding braided wires and solder
to the vinyl-shielded wire.
.

CABLE SIZE φ12.6～φ22.0

MPYCS-12

GMDSS CONSOLE

NQD-4190
NFC-296 ANTENNA TUNER GMDSS CONSOLE TERMINAL
JUNCTION MPYCS-12
ATTACHED CABLE TB1
BOX
TERMINAL CABLE
CABLE COLORS TERMINAL NUMBERS AND NAMES
NUMBER NUMBERS

1 RED 1, 2 55, 56 +13.6V

2 BLACK 3, 4 57, 58 GND

3 GREEN 5 59 ANTENNA TUNER _TX

4 WHITE 6 60 ANTENNA TUNER_RX

5 YELLOW 7 61 PA_MUTE

6 GREY 8 62 ANTENNA_CURRENT

7 PINK 9 6 RBK

8 ― ― ― ―

9 ― ― ― ―

SHIELDING BRAIDED EARTH

10 ― GND
WIRE TERMINAL

Installation Drawing of NQD-4190 Junction Box

(for Indoor Installing)
 9
7

Specifications
(1) Measuring Range ACV: 400m/4/40/400/500V ± (0.7%rdg +3dgt)
(2) Measuring Range DCV: 4/40/400/500V ± (2.3%rdg +10dgt)
(3) Measuring Resistance: 400/4k/40k/4M/40MΩ ± (2.0%rdg +5dgt)
(4) Battery: Coin type Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) 1cell
(5) Size: H108 x W56 x D11.5 mm
(6) Mass : approx. 85g

Standard Accessories Included

(1) Case holder (C-PM3)
(2) Instruction manual

Outline Drawing of Digital Tester PM3

 10
6

Descriptions
● Interchangeable 6-pieces driver set with handle;
(-) 3mm, 5mm, Hex Nut 5.5mm, (+) #1, #2, and awl
● Low voltage use circuit testing handle (80 - 300Vac / 100 - 250Vdc)

Outline Drawing of Driver Set DK-06

 11
φ7

NAW-60 JQD-69C

MATERIAL :
UNSATURATED POLYESTER

154
134 ±1 79
120 37

4-φ9

SUPPORTING POLE
(SUPPLIED BY SHIPYARD)

GLAND
φ34
Applicable Cable:φ10.3(min)-φ18.0(max)

7/1.6
WIRE
COPPER PLATE
(JRC SUPPLY)
EARTH BOLT
4-BOLTS M8x100 (DOCK SUPPLY)
MAX φ90

MIN φ40
φ34

4-BOLTS
M8x40

108
100

MATERIAL : SUS

Outline Drawing of JQD-69C Joint Box and

NAW-60 Whip Antenna
 11

A A

3070

A 一 A

φ140

Terminal
7

φ165 8一φ13.5

B 一 B
B B
SPECIFICATIONS
Mass of the antenna 27kg
Bending moment 1471N・m
Wind velocity 60m/s
Height of the antenna balance 3m
Max. deflection due to wind load 5m

φ85

Outline Drawing of NAW-208S Self-Supporting Antenna

 11
17

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 1.2kg

Outline Drawing of NG-158 Lead-in Insulator

 12

List Name DWG. NO

Components list for attached parts
Feeder Kit 6ZPKD00073

ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE TYPE

Q’TY JRC CODE NO.
NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) ( DESCRIPTION )

12

1 Insulator 3 NG-159A MPNG00069

148
190

2 Shackle 6 BP-O-58 MPXP0023W

3 Thimble 3 - BRXP00845

4 Wire Clip 16 PBC-3 BRBP00043

5 Shackle 3 - BRXP0016W
4
 12

List Name DWG. NO

Components list for attached parts
Installation Materials 6ZPKD00074

ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE TYPE

Q’TY JRC CODE NO.
NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) ( DESCRIPTION )

90
400
Earth
1 4 - 6ZPKD00084
130

51
Terminal
IRON COPPER

M8 3

50
2 Earth Bolt 3 - 6ZPKD00083
25 30

50
3 Earth Plate 2 - 6ZZKD01031
1200
COPPER 0.3t

φ6.4

4 Thermit 5 22-6 5JTCD00184

7.7
φ

φ13.0

5 Thermit 2 22-12 5JTAD00023

7.7
φ
5

φ6
Stand-off
φ30

71
59

6 2 SK-70 BRNG00153
Insulator
45 70

BP-0-59-3 2 BP-O-59-3 MTB6991W

BP-0-59-4
7 Clamp

15 2 BP-O-59-4 MTB6992W
32

Coaxial
φ19

8 5 MP-7 5JAAQ00005
Connector
40
φ19

Coaxial
9 2 M-A-JJ 5JAAA02241
Adopter
29

10 Antenna Wire - 3m PE-19/1.0 6ZCKD00131

11 Earth Wire - 5m 37/0.26 2265191794

 13

BOX NO. P.
SETS PER
SHIP NO. SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
VESSEL
JSS-296/ 596/ 896
NCU-331E/331F/331G
MF/HF Radio Equipment
QUANTITY REMARKS
ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB
NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO. BOX NO.
SET VESS

1040 (40A)
1 Fuse 5 5
18.8 5ZFEX00013

7127-3012 (15A)
2 Fuse 2 2
18.8 5ZFEX00001

7127-3011 (10A)
3 Fuse 1 1
18.8 5ZFEX00004

7127-3018 (7.5A)
4 Fuse 2 2
18.8 5ZFCK00001

7127-3010 (5A)
6-1

5 Fuse 4 4
5ZFEX00003

7127-3014 (3A)
6 Fuse 4 4
5ZFEX00012

7127-3019 (1A)
7 Fuse 4 4
5ZFEX00014

MF60NR 250V 15
8 Fuse 1 1
5ZFGD00206

MF60NR 250V 5
9 Fuse 6 6
5ZFGD00208

MF60NR 250V 3.15

10 Fuse 2 2
5ZFGD00207

MFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO., LTD. DWG. NO 7ZXJD0030 [1/2]

Note: Spare Part (Description or JRC code number) may be replaced with compatible part.
Inquiry regarding the order of apart : Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail : [email protected]
 13

BOX NO. P.
SETS PER
SHIP NO. SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
VESSEL
JSS-296/ 596/ 896
NCU-331E/331F/331G
MF/HF Radio Equipment
QUANTITY REMARKS
ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB
NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO. BOX NO.
SET VESS

MF60NR 250V 2
11 Fuse 1 1
5ZFGD00010

MF60NR 250V 1
12 Fuse 1 1
5ZFGD00205

13

14
6-2

15

16

17

18

19

20

MFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO., LTD. DWG. NO 7ZXJD0030 [2/2]

Note: Spare Part (Description or JRC code number) may be replaced with compatible part.
Inquiry regarding the order of apart : Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail : [email protected]
 13

SETS PER
SHIP NO. SPARE PARTS LIST FOR U S E
VESSEL
MODEL JSS-296
Antenna Materials
MF/HF Radio Equipment
QUANTITY REMARKS
ITEM NAME OF OUTLINE WORKING DESCRIPTION SUB
NO. PART (DIMENSION IN M/M) PER PER SPARE MARK OF
JRC CODE NO. BOX NO.
SET VESS

NG-159A
1 Insulator - 3
MPNG00069

BP-O-58
2 Shackle - 6
MPXP0023W

3 Thimble - 3
BRXP00845

PBC-3
4 Wire Clip - 16
BRBP00043

(OTHER PACKING)
Antenna 19/1.2
8

5 - 25m
Wire
2746111112

6 Shackle - 3
BRXP0016W

10

MFR’S NAME JAPAN RADIO CO., LTD DWG. NO 6ZXKD53125

Note: Spare Part (DESCRIPTION, JRC CODE NO.) may be replaced to the compatible part without notice.
Inquiry regarding the order of apart: Marine Service Department
Telephone: +81-3-3492-1305 Facsimile: +81-3-3779-1420 e-mail: [email protected]
MODEL: NCR-333
NAVTEX RECEIVER

NAVTEX
 NAW-333
NAVTEX ANTENNA
ﾅﾌﾞﾃｯｸｽｱﾝﾃﾅ

PREAMPLIFIER
プリアンプ

WLH-30/0.18-U-5
(GROUNDING WIRE) RG-58A/U(L=0.42)
(アース線)

N-J-3
N-P-10U

RG-10/UY

N-P-10U
N-J-3
7ZCJD0251
RG-58A/U(L=0.5m)

NAVTEX ANTENNA 7ZXJD0075(L=1.5m)

Ｊ１

NCR-333
NAVTEX RECEIVER
ナブテックス受信機
POWER

*
*
*
* *

DC 24V
1. COMPONENTS 2
1.1 STANDARD COMPONENTS
No Name Model Quantity
1 NAVTEX RECEIVER NCR-333 1
ITEMS: NAVTEX RECEIVER NCR-333 1
SCREW MPTG31641 4
OPERATION CARD 7ZPJD0306 1

2 NAVTEX ANTENNA NAW-333 1

1.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

No Name Model Quantity
COAXIAL CABLE WITH 7ZCJD0251
1 1
THE CONNECTOR (N-J-3, RG-58A/U: 0.5m)
2 CONNECTOR N-P-10U 2
3 ANTENNA CABLE RG-10/UY 40 m
4 2-CORE CABLE MVVS-20/0.18x2-6.5P-(8) m
5 GROUNDING CABLE TBC-1x10 m
6 ANTENNA CABLE 3D-2V-CY m
7 RMS CABLE 7ZXJD0075 1

2. SPECIFICATIONS

1) Electrical Specifications
-RECEIVER
Receiving frequency : 518kHz, 490kHz, 4209.5kHz
Receiving mode : F1B
Sensitivity : CER better than 1x10-2 at 1uV
Antenna input : 50 ohms for Navtex antenna
50 ohms for wide-band antenna
High impedance for wire antenna
-LCD
Size : 5.7 inch
Number of dots : 320 x 240 dots
Character/Line : 35/20
Back light : White LED

-POWER SUPPLY
Input voltage : 10.8 – 32 VDC
Power consumption : 9 Watts

-Temperature : -15°C to 55°C for operating

-25°C to 75°C for storage

-Humidity : up to 93% at 40°C

2) Mechanical Specifications
-Size : 268(W)x162(H)x90(D) mm including Mounting Base

-Mounting : Wall Mount, Desktop or Overhead

3. OUTLINE

4- 6.5

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 2.1kg

Outline Drawing of NCR-333 NAVTEX Receiver

 CAUTION
Install the antenna in the location where
obstructions are not within a radius of 1m
for the antenna swinging out.

Wrap the antenna base, with waterproof-tape

and vinyl-tape, for corrosion and
vibration proof.

WHIP ANTENNA (Material：SUS)

SPACER(Material：FRP)

NAW-333

FITTING BANDS (Material：SUS)

Spacer
MAST φ30 -φ90

Mast

Fitting band
Wrap the waterproof tape
and vinyl-tape.

Navtex
antenna unit

Grounding wire
φ44

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.3 kg

NAW-333 NAVTEX ANTENNA OUTLINE

4. INSTRUCTON FOR INSTALLATION

4.1 INSPECTION
At unpacking a package for the NCR-333 unit in first time, inspect for the followings:
(1) To be no shipping damage for the unit and its accessories.
(2) To make sure the number of contents with referring the packing list.

4.2 STORAGE
Store the all components in a dry room until installation.

4.3 INSTALLATION
4.3.1 Selection of Location
The receiver is designed so that it can be installed on either a desk, a wall, or the ceiling of
the vessel. Select an installation location that satisfies the criteria listed on the followings.

(a) The installation location should be as free as possible from direct sunlight.
(b) The length of the grounding cable should be minimized.
(c) The installation location should also be: free from excessive heat, moisture, and
vibration; in case of installation on the ceiling, free from the stagnant heat as well as
the above, and; in case of installation near a window, free from salt water spray as well
as the above.
(d) The distance from the magnetic compass should be at least 1 meter.
(e) The antenna cable, power cable, and grounding cable should be routed so as not to be in
close proximity with transmitter, radar, and other sources of electronic noise, as well as
the cables of these external units.

4.3.2 Mounting
Opening the case is not necessary for mounting. Mount the NCR-333 on a desk, wall or
ceiling by using the mounting base.
And keep a clearance for the maintenance.(Refer to figure below.)
The mounting procedure is as follows:
- Remove the two knobs fixing the mounting base.
- Mount the mounting base on the selected location.
- Secure the two knobs for installing the case on the mounting base.

4 -φ6.5

MOUNTING BASE (BOTTOM VIEW)

CLEARANCE

Space required for receiver installation (Unit: mm )

4.3.3 Installing Navtex antenna

1) First, the whip antenna should be screwed directry into antenna unit and tighten up bolt
by a spanner so that the whip antenna is hold firmly to antenna unit.
2) The Navtex antenna can be fastened to a mast or vertical pole with spacer and fix bands.
Fix them securely, reffering to "Installing Navtex antenna".
3) The cable from the antenna is connected by connector with cable from receiver. Before
fastening the Navtex antenna to the mast, fix the connector securely and wrap water-proof
tape around it carefully. If the connector is not protected against water completely, water will
enter the connector, short-circuiting the circuit and adversely affecting the receiving
sensitivity.
4) Connect the grounding cable to the earth securely with a shortest length. Under some
conditions, the receiving condition may be improved by eliminating the grounding for the
Navtex antenna.

Spacer
Mast

Fitting band

Clamps
Navtex
antenna unit

Installing Navtex Antenna

 1. Remove the screw on the 3. If the fitting band is
2. Tie the fitting band as
fitting band with a flat too long, twist the clip to
shown in the figure below.
tip screwdriver. remove it, and cut off the
band to a suitable length
with pliers. Clip
Vinyl tape
Clamp

Twist

Band
Flat tip
screwdriver

Pliers

4. The fitting band has such 5. When the fitting band has 6. Insert the clip into the

a length that it can fasten been properly prepared, hook fitting band clip, and screw

the antenna to a mast with the clip to the first square the clamp until the band is

a diameter of about 9cm. hole as counted from the end securely tightened.

According to the diameter of of the band, and tie the band

around the mast. Mast
the mast, cut off the band at
one of the square holes.
Mast diameter 9cm
8cm
1
7cm 2
6cm
3
5cm
4
4cm
5
3cm
6

Fastening with Bands

Antenna side
Protective PVC tape (vinyl tape)
Taking care not to give tension to the tape,
wrap the tape around the connector with one
half of it overlapped so that the wrapped tape
may form three layers.
15mm or less

Without giving tensile force, ahead the finish

end of the tape by pressing it. Then, press the
entire surface of the wrapped tape with fingers
to secure adhesion.

N type connector

Self - bonding tape (Sumi tape B,etc.)

Take a proper length of tape off from the role.
15mm or more

While pulling the tape to double the length, wrap

it around the connector with one half of it
overlapped so that the wrapped tape may form
three layers. However, portions between the coaxial
cable and connector, and between the connector and
case have different diameters. Apply tape to these

Receiver side portions a little thickly.

When the tape has been wrapped, press it with
fingers to secure adhesion.

P r o t e c t i o n o f C o n n e c t o r a g a i n s t Wa t e r
MODEL: TRON SART20
RADAR TRANSPONDER

SART
 Contents

1. Components
2. Specifications
3. Outline Drawings and Installation Drawings
1. Components

Table of Components for SART Model TRON SART20

Mass
No. Name Type Quantity Remarks
1Unit (kg)

Standard Components 1

1 SART TRON SART20 2 0.47 With Battery

2 Wall Bracket 82746 2 0.02 Attached to Main unit

3 1

1 Option(s) 1

3 Lifeboat Bracket 84845 2 0.33

4 1
2. Specifications

Tron SART20 is designed for use in search and rescue (SAR) operations. A radar transponder
gives the location for any nearby vessel and aircraft with X-band radar. Radar transponder is
designed for use in lifeboats and liferafts. Easy mounting in bulkhead bracket onboard the
vessel, easy to release and activate in an emergency situation. Various installation devices
available as options. MED and other approvals available. Mandatory carriage equipment for all
ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards, according to SOLAS III/6.2.2, III/26.2.5 and IV/7.1.3.

2.1 General
(1) Frequency range : 9,200MHz to 9,500MHz
(2) Polarization : Horizontal
(3) Form of sweep : Saw tooth
: Fast return = 0.4μS±0.1μs
(4) Sweep rate : 7.5μS±1μs
(5) Pulse emission / number of sweep : 100μs nominal / 12 sweeps
(6) Antenna beam width : Vertical beam At least ±12.5°
Azimuthal beam
Omni directional within 2dB
(7) Effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) : More than 400mW
(8) Effective receiver sensitivity : Better than -50dBm
(9) Recovery time following excitation : Within 10μs
(10) Delay time (radar signal / SART transmission) : 0.5μs or less
(11) Manufacturer : JOTRON AS (NORWAY)

2.2 Environmental Condition

(1) Battery: : Lithium battery (primary)
Nominal voltage 7.2V, Capacity 3.6AH
Operation life time
96 hours in stand-by mode, and then
at least 8 hours in response mode
Useful life time
5 years after plant delivery
(2) Temperature range: : -30ºC to +65 ºC storage
-20 ºC to +55 ºC operation
3. Outline Drawings and Installation Drawings

Unit : mm
Mass : approx. 0.47kg
Material housing : Polycarbonate with
10% glass fibre

Outline Drawing of
TRON SART20
 The bracket should be mounted
with four screws (Ø 4 mm)

Slide the SART

in the wall bracket

A wall bracket is delivered with the Tron SART20 and should be used for storage of the

transponder. The bracket should preferably be mounted in a vertical position and in a place
where the Tron SART20 is easily available in case of an emergency.

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.02kg

Outline Drawing of
82746 Wall Bracket
The outdoor lifeboat bracket should be mounted vertically on the roof of the lifeboat (as high as possible).

Activate the transponder and put it into the bracket. Secure the transponder to the bracket.

The bracket will fit a pipe with a diameter from 22mm to 50mm.

Select the attached screws as follows;

Screws Diameter
M6x70 22 – 35 mm
M6x90 35 – 50 mm Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.33kg

Outline Drawing of
84845 Lifeboat Bracket
 MODEL: JQE-103
406MHz SATELLITE EPIRB

EPIRB
 C O N T E N T S

Components List ････････････････････････････････････････････ 1

Specifications ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2

Outline Schematics ･････････････････････････････････････････ 3

Installation ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 4
Component List

406MHz SATELLITE EPIRB JQE-103

Name/Type Outline Mass Q’ty

EPIRB / JQE-103
585mm(H) x 175mm(W) x 175mm(D) 4.2㎏ 1
Including Float-free Release Bracket

-1-
General

Antenna
Pattern Vertical Whip antenna
VSWR Less than 1.5
Impedance 50Ω
Battery
Voltage 8.4V
Battery life
Operation life time 48Hours or more
Useful life time 5 years after plant delivery
Operating temperature range －20℃～＋55℃
Storage temperature range －30℃～＋70℃
Buoy (H)529mm×(W)120mm×(D) 116mm
Mass 1.3ｋｇ
Bracket (H)585mm×(W)175mm×(D) 175mm
Mass 2.9ｋｇ

406.028MHz
Carrier frequency 406.028MHｚ±2ｋHz
Output Power 5Ｗ±2ｄＢ
Modulation Phase modulation ±1.1±0.1 radians peak(G1B)

TX Interval 50sec±5%
TX Time 440ｍｓ±1%

121.5MHz
Carrier frequency 121.5MHz±6.075kHz
Peak envelope output power 50mW±3dB
Modulation AM
Modulation frequency 300Hz～1600Hz swept upward
Sweep repetition 2Hz～4Hz

-2-
Outline Schematics (including Buoy)

Mounting
holes

-3-
Installation

Note
(1) The EPIRB is shipped from the plant with the mode switch in the “READY” position. Do not
change the switch position until the EPIRB is installed completely.
(2) Install the release bracket in a place without obstacles in accordance with the following fig.

Firstly, remove the buoy from the bracket for installation of the bracket in accordance with the
following Item “1.Removing procedure of the buoy from Bracket” The bracket should be bolted to
bulkhead of the ship using stainless steel bolts or nuts M6 or equivalent. The EPIRB should not
be installed in a part of the ship likely to be flooded, or where damage may occur due to the use of
fishing gear or cargo derrick. The EPIRB should be installed on a place easily accessible in case of
emergency.
Put back the Buoy to the bracket in accordance with the following Item “2. Putting back procedure of
the buoy to the Bracket” after finishing of bracket installation.

Bulkhead

Bulkhead

Mounting
Taps or Bolts
3 places (*2,3)
4

*1 : Install the release bracket perpendicularly.

*2 : Mounting taps, if using, should be sufficient deep for mounting bolts.
*3 : Mounting bolts, if using, should not be longer than 40mm from the bulkhead surface.
-4-
1. Removing procedure of the buoy from Bracket

(1) To remove bracket cover, remove the Stopper pin,

and then open the Catch clip Hook
Stopper pin

Band

Catch clip

(2) Lift the buoy to a direction

of the arrow from the bracket

Bracket

Buoy bottom

Bottom stopper

2. Putting back procedure of the buoy to the Bracket

(1) Set the band to base of the bracket Pin

Band

Band
Catch clip

Plate
Hook

-5-
(2) Put in the buoy to base of the bracket

Bracket

Buoy bottom

Bottom stopper

(3) Make an indication label of a select switch to the front side and set the antenna in the
antenna cushion on lower part.

Slit

Antenna
Cushion

(4) Set the antenna in the antenna

Antenna
cushion as same as the above.

Slit

Cushion

(5) Put back bracket cover, close the Stopper pin, and insert the Catch clip
Hook
Stopper pin

Band

Catch clip

-6-
 1/5

Messrs. 殿

検 査 成 績 書
INSPECTION DATA
MF/HF 無線装置
MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT
JSS-296/596/896

型式・定格出力

Type & Rated output power

JSS-296 250W
JSS-596 500W
JSS-896 800W

製造番号
Serial No．
BS 76768
検査日
Date of Inspection
28-Nov-11

JSB-196GM: BS 67236
NCT-196N: GA 22299
NAH- 692/ 695/ 698: BP 22179
NFC- 296/ 896: BC 33450

課 長
Approved by
検査員
Inspected by
検査担当部門 海上機器品質保証部 舶用通信機品質保証グループ
Section Communication Group
Quality Assurance Department/ Marine Electronics

2MC-7143
 2/5
製造番号
Serial No. BS 76768
指定照合 判 定 良
1. Verification to specification Judgement Good
機構検査(外観及び構造) 判 定 良
2. Structural inspection(Appearance & Construction) Judgement Good

性能検査 判 定 良
3. Performance inspection Judgement Good

総合動作試験 判 定 良
3.1 Overall operation test Judgement Good

送信部試験 試験電圧 296 : AC 100V/110V/220V

3.1.1 Transmitter test Examination voltage: 596/896 : AC 100V /110V/ 220V

定格出力試験
3.1.1.1 Rated output test 感度
周波数 電波型式
抑圧 ｽﾌﾟﾘｱｽ発射強度
電力 空中線 Spurious radiation
PA電圧 PA電流 出力 効率 搬送波
低減 電流 3.1.2.1
電力 (dB)
Power PA PA Antenna Output Effici- Carrier 第2次 第3次 Sensitivity
Frequency
Emission reduc- voltage current current power ency suppre- 高調波 高調波 (dBμV)
(kHz)
tion Vc(V) Ic(A) Ia(A) (W) (%) ssion 2nd 3rd emf
(dB) harmonic harmonic
1605.0 H 76.8 6.3 4.5 203 42.0 ―――― ―――― ―――― 2.2
H 76.9 6.4 4.5 203 41.2 -72 -71 -62 2.5
J3E
ＢＰ 22179

2182.0 M ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ――――
L 77.3 3.0 1.6 26 11.2 ―――― ―――― ―――― ――――
2187.5 F1B H ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― -24.0
3700.0 A1A H 76.8 7.2 4.5 203 36.7 ―――― ―――― ―――― -2.5
H 76.8 7.4 ―――― 250 44.0 -71 -59 -59 0.5
4100.0 M ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ――――
J3E L 77.3 3.4 ―――― 40 15.2 ―――― ―――― ―――― ――――
6200.0 H 76.8 7.4 ―――― 250 44.0 ―――― -51 -68 1.5
8200.0 H 76.8 6.7 ―――― 250 48.6 ―――― -55 -64 2.0
8414.5 F1B H ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― -24.7
12300.0 H 76.9 6.5 ―――― 250 50.0 ―――― -62 -63 3.0
J3E
16500.0 H 76.9 6.6 ―――― 250 49.3 ―――― -54 -58 3.0
16804.5 F1B H ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― ―――― -24.2
18700.0 H 76.7 8.2 ―――― 250 39.7 ―――― -69 -48 4.3
22100.0 J3E H 76.5 9.0 ―――― 250 36.3 ―――― -71 -57 4.1
25100.0 H 76.5 9.1 ―――― 250 35.9 ―――― -49 -43 4.5

試験電圧
Examination voltage: DC 24 V
定格出力試験 3.1.1.1 Rated output test
周波数 電波型式
電力 空中線
PA電圧 PA電流 出力 効率
低減 電流
Power PA PA Antenna Output Effici-
Frequency reduc- voltage current current power ency
(kHz) Emission
tion Vc(V) Ic(A) Ia(A) (W) (%)
H 12.5 23.0 3.2 102 35.5
2182.0
L 13.0 13.7 1.8 32 18.0
H 12.6 19.5 ―――― 150 61.1
4100.0
L 13.1 12.5 ―――― 59 36.0
6200.0 H 12.7 19.0 ―――― 150 62.2
8200.0 J3E H 12.6 19.9 ―――― 150 59.8
12300.0 H 12.7 18.6 ―――― 150 63.5
16500.0 H 12.4 24.2 ―――― 150 50.0
18700.0 H 12.6 20.3 ―――― 150 58.6
22100.0 H 12.2 28.3 ―――― 150 43.4
25100.0 H 12.1 31.5 ―――― 150 39.4
項目 規格 周波数 定格出力 擬似空中線 出力算出方法
Item Specification Frequency Rated output power Dummy antenna Calculation
296:200(AC)/100(DC)W
1600-3999.9kHz 596:400(AC)/100(DC)W 250pF+10ohms Ia x Ia x 10
定格出力 896:400(AC)/100(DC)W
-50%, +20%
Rated output power 296:250(AC)/150(DC)W
4000.0-27500.0kHz 596:500(AC)/150(DC)W 50ohms 電力計 Power meter
896:800(AC)/150(DC)W
抑圧搬送波電力 -40dB以下 項目 Item 規格 Specification
Carrier suppression or less
感度 J3E/F1B: SINAD=20dB J3E/A1A: 8dBμV以下 or less
ｽﾌﾟﾘｱｽ発射強度 -43dB以下
3.1.2.1 Sensitivity A1A: (S+N)/N=20dB F1B: 0dBμV以下 or less
Spurious radiation or less
 3/5
製造番号
Serial No. BS 76768

項目 Item 規格 Specification 結果 Result

A1A/F1B: 0.5kHz以下 or less
A1A/F1B 0.32 kHz
占有周波数帯域幅 測定周波数 Measured at 2187.5kHz, Mode: F1B
3.1.1.2 Occupied bandwidth J3E: 3.0kHz以下 or less
測定周波数 Measured at 2182.0kHz, Mode: J3E J3E 2.23 kHz

Within ±10Hz以内 測定周波数 Measured at 25100.0kHz, Mode: A1A

送信周波数偏差
その他の周波数における偏差はこの値以下である。 -2 Hz
3.1.1.3 Frequency tolerance
It is this data or less at the other frequencies.
総合周波数特性 350～2700Hz Within 6dB以内
2.0 dB
3.1.1.4 Frequency response 測定周波数 Measured at 2182.0kHz, Mode: J3E
1.5kHz～4.5kHz: 31dB以上 or more
1.5kHz～4.5kHz 35 dB
4.5kHz～7.5kHz: 38dB以上or more
不要発射減衰量
7.5kHz～: 43dB以上 or more (REL. to below PEP) 4.5kHz～7.5kHz 50 dB
3.1.1.5 Intermodulation
測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E
変調周波数 MOD. Frequencies 700/2500Hz 7.5kHz～ 62 dB
総合歪 20dB以上 or more
40 dB
3.1.1.6 Overall distortion 測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E
ＢＰ 22179

受信部試験
3.1.2 Receiver test

項目 Item 規格 Specification 結果 Result

ｽﾌﾟﾘｱｽﾚｽﾎﾟﾝｽ 70dB以上 or more (1st image frequency 145.01MHz)
84.4 dB
3.1.2.2 Spurious response 測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E, AGC: ON

入力電圧 3μV～100mVで低周波出力変化は10dB以下
AGC特性 Audio output variation is not more than 10dB for input voltage between 3
0.1 dB
3.1.2.3 AGC Characteristics μV and 100mV.
測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E, AGC: ON

入力電圧 30μVにおける低周波出力1000Hzと不要成分との比20dB以上
総合歪 The ratio of 1000Hz output to its unwanted frequency component is more
47.9 dB
3.1.2.4 Overall distortion than 20dB.
測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E, AGC: ON

ｸﾗﾘ可変幅 ±200Hz以上 or more ＋ 206 Hz

3.1.2.5 Clarifier range 測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E, AGC: ON
－ 206 Hz

任意の1時間で±10Hz以内 (予熱時間: 1分)

周波数安定度
Within ±10Hz for any 1 hour (Pre-heat time: 1 minute) -2 Hz
3.1.2.6 Frequency stability
測定周波数 Measured at 25100.0kHz, Mode: J3E, AGC: ON

希望波入力10μVのとき、3kHz離調した10mVの妨害波による希望波出力ﾚﾍﾞﾙの
抑圧は3dB以下
感度抑圧効果 Wanted signal suppression is less than 3dB under the condition that the
0.3 dB
3.1.2.7 Blocking unwanted signal input is 10mV and separated by 3kHz from the desired
frequency input of 10μV.
測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E, AGC: ON
J3E: 6dB 帯域幅 Bandwidth 2.4kHz～3.0kHz 6dB 2.53 kHz
66dB 帯域幅 Bandwidth 4.2kHz以下 or less
J3E
測定周波数 Measured at 4100.0kHz, Mode: J3E
66dB 3.19 kHz
通過帯域幅 AGC: OFF
3.1.2.8 Selectivity F1B: 6dB 帯域幅 Bandwidth 0.27kHz～0.30kHz
60dB 帯域幅 Bandwidth 1.1kHz以下 or less 6dB 0.29 kHz
測定周波数 Measured at 2187.5kHz, Mode: F1B F1B
AGC: OFF 60dB 1.09 kHz
 4/5
製造番号
Serial No. BS 76768
DSC 聴守受信機
3.1.3 DSC Watch keeping receiver

項目 Item 規格 Specification 結果 Result

良
2187.5kHz
Good
良
4207.5kHz
Good
受信機入力電圧1μVにおける文字誤り率は、1%以下 良
感 度 6312.0kHz
Good
The symbol error rate is 1×10-2 or less.
3.1.3.1 Sensitivity 良
RF input level = 1μV 8414.5kHz
Good
良
12577.0kHz
Good
良
16804.5kHz
Good

任意の1時間で±10Hz以内 (予熱時間: 1分)

周波数安定度
ＢＰ 22179

Within ±10Hz for any 1 hour (Pre-heat time: 1 minute) 0 Hz

3.1.3.2 Frequency stability
測定周波数 Measured at 16804.5kHz

希望波入力10μVで、500Hz離調した1mVの妨害波による文字誤り率は1%以下
The symbol error rate less than 1x10-2 under the condition that the
感度抑圧効果 良
3.1.3.3 Blocking unwanted signal input is 1mV and separated by 500Hz from the desired Good
frequency input of 10μV.
測定周波数 Measured at 2187.5kHz

6dB 帯域幅 Bandwidth 0.27kHz～0.30kHz 6dB 0.29 kHz

通過帯域幅
60dB 帯域幅 Bandwidth 1.1kHz以下 or less
3.1.3.4 Selectivity
測定周波数 Measured at 2187.5kHz 0.58
60dB kHz

DSC モデム
3.1.4 DSC Modem

項目 Item 規格 Specification 結果 Result

マーク周波数 周波数偏差 Frequency tolerance 1614.5～1615.5Hz +0.1 Hz
3.1.4.1 Mark frequency ライン出力 Line output 0dBm ± 0.5dB 0 dB
スペース周波数 周波数偏差 Frequency tolerance 1784.5～1785.5Hz 0 Hz
3.1.4.2 Space frequency ライン出力 Line output 0dBm ± 0.5dB 0 dB

Rom/Softバージョン
3.1.5 Rom/Soft version
項目 Item Rom/Soft version
NAH-692/695/698 Soft 4.1
Soft(TRX) 4.2
JSB-196GM
Rom(DSP) 1.7
Rom(IC2) 2.12
Rom(IC204) 2.11
NCT-196N
Rom(IC402) 2.12
Rom(IC407) 2.10
NFC-296/896 Soft 3.1
 5/5
使用計測器一覧表
Measuring Instruments for Inspection
Model JSS-296
Order 2MC-7143
Serial No. BS 76768
Q'ty 1

品名 型式 製造者名 管理番号 使用 有効期限

NO. Description Model No. Manufacturer Control No. Used Cal Due Data
ｽﾍﾟｸﾄﾗﾑ ｱﾅﾗｲｻﾞｰ
1 SPECTRUM ANALYZER R3361C ADVANTEST 04-96081 ○ 2012.07
周波数ｶｳﾝﾀｰ
2 FREQUENCY COUNTER MF1601A ANRITSU 01-96060 ○ 2012.05
歪率計
3 DISTORTION METER AH979G SHIBASOKU 13-92203 ○ 2012.06
標準信号発生器
4 SIGNAL GENERATOR MG3641A ANRITSU 12-99027 ○ 2012.02
通過型電力計
5 THROUGH LINE POWER METER NJS-25A JRC 05-2-638 ○ 2012.06
ﾃﾞｼﾞﾀﾙﾏﾙﾁﾒｰﾀｰ
6 MULTI METER FLUKE77 FLUKE 07-1-377 ○ 2012.03
ﾀﾞﾐｰﾛｰﾄﾞ
7 DUMMY LOAD 202A-39-A NIHON KOSHUHA 78-0-407 ○ 2012.02

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

*使用欄に使用した計測器には○印を記入すること
*Write down a ○ mark in the measurement vessel used for the use column.
 1/2

Messrs. 殿

検 査 成 績 書
INSPECTION DATA
ナブテックス受信機
NAVTEX RECEIVER
NCR-333

製造番号
Serial No. GD80723
検査日
Date of Inspection 23 FEB 2012

課 長
Approved by
検 査 員
Inspected by
検査担当部門 海上機器品質保証部
舶用通信機品質保証グループ
Section Communication Group
Quality Assurance Department / Marine Electronics
 2/2
製造番号
Serial No.
GD80723

試験電圧
Examination voltage ＤC24V
検 査 項 目 規 格 判 定
Inspection Item Specification Judgement
1 外観及び構造 仕様書通りであること。 良
Appearance&Construction Conform to Specifications. Good
2 寸法及び質量 267.4±2.5(w)mm×162±2.5(H)mm×90.4 ± 1.5(D)mm 約
Dimension & Mass 2.1kg
良
(ﾏｳﾝﾃｨﾝｸﾞﾖｰｸを含む)
Good
267.4±2.5(w)mm×162±2.5(H)mm×90.4±1.5(D)mm
Approx.2.1kg (Including Mounting-yoke.)
3 自己診断 ‘SELF DIAGNOSIS’
Self test ROM、RAM、ｼﾘｱﾙｲﾝﾀｰﾌｪｰｽ部、電源部、ｱﾝﾃﾅ接続ﾁｪｯｸ、
良
受信部が正常であること。
Good
ROM,RAM,SIO,PS,ANTENNA CHECK and Receiver
work properly.
‘LCD DIAGNOSIS’
良
ﾄﾞｯﾄ抜けがないこと。
Good
Confirm that every dots are displayed complete.
4 LCD ﾊﾞｯｸﾗｲﾄ試験 4 段階で輝度の調整ができること。 良
LCD Brightness settings Brightness can be adjusted in four steps. Good
5 LCD ｺﾝﾄﾗｽﾄ試験 ｺﾝﾄﾗｽﾄが調整できること。 良
LCD Contrast test Contrast can be adjusted. Good
6 受信感度試験 標準信号発生器から、周波数:518kHz ﾚﾍﾞﾙ:-107dBm
Receiving sensitivity 標準電文を送出し誤字率 4%以下であること。
Possible to receive message signal at frequency of 良
518kHz level of -107dBm and at Character error rate of Good
4% or less.

標準信号発生器から、周波数:490kHz ﾚﾍﾞﾙ:-107dBm
標準電文を送出し誤字率 4%以下であること。
良
Possible to receive message signal at frequency of
Good
490kHz level of -107dBm and at Character error rate of
4% or less.
標準信号発生器から、周波数:4209.5kHz ﾚﾍﾞﾙ:-107dBm
標準電文を送出し誤字率 4%以下であること。
良
Possible to receive message signal at frequency of
Good
4209.5kHz level of -107dBm and at Character error rate
of 4% or less.
7 ｺﾏﾝﾄﾞ出力の確認 Data out へ受信毎に NRX ｺﾏﾝﾄﾞを出力することを確認す
The confirmation of output る。 良
of a command It is confirmed that "NRX" command is outputted to Data Good
out for every received.
8 GPS ｺﾏﾝﾄﾞ入力の確認 Data in へ GPS ｺﾏﾝﾄﾞを入力しない。
The confirmation of input of 画面右下に”GPS”と表示しないことを確認する。
良
a GPS command A GPS command isn't inputted to the Data in port. Good
It is confirmed that “GPS” isn't indicated on the bottom
right of the display.
Data in へ GPS ｺﾏﾝﾄﾞを入力する。
画面右下に”GPS”と表示することを確認する。
良
A GPS command is inputted to the Data in port.
It is confirmed that "GPS" is indicated on the bottom right Good
of the display.
 JSS-296/596/896
MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
 CAUTIONS AGAINST HIGH VOLTAGE

Radio and radar devices are operated by high voltages of anywhere from a few hundred volts up to many
hundreds of thousands of volts. Although there is no danger with normal use, it is very dangerous if
contact is made with the internal parts of these devices. (Only specialists should attempt any
maintenance, checking or adjusting.)
There is a very high risk of death by even a few thousand volts, in some cases you can be fatally
electrocuted by just a few hundred volts. To circumvent accidents, you should avoid contact with the
internal parts of these devices at all costs. If contact is inevitable as in the case of an emergency, you
must switch off the devices and ground a terminal in order to discharge the capacitors. After making
certain that all the electricity is discharged, only then can you insert your hand into the device. Wearing
cotton gloves and putting your free hand in your pocket, in order not to use both hands simultaneously,
are also very good methods of shock prevention.
Quite often, an injury occurs by secondary factors, therefore it is necessary to choose a sturdy and level
working surface. If someone is electrocuted it is necessary to thoroughly disinfect the affected area and
seek medical attention as soon as possible.

Cautions concerning treatment of electrocution victims

When you find an electrocution victim, you must first switch off the machinery and ground all circuits. If
you are unable to cut off the machinery, move the victim away from it using a non-conductive material
such as dry boards or clothing.
When someone is electrocuted, and the electrical current reaches the breathing synapses of the central
nervous system inside the brain, breathing stops. If the victim's condition is stable, he or she can be
administered artificial respiration. An electrocution victim becomes very pale, and their pulse can be very
weak or even stop, consequently losing consciousness and becoming stiff.
Administration of first aid is critical in this situation.

i
 First aid
☆Note points for first aid

Unless there is impending danger leave the victim where he or she is, then begin artificial respiration.
Once you begin artificial respiration, you must continue without losing rhythm.

(1) Make contact with the victim cautiously, there is a risk that you may get electrocuted.

(2) Switch off the machinery and then move the victim away slowly if you must.

(3) Inform someone immediately (a hospital or doctor, dial emergency numbers, etc.).

(4) Lay the victim on his or her back and loosen any constrictive clothing (a tie, or belt).

(5) (a) Check the victim's pulse.

(b) Check for a heartbeat by pressing your ear against the victim's chest.
(c) Check if the victim is breathing by putting the back of your hand or face near the victim's face.
(d) Check the pupils of the eyes.

(6) Open the victim's mouth and remove any artificial dentifrice, food or chewing gum. Leave the mouth
opened and flatten the tongue with a towel or by putting something into the mouth to prevent the
victim's tongue from obstructing the throat. (If he or she is clenching their teeth and it is difficult to
open the mouth, use a spoon or the like to pry open the mouth.)

(7) Continually wipe the mouth to prevent the accumulation of saliva.

ii
 ☆If the victim has a pulse but is not breathing
("Mouth to mouth" resuscitation) Figure 1.

(1) Place the victim's head facing backward (place something under the neck like a pillow).
(2) Point the chin upward to widen the trachea.
(3) Pinch the victim's nose, take a deep breath, then put your mouth over the victim's mouth and exhale
completely, making sure that your mouth completely covers the victim's mouth. Then remove your
mouth. Repeat this routine 10 to 15 times per minute (holding the nostrils).
(4) Pay attention to the victim to notice if he or she starts to breath. If breathing returns, stop
resuscitation.
(5) If it is impossible to open the victim's mouth, put something like a plastic straw or vinyl tube into one
of the nostrils then blow air in while covering the mouth and the other nostril.
(6) Occasionally, when the victim comes back to consciousness, they immediately try to stand up.
Prevent this and keep them in a laying position. Give them something warm to drink and be sure that
they rest (do not give them any alcohol).

Administering artificial respiration by raising the head.

① (1) Raise the back of the head, then place one

hand on the forehead and place the other
hand under the neck. →①
Most victims open their mouth when doing
this, making "mouth to mouth" resuscitation
easier.

② (2) Cover the victim's mouth by opening your

mouth widely, then push your cheek against
the victim's nose, →②
or pinch the victim's nose to prevent air from
leaking out of it. →③

③ (3) Completely exhale into the lungs.

Exhale into the lungs until the chest is inflates.
You have to blow as rapidly as possible for
the first 10 times.

("Mouth to mouth" resuscitation) Figure 1

iii
 ☆If the victim has no pulse and is not breathing
(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2

If the victim has no pulse, his or her pupils are dilated, and if you cannot detect a heartbeat, the heart may
have stopped, beginning artificial respiration is critical.

(1) Put both hands on the diaphragm, with hands on top of each other keeping both arms straight. (If
your elbows are bent, you cannot push with as much power.) Press the diaphragm with your body
weight until the chest sinks about 2 cm (about 50 times per minute).
(2) If administering first aid when alone:
Perform the heart massage about 15 times then blow in twice. Repeat this routine.
If administering first aid with two people:
One person performs the heart massage 5 times, and the other person blows air in once. Repeat
this routine. (Heart massage and "mouth to mouth" resuscitation used together.)
(3) Constantly check the pupils and the pulse, if the pupils become normal and the pulse steadies, keep
them in a laying position and give them something warm to drink, be sure that they rest (do not give
them any alcohol.). In any case you have to entrust major decision making to a doctor. Having
understanding people around is essential to the victim's recovery from the mental shock of
electrocution.

① ②

③ ④

(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2

iv
 Preface
Thank you for purchasing JRC MF/HF Radio Equipment model JSS-296/596/896.

● For best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly before use.
● Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference. Make use of this manual when
experiencing operation difficulties.

v
 Before Operation
Concerning the symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to explain correct operation and to prevent injury or
damage to property. The symbols and descriptions are as follows. Understand them before
proceeding with reading this manual.

WARNING
Indicates a warning that, if ignored,
may result in serious injury or even
death.

CAUTION Indicates a caution that, if ignored,

may result in injury or damage to
property.

Examples of symbols

The △ symbol indicates caution (including DANGER and WARNING). The

illustration inside the △ symbol specifies the content of the caution more
accurately. (This example is a general caution.)

The symbol indicates that performing an action is prohibited. The illustration

inside or next to the symbol specifies the contents of the prohibited
operation. (In this example, disassembly is prohibited.)

The ● symbol indicates operations that must be performed. The illustration

inside the ● symbol specifies the obligatory operation. (In the example,
unplugging is the obligatory operation.)

Concerning warning labels

A warning label is pasted to the top cover of this product.
Do not remove, damage, or modify the label.

vi
 Handling Precautions

WARNING
Do not disassemble or modify this unit. Doing so may cause fire, electric
al shock, or failure.

Do not use a voltage other than specified. Doing so may cause fire, elec
trical shock, or failure.

If you remove a unit, be sure to store it in a non-conductive bag. If you

wrap It up with materials such as aluminum foil, the back-up power suppl
y may Short circuit and the ICs may be damaged.

There are no user-serviceable parts inside this equipment. Inspection or

maintenance by unauthorized persons may result in fire or electric shock.
For inspection and maintenance, contact JRC or its authorized agents.

vii
 Handling Precautions

CAUTION
Do not use this equipment in an environment other than that specified.
Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Do not turn the trimmer resistors or trimmer capacitors on the PCB unit (they are
preset at the factory). Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Do not install the equipment in a place near water or in one with excessive
humidity, steam, dust or soot. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or failure.

Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or failure.

Do not place this equipment anywhere vibration or impact is likely to occur. Doing
so may cause a failure or injury.

Do not place anything on top of this equipment. Doing so may cause fire or
failure.

Leave installation of this equipment to JRC or our agents. Installation by an

unauthorized person may lead to malfunction.

Be sure to turn OFF the printer’s power when opening and closing the printer
cover.
Failure to comply could result in electrical shock, failure, or injury.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printing head is high.

Do not touch the printing head until the temperature goes down.
Doing so may cause a burn or an injury.

Do not touch any part of the cutter.

Doing so is potentially dangerous.

viii
 DISTRESS CALLS
NCT-196N
There are three methods of transmitting a distress
call. These methods are described below in order
of ease of use, with the easiest first.

Transmitting Distress Calls 1

Procedure

1. Open the cover on the left and press DISTRESS .

The following screen is displayed.

DISTRESS CALL Transmissible

Address : XXXXXXXXX
Nature : UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position : 12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E
Dist-UTC : 01:26
Dist-telecomm : J3E TEL
End of sequence: EOS
Call TX/RX freq: 2,187.5/ 2,187.5 kHz

Note • If stop the distress transmission, press STOP .

2. Press DISTRESS for 3.5 seconds continuously.

Note • If stop the distress transmission, release DISTRESS .

3. The following screen is displayed and the distress transmission is started.

If a printer is connected, it prints out the distress message.
The distress message is transmitted for 5 times successively.

DISTRESS CALL Transmitting

TX frequency : 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26
1/5

Note • If break the distress transmission, press STOP .

ix
 4. When the distress transmission is completed, the screen is displayed as follows for a
few seconds.

DISTRESS CALL Send Completed

TX frequency : 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:27
5/5

5. The distress transmission is repeated at random intervals of 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.

On completion of the transmission, the screen is changed as follows. And the distress
transmission is repeated when the displayed time has counted down to zero.

DISTRESS CALL 2,187.5 kHz

NEXT DISTRESS CALL : AFTER 3.0 min

x
 Transmitting Distress Calls 2

Front panel 1st: PRESS TO VERIFY & EDIT MESSAGE

2nd: PRESS & HOLD UNTIL BEEP SOUNDS
CONTINUOUSLY TO TRANSMIT
ALM/CALL
DISTRESS 2187.5kHz
URGENCY
STOP CALL
DISTRESS OTHERS
8414.5kHz

CLASS A DSC

Procedure

1. Press 2187.5kHz or 8414.5kHz .

2. Open the cover on the left and press DISTRESS .

The following screen is displayed.

DISTRESS CALL Transmissible

Address : XXXXXXXXX
Nature : UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position : 12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E
Dist-UTC : 01:26
Dist-telecomm : J3E TEL
End of sequence: EOS
Call TX/RX freq: 2,187.5/ 2,187.5 kHz

Note • If stop the distress transmission, press STOP .

3. Press DISTRESS for 3.5 seconds at least.

Note • If stop the distress transmission, release DISTRESS .

4. The following screen is displayed and the distress transmission is started.

If a printer is connected, it prints out the distress message.
The distress message is transmitted for 5 times successively.

DISTRESS CALL Transmitting

TX frequency : 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26
1/5

Note • If break the distress transmission, press STOP .

xi
 5. When the distress transmission is completed, the screen is displayed as follows for
a few seconds.

DISTRESS CALL Send Completed

TX frequency : 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:27
5/5

6. The distress transmission is repeated at random intervals of 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.

On completion of the transmission, the screen is changed as follows. And the distress
transmission is repeated when the displayed time has counted down to zero.

DISTRESS CALL 2,187.5 kHz

NEXT DISTRESS CALL : AFTER 3.0 min

xii
 Transmitting Distress Calls 3
The NCT-196N enables an operator to create and edit messages for transmission.

Procedure
1. Confirm that the "DSC watching" screen is displayed.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

2. Press MENU .
The "MENU #1-EDIT&CALL" screen is displayed.

MENU #1-EDIT&CALL Select no.

1.Individual call
2.Acknowledgement call
3.Distress call
4.Distress relay call
5.Auto/semi-auto call
6.All ships call Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll the screen.
7.Group call
8.Area call
9.Position request
10.Polling call
11.Test call

3. Press 3 and then ENT to select “3. Distress call”.

The "Distress Call" screen is displayed as follows. Then setup these items except for “Address”
and “End of sequence” properly.

DISTRESS CALL Transmissible

Address : XXXXXXXXX
Nature : UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position : 31ﾟ00’N 135ﾟ00’E
Dist-UTC : 01:26
Dist-telecomm : J3E TEL Use ▲ and ▼ to
End of sequence: EOS scroll the screen.
Call TX/RX freq: 2,187.5/ 2,187.5 kHz

4. Open the cover on the left and press DISTRESS for 3.5 seconds at least.

5. The following screen is displayed and the distress transmission is started.

If a printer is connected, it prints out the distress message.
The distress message is transmitted for 5 times successively.

DISTRESS CALL Transmitting

TX frequency : 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26
1/5

Note • If break the distress transmission, press STOP .

xiii
 6. When the distress transmission is completed, the screen is displayed as follows for
a few seconds.

DISTRESS CALL Send Completed

TX frequency : 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:27
5/5

7. The distress transmission is repeated at random intervals of 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.

On completion of the transmission, the screen is changed as follows. And the distress
transmission is repeated when the displayed time has counted down to zero.

DISTRESS CALL 2,187.5 kHz

NEXT DISTRESS CALL : AFTER 3.0 min

Receiving Distress Calls

When a distress call is received, the "DISTRESS/URGENCY" LED lights up in red and the alarm tone
sounds. Up to 20 received distress calls are automatically stored in memory for future confirmation.

The distress messages are automatically deleted 48 hours after they have been received in
Note order to prevent unnecessary distress message relay transmission. Thus the distress
messages more than 48 hours old cannot be displayed but it is a proper transaction.

ATTENTION
When a distress call is received, inform the ship's captain or officer in charge and log the
distress call. There are legal repercussions if such a procedure is not followed.
Furthermore if a distress call is received, make contact immediately according to
"RECEPTION OF DSC DISTRESS ALERT ".

xiv
 CONTENTS
CAUTIONS AGAINST HIGH VOLTAGE ..........................................................................i
Cautions concerning treatment of electrocution victims............................................i
First aid...........................................................................................................................ii
Preface ...........................................................................................................................v
Before Operation ..........................................................................................................vi
Handling Precautions..................................................................................................vii
Distress Calls................................................................................................................ix
Abbreviations.............................................................................................................xvii

1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Outlines.............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Features............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 Configuration...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 External View ..................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................... 1-6

2. PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS............................................................................2-1

3. OPERATIONS ..........................................................................................................3-1
3.1 System Standby ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Turning the Power ON ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Turning the Power OFF ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Mode Change .................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Mode change to DSC .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Mode change to TLX............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.3 Setting Position and Time Data.......................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Setting the Internal Clock (DATA&TIME EDIT).................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Specifying Position Input (POSITION EDIT)........................................................................ 3-6
3.4 Radiotelephone operations ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.4.1 Turning the Power ON/OFF ................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4.1.1 Turning the Power ON...................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.1.2 Turning the Power OFF.................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.2 Communication Procedure .................................................................................................. 3-8
3.4.2.1 Setting the channel number with the Jog Dial.................................................................. 3-8
3.4.2.2 Monitoring the transmission frequency ............................................................................ 3-9
3.4.2.3 Setting the channel number with keypad ......................................................................... 3-9
3.4.2.4 Manually inputting frequency ......................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.2.5 Scanning reception ........................................................................................................ 3-11
3.4.3 Other Function Settings ..................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.3.1 Setting the communication mode................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.3.2 Setting the output power ................................................................................................ 3-13
3.4.3.3 Turning the Automatic Gain Control(AGC)ON ............................................................... 3-13
3.4.3.4 Adjusting squelch Level ................................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.3.5 Setting the scanning speed............................................................................................ 3-15
3.4.3.6 Registering the User channel......................................................................................... 3-15
3.4.3.7 Registering a channel group name ................................................................................ 3-17
3.4.3.8 Setting the meter indication mode ................................................................................. 3-18

xv
 3.4.3.9 Setting the Automatic Tuning Start(ATS)........................................................................ 3-18
3.4.3.10 Setting the wait time for ATS .......................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.3.11 Turning the key-in sounds ON/OFF ............................................................................... 3-19
3.4.3.12 Setting the loudspeaker output ON/OFF........................................................................ 3-20
3.4.3.13 List of shortcut keys........................................................................................................ 3-21
3.5 DSC operations ................................................................................................................3-23
3.5.1 Menus and Modes ............................................................................................................. 3-23
3.5.2 Receiving Messages.......................................................................................................... 3-25
3.5.3 Sending Messages ............................................................................................................ 3-29
3.5.4 Other Functions ................................................................................................................. 3-63
3.6 NBDP operations ..............................................................................................................3-75
3.6.1 NBDP SettingsMenus and Modes ..................................................................................... 3-75
3.6.2 ARQ Communication ......................................................................................................... 3-77
3.6.3 CALL Communication ........................................................................................................ 3-81
3.6.4 AUTO TELEX Communication........................................................................................... 3-85
3.6.5 FEC Communication.......................................................................................................... 3-89
3.6.5.1 SFEC Communication.................................................................................................... 3-89
3.6.5.2 CFEC Communication.................................................................................................... 3-91
3.6.6 Scanning for TLX mode ..................................................................................................... 3-93
3.6.6.1 Scanning start................................................................................................................. 3-93
3.6.6.2 Scanning stop................................................................................................................. 3-94
3.7 PA operations....................................................................................................................3-95
3.7.1 AC/DC power source voltage checking ............................................................................. 3-95
3.7.2 DC (Battery) charge/discharge current checking............................................................... 3-95
3.7.3 PA current checking ........................................................................................................... 3-96
3.7.4 PA voltage (Vc) and current (Ic) checking.......................................................................... 3-97
3.7.5 SWR of PA output checking ............................................................................................... 3-98
3.7.6 Beeping sound ON/OFF setting......................................................................................... 3-99
3.7.7 Alarm sound ON/OFF setting............................................................................................. 3-99
3.7.8 Battery charge mode (Ordinary/Equal) setting ................................................................ 3-100
3.7.9 DC operation.................................................................................................................... 3-100
3.8 Printer operations ...........................................................................................................3-101
3.8.1 Names and Functions ...................................................................................................... 3-102
3.8.2 Operation Panel ............................................................................................................... 3-103
3.8.3 Opening/Closing the Printer Cover .................................................................................. 3-104
3.8.4 Replacing the Roll Paper ................................................................................................. 3-106
3.8.5 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette Cartridge ....................................................................... 3-110
3.8.6 Adjusting the Printing Pressure (to Printing Paper Thickness)........................................ 3-112
3.8.7 Setting thd DIP Switch ..................................................................................................... 3-113
3.8.8 How to Attend to Error Detection ..................................................................................... 3-115

4. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION....................................................................... 4-1

4.1 General Maintenance and Inspection .................................................................................4-2
4.2 Consumables......................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Self Diagnosis.....................................................................................................................4-3
4.3.1 Radio Equipment ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.2 Modem ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.4 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................4-6

5. AFTER-SALES SERVICE ....................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Before returning repair ........................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Periodical maintenance recommended...............................................................................5-1

6. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 6-1

xvi
 Abbreviations

AM: Amplitude Modulation. The carrier amplitude is modulated in accordance with the
signal.

AMVER: Automated Mutual-assistance Vessel Rescue System

ARQ: Automatic Repeat Request

ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ATS: Automatic Tuning Start

ATU: Antenna Tuner

AUTO TELEX: A kind of Telex communication. The line is automatically established by receiving a
free signal transmitted from a coast station.

CFEC: Collective Forward Error Correcting. A mode transmitting to many and unspecified
stations.

CIRM: Committee International Radio Maritime

COMSAR: Sub-committee on Radio Communications and Search and Rescue

DIM: Dimmer

DSC: Digital Selective Calling

DTE: Data Terminal Equipment

FEC: Forward Error Correction System

GMDSS: Global Maritime Distress and Safety System

GPS: Global Positioning System

HF: High Frequency

xvii
IMO: International Maritime Organization

ITU: International Telecommunication Union. Regulates the treaty and rules relating to the
telecommunication of wire, wireless, land wires, marine, air and space. As internal
machinery, there are WARC, CCIR, CCITT and others.

MF: Medium Frequency (300 kHz to 3 MHz)

NBDP: Narrow Band Direct Printing

NNSS: Navy Navigation Satellite System

PC: Personal Computer

RCC: Rescue Coordinate Center

RR: Radio Regulations

SAR: Search and Rescue

SFEC: Selective Forward Error Correcting. Destination is specified and transmitted in this
mode.

SOLAS: International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea

SSB: Single Side Band

UTC: Universal Time Coordinated

xviii
 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Outlines
The JSS-296/596/896 MF/HF Radio Equipment is designed for vessels navigating A2, A3 and A4 sea areas. It
consists of mainly the JSB-196GM Radiotelephone, NFC-296/896 Antenna Tuning Unit (ATU), NCT-196N
DSC/NBDP MODEM, NDZ-127J/NDZ-227 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), NDF-368/NDF-369 Keyboard, and
NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier, and it provides the optimum GMDSS system for the superior performance,
compact, lightweight and highly efficient design of the units, which ensures easy operation for distress and
safety calling as well as general communications.

1.2 Features
● Fully Complies with GMDSS Requirements

All the functions required by IMO resolutions A.804 (19) and A.806 (19) are equipped, and suitable for radio
installations of vessels navigating A2, A3 and A4 sea areas.

● Inadvertent Distress Alert Protection

The DISTRESS button is protected by a cover to prevent inadvertent distress alert transmission.

● AC/DC Two-way Power Supply

The Power Supply equipped in the NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier is connected to both AC mains and
auxiliary DC24V battery, and can switch them.

● Self Diagnosis Function

A Built-in high grade self diagnosis function centrally controlled using JSB-196GM Radiotelephone ensures
easy maintenance.

● Built-in Dummy Load for ATU Self Diagnosis

The dummy load for checking the NFC-296/896 Antenna Tuning Unit (ATU) is built-in and not required to
connect as extra unit.

● Outdoor Installable Antenna Tuning Unit

The NFC-296/896 Antenna Tuning Unit can be installed outdoors such as on deck, ensuring effective emission
of transmitter power.

1-1
1.3 Configuration

WARNING
Do not disassemble or modify this unit. Doing so may cause fire, electrical sh
ock, or failure.

Do not use a voltage other than specified. Doing so may cause fire, electrical
shock, or failure.

CAUTION
Do not use this equipment in an environment other than that specified.
Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Do not install the equipment in a place near water or in one with excessive humidity,
steam, dust or soot. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or failure.

Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment. Doing so
may cause electrical shock or failure.

Do not place this equipment anywhere vibration or impact is likely to occur. Doing so
may cause a failure or injury.

Do not place anything on top of this equipment. Doing so may cause fire or failure.

1-2
 NKG-800 Printer

NFC-296/896 ATU

NDZ-127J/NDZ-227 DTE

NDF-268/269 Keyboard for 127J NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier
NDF-369 Keyboard for 227 JSB-196GM Radiotelephone

PA UNIT ATU UNIT

JSS-296 NAH-692 NFC-296
JSS-596 NAH-695 NFC-896
JSS-896 NAH-698 NFC-896

1-3
1.4 External View
● JSB-196GM Radiotelephone

(Unit: mm)
● NFC-296/896 Antenna Tuner

(Unit: mm)
1-4
● NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem

(Unit: mm)

● NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier

(Unit: mm)
1-5
1.5 Block Diagram
● JSB-196GM MF/HF Radio Equipment
1-6
 ● NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem
BKDRIVE BK -BK
LE
W/K CONTROL
RF TEST
MUTE DATA1
CONT 1/P
RF AGC S-AD
CLK1
CDJ-1701
RF AMP 455k IF AMP
2.1875 DDS1 DDS2
AGC AGC
25M VCO LPF
4.2075 AMP DET
ANT
BK

DIODE SWITCH

DIODE SWITCH
6.312 PFD
RELAY
IF AMP fDDS

DATA2
VCO2
VCO3

LLD

CLK2

BLD
8.4145
E
QCK
12.577 BFOCONT

UNLOCK
VCO1
VCO2
VCO3

LK
ARRE-
STER 16.8045
RFTS

IF AMP IF AMP RFTEST RFTS(10kHz)

1.6 HPF

FSTS MARK
DECODER
FSTEST
LOCAL 40.455M IF AMP LOCAL

AGC OFF
AMP AMP

RFBAND
LNCONT
FSTEST

5V_CHK
DET

DATA1
DATA2

SCCLK
MUTE

CLK1
CLK2
FSTS

VCO1

S_AD
790±85Hz

LLD
SLD

QCK
LE

LK
RF BAND RF AGC
ALC
BFO
455.79kHz SPACE
1st LOCAL (456.7kHz) SCCLK

CPU
42.6425～
57.2595MHz ×２
LINE AMP
LINE
W/K RF AMP

DOT RESET
EXT LINE IN

SERIAL
LINE OUT
EEPROM
CAF-450

DOT DET
LN CONT

DC OUT
20MHz
MOTHER BOARD
CQC-1962 40/50MHz
AF MONI

+5V +12V
×４
1/2
×５
20MHz
-BK
REG
40MHz CONT

J2

DTCXO

+12V
-BK WR_SERIAL
EPROM1
EPROM2

EEPROM

20MHz
RAM1
RAM2

DC/DC POWER
LCD UNIT I/O
MARK CONV. SUPPLY
J202

+12V

J1
BIT
DET
SYNC
LCD
+9V
SUB MAIN AGC
+5V
RAM CPU CPU
+5V REG
SPACE
SCCLK -5V

TB1
EPROM
-9V
TIMER OUT LVL
PRN
PANEL FS_DC
ATT PWR

PANEL BOARD NMEA

BIT
J203

J203
1-7

LINE AMP
SYNC

LINE OUT
CDT-1962 8255 PIO

LINE IN
TRX_SERIAL
-BK
NMEA RS422 CONTROL BOARD
J201
WR_SERIAL
RS232C

J3 TB2
CDJ-1999N
PRINTER TRANSCEIVER TRX/NMEA
1-8

● NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier

NAH-692/695/698 PA UNIT
NAH-296/596/896 PA UNIT

PS UNIT

DC350V DC24V DC26-30V

AC IN PFC DC24V(Battery)
DC/DC 1

DC24V(VHF)
DC12V DC24V
DC/DC 3
DC24V(SES)
SES
or

DC24V
DC24V
DC12V DC80V DC24V MF/HF DC13.6V
Sub-PS DC/DC 2 DC/DC 4 DC13.6V(JSB-196)

DC80V

+BK/RBK

CONT
PA UNIT*

Serial
(TXD/RXD)
PA(A)
JSB-196GM (300W)
Radiotelephone Analog value

PA_MUTE
Spliter RF IN
PA(B) from JSB-196
(300W)
Serial
(TXD/RXD)
CONT
NFC-196
ATU ANT CURR PA(C) Surge RF OUT
Combiner
(300W) Suppressor to ATU

PA_MUTE

+BK/-BK/RBK
External
Units PA/PS control
TX_INH Note) JSS-296 needs PA(A) only.
Analog value Additionally JSS-596 needs PA(A) and PA(B), and
JSS-896 needs all of the PA modele (A to C).
Alarm
 ● NFC-296/896 Antenna Tuning Unit
896 only
L0～L8 L9 Cs
ANTCURR
RF INPUT Matchung sensor TRANS
sensor to Ａntenna
E

L_PHASE

SWR_Vf
SWR_Vr

LOW_R
Co_on

Reset Ci0 Co0 Cp

～Ci8 ～Co6
+12V Dummy

7
A/D
A/D

9
Serial 30
PIO Driver
TXD

NAH- Serial I/F CPU

RXD UNIT_A
692/695/698
PCB ID
UNIT_B
PA_MUTE
A/D

TEMP
Tempeture
FROM HI_TEMP(inside>70deg) detection

ANT_CURR
RBK
1-9
1-10
 2. PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
● JSB-196GM Radio Equipment

Operation Panel

MIC Connector

NQW-213 PTT Switch

Hand Set

Fuse 40A
Fuse 40A
Rx Antenna Input

Ground Terminal

Ground Terminal

External Speaker Output

ATU Control Output

Accessory Terminal

NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem

GLOBE E-mail (option) / PC

13.6VDC Power Source Input Telegraph Key Jack

2-1
①

⑦

,.
SCAN SQL ATT NR
RX FREQ kHz AGC MODE 2182

,.
RDY TX TUNE

⑧ ⑨
TX FREQ kHz LO
1 2 3 4 5A

⑩
②

⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE 1.5m

③
④
⑤
⑥

① Liquid Crystal Display Panel ⑧ ENT

Enters the input information.

⑨ CH
② MIC Starts channel selection.
Connects the hand microphone or
handset. ⑩ Jog Dial
Used to select a channel or receive
③ POWER
frequency or to select a menu.
Turns power ON or OFF.
⑪ VOLUME
④ DIMMER Controls the sound volume of reception.
Controls the brightness of the LCD.
⑫ ATT
Turns the attenuator ON or OFF.
⑤ RF GAIN
Controls the RF gain. ⑬ ANT
TUNE
Starts antenna tuning.
⑥ CLARI
Adjusts the frequency variation, which LISN/
ranges from –200 to +200Hz in 1Hz ⑭ TX
steps. Temporarily monitors the transmission
frequency in the Semi-Duplex mode
⑦ 0 ～ 9 , MENU CLR
These buttons are used to input ⑮ NR
frequency/channel values or to set a menu. Reduces pulsating noises.

2-2
●NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem

Operation Panel

DTE Terminal

DMC Terminal
Power Switch

Rx Antenna Input

Ground Terminal

TRX/NMEA Terminal

JSB-196/196GM Terminal

Fuse 7.5A Printer Terminal

Printer
13.6VDC Power Output Terminal
13.6VDC Power Source Input

2-3
①
NCT-196N DSC/NBDP MODEM

⑦
⑧⑨⑩
1st: PRESS TO VERIFY & EDIT MESSAGE
2nd: PRESS & HOLD UNTIL BEEP SOUNDS
CONTINUOUSLY TO TRANSMIT

②
③

⑪⑫⑬
④
⑤
⑥

① Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Panel 3 PRINT: Prints the current mode operations. In
"DSC watching" mode, this key selects
② DISTRESS "PRINT MENU."
Sends a distress call. 4 QUIT: Quits editing and returns to the higher
mode (MENU, etc.).
5 POS: When selecting "WORK FREQUENCY"
③ Transmit/Receive lamp
Red: Lights when a distress or emergency and "POSITION" when editing a
call is being sent or received. message, this key switches to
Green : Lights when a normal call is being "POSITION".
6 FREQ: When selecting "WORK FREQUENCY"
sent or received.
and "POSITION" when editing a
④ 2187.5kHz , 8414.5kHz message, this key switches to "WORK
Sets the JSB-196/196GM to the designated FREQUENCY".
9 SAVE: Saves edited data and returns to the
frequency and F1B mode.
higher mode (MENU, etc.).
⑤ STOP
⑧ ENT
・ Stops the call if pressed while a call is being sent.
Enters key input and selected items.
・ Turns off the alarm lamp and cancels the buzzer if
pressed when a call is being received.
⑨ MENU
・ If you press this key followed by the FUNC , the
When pressed in "DSC watching" mode, the
software version is displayed and the set navigation
screen switches from "MENU#1" to "MENU#2"
aid/radio equipment is momentarily displayed. (This
to "DSC watching", in that order.
is not the initial setting process.)
⑩ FUNC
⑥ CALL
Press this key to select the functions indicated in
Press after editing a message to start
blue.
Transmission of the message.

0 ⑪
⑦ to 9 , .
Horizontal: Use to selectively display received
・ When editing, these keys enter the indicated messages and to select the
numbers. contents when editing messages.
・ If you press the FUNC key followed by 1 Vertical: Use to scroll the display and to
to 6 and 9 , the following operations are move the screen pointer vertically.
performed:
⑫ CLR
1 SCAN: Alternately starts and stops scanning
・ Deletes data that has been keyed in.
when using the JSB-196/196GM to scan
・ Enters the initial value when entering "POSITION"
the receive frequencies.
or "WORK FREQUENCY."
2 DIM Adjusts the LCD and key brightness in
four steps.
⑬ Watch-keeping receiver channel
Lights the channel scanned by the watch-
keeping receiver. 2187.5kHz and 8414.5kHz are
fixed and cannot be switched.

2-4
● NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier

① ② ③

④ ⑤

⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬

⑭ ⑮

2-5
① Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Panel
Display for menu mode or selected meter value

② Menu Buttons
・ DIM: Dimmer control switch (High/ Medium/ Low)
・ CLR: Clear button for menu selection or alarm sound
・ MENU: MENU mode setting button
・ ENT: Selected menu or parameter entry button

③ Menu Dial
Adjust the LCD contrast and select the menu items

④ AC Power Switch

⑤ DC Power Switch

⑥ AC IN
JSS-296 AC100V～240V mains connector
JSS-596/896 AC200V～240V mains connector

⑦ DC13.6V
DC13.6V power source output connector for JSB-196GM/NCT-196N

⑧ 24V BATTERY
DC24V power source input connector

⑨ ACCESSORY
Peripherals (+/-BK, SES, ANT Changer, etc) control signal connector

⑩ TUNER
Tuning control signal connector (to NFC-296/896 ATU)

⑪ TUNER/JSB-196GM
Tuning control signal connector (from JSB-196GM Radiotelephone)

⑫ BATTERY MONITOR
Battery and charger status monitor output connector

⑬ AUX P/S
DC24V power source output connector (for SES, VHF, etc)

⑭ PA IN
RF input connector (from JSB-196GM Radiotelephone)

⑮ PA OUT
RF output connector (to NFC-296/896 ATU)

⑯ GND

2-6
 3. OPERATIONS
This chapter describes mainly the way to use the JSS-296/596/896.

ATTENTION
Regarding the JSB-196GM Radiotelephone or NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem operations in detail,
see the specialized instruction manuals for them respectively.

3.1 System Standby

3.1.1 Turning the Power ON

1. Turn on the AC and DC switches of NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier.

The other components except for JSB-196GM Radiotelephone are turned ON
simultaneously. After that the LCD on the front panel of the NAH-692/695/698 Power
Amplifier shows as follows.

AC Volt 221V
DC Volt 24.2V

2. Turn on the POWER switch of JSB-196GM Radiotelephone. (Note that it is

necessary to keep the POWER switch press for 1 sec at least to turn it on.)

Keep the NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem power switch turn ON because of the
Note
obligation to watchkeep 24 hours a day while at sea.

3.1.2 Turning the Power OFF

1. Turn off the AC and DC switches of NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier.

The other components including NCT-196N DSC/NBDP Modem are turned OFF
Note
simultaneously. Therefore don’t turn OFF the switches while at sea because of the
obligation to watchkeep 24 hours a day.

Note External units (GPS, VHF, etc.) are always connected to DC power supply
(battery) regardless of DC switch on NAH-692/695/698. Therefore, when AC
switch is OFF, turn OFF the power supply of external units not to discharge a
battery.

3-1
3.2 MODE Change

After turning ON the system, NCT-196N selects the DSC mode. If needed to change the mode,
operate the system in accordance with the following procedure.

3.2.1 MODE change to DSC

1. Confirm that the NCT-196N displays the following screen.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

--------------------------------------------
MODE: XXXX （Press ENT to set DSC mode.）
--------------------------------------------

2. Press ENT on the panel of the NCT-196N.

Note It is also available to press the keys concerning to Distress

( 2187.5kHz , 8414.5kHz , or DISTRESS ) .

3. After the mode change completed, the following initial display appears.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

Note The mode of the peripheral units such as JSB-196/196GM Radiotelephone and
NDZ-127J/NDZ-227 DTE is changed to DSC mode simultaneously by the
above-mentioned operation.

3-2
3.2.2 MODE change to TLX

1. Confirm that the NDZ-127J/NDZ-227 displays the following screen in any mode except
for TLX.
[xxx] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)
Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Mode Connect Service System Help
[ STATUS INFO ]
Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER
[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]
Tx.POWER:[FULL]
Last status messages
Press Enter key to set NBDP mode...

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

2. Press Enter on the keyboard.

3. After the mode change completed, the following initial display appears.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File
File Mode Connect Service System Help
[ STATUS INFO ]
ST-BY
Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER
[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]
Tx.POWER:[FULL]
Last status messages

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

Note The mode of the peripheral units such as JSB-196/196GM and NCT-196N is
changed to TLX mode simultaneously by the above-mentioned operation.

3-3
3.3 Setting Position and Time Data
ATTENTION
If the position and time data from navigation aids such as a GPS receiver stop for more than 5 minutes,
or if it past for more than 4 hours without further input after entering position and time data manually, the
NCT-196N sounds alarm. When the alarm sounding in condition of navigation aid connecting, check
the navigation aid or the connections to the NCT-196N. Or when the alarm sounding in condition of no
navigation aid connecting, enter the new position and time data manually.

3.3.1 Setting the Internal Clock (DATE & TIME EDIT)

The built-in clock of the NCT-196N can be set the date (year, month, and day) and time manually. However if the
NCT-196N is connected to a navigation aid, the manual input data is overwritten because the navigation aid has
priority over the NCT-196N internal clock. The standard time is UTC but it is possible to input time difference from
the UTC and display the current local time (LT). Note that in case of no navigation aid connecting, time data
should be set to the present time manually and periodically because the time data input manually is treated as
invalid data and deleted after 23.5 hours past.

Procedure
1. Check that the "DSC watching" screen is displayed.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26 P

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

If the "DSC watching" screen is not displayed, press STOP 3 times in succession to switch to the
Note "DSC watching" screen.
On the screen P mark is displayed when no printer is connected to the NCT-196N.

2. Press MENU .
The "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen is displayed.

MENU #1-EDIT&CALL Select no.

1.Individual call
2.Acknowledgement call
3.Distress call
4.Distress relay call
5.Auto/semi-auto call
6.All ships call Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
7.Group call
8.Area call
9.Position request
10.Polling call
11.Test call

3-4
 3. Press MENU again.
The "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen is displayed.

MENU #2 -READOUT&SETUP Select no.

1.Received distress message readout
2.Received others message readout
3.Setup Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
4.Self test

4. Press 3 , and then press ENT .

The "SETUP" screen is displayed.

SETUP Select no.

1.Date&time edit
2.Position edit
3.Calling frequency registration
4.Address registration
5.Distress setup Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
6.Others alarm setup
7.Automatic acknowledgement setup
8.Scanning setup
9.Watchkeeping receiver setup

5. From the "SETUP" screen, press 1 , and then press ENT .

The "DATE&TIME EDIT" screen is displayed.

DATE&TIME EDIT
Date (dd:mm:yy):06.05.00
Time (hh:mm) :19:23
Time difference:-05:00
Display time :UTC Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.

6. Enter the respective settings.

・When the display time is set to "LT", enter the difference to the UTC in the "Time difference" item.
・Use the cursor keys ( and ) to switch between "+/-" for the "Time difference" and between
"UTC/LT" for the "Display time".

7. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).
Operation returns to the "SETUP" screen.

Note If you press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT), the settings are discarded.

3-5
3.3.2 Specifying Position Input (POSITION EDIT)

This operation enters the ship's position data manually. However if the NCT-196N is connected to a navigation aid,
which inputs the date and time data, the data from the navigation aid overwrite this position data input manually
because the navigation aid has priority over the NCT-196N. The position data is used in the distress file when
pressing the DISTRESS button, in the automatic acknowledgement files and as the initial value when editing
messages. For the "SETUP" screen, please see Section 3.3.1, "Setting the Internal Clock (DATE&TIME EDIT)",
steps 1 to 4. Note that in case of no navigation aid connecting, the position data should be set manually and
periodically because it is treated as invalid and deleted after 23.5 hours past.

Procedure
1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 2 and then press ENT .
The "POSITION EDIT" screen is displayed.

POSITION EDIT
Position Data: 12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E

2. Enter the ship's position.

・Use the cursor keys ( and ) to switch between "NE", "NW", "SE", and "SW".

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).
Operation returns to the "SETUP" screen.

Note If you press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT), the settings are discarded.

3-6
3.4 Radiotelephone operations
3.4.1 Turning the Power ON / OFF

CAUTION
Never touch the antenna terminal, grounding terminal or counterpoise when the
JSB-196GM is turned ON. Doing so, may cause electrical shock.

Place Antenna Tuner NFC-196, antenna and counterpoise in position where no one
touches them. Doing not so, may cause electrical shock.

3.4.1.1 Turning the Power ON

Press POWER on the front panel until the channel and frequencies are displayed as follows:

 
RX FREQ ,. NR
KHz AGC
RDY
TX FREQ ,. KHz

Figure 5.1 Initial display on the LCD (immediately after the equipment is powered on)

3.4.1.2 Turning the Power OFF

Press POWER until LCD disappears.

Note The latest frequency and set-up state information such as communication mode are
stored in memory when the equipment is turned OFF. It will be set automatically when
the equipment is powered on again except the following items and these items will be
set to as follows:

⋅ Built-in loudspeaker ON/OFF (ON as default)

⋅ Squelch value (0 as default)

3-7
3.4.2 Communication Procedure

The JSB-196GM employs the Jog Dial for simply setting or selection for principal functions such as
TX/RX frequency, communication mode, output power, squelch, AGC, etc. and the following
procedures are provided for pleasant communication.

3.4.2.1 Setting the channel number with the Jog Dial

User channels can be set with the Jog Dial.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

(in the TEL mode)
Example of user channel number 101

1. Press CH .
  
Group number appears in the channel field
of the LCD.

2. Turn the Jog Dial. (*1)

  
Turn the Jog Dial until the group number,
ex. ”GROUP 6 TEL”, including the objective
channel number is displayed.

3. Press ENT .  

User channel number is displayed.

4. Turn the Jog Dial again until the objective

number, ”USR-101” is displayed and   
complete setting. NB

RX FREQ ,. KHz AGC

,.
RDY
RDY TUNE

ANT TX FREQ KHz

If TUNE is blinking, press TUNE .

TUNE lights steadily during tuning, and

disappear when tuning is completed.

5. With these steps, the JSB-196GM is ready

to communicate. Start communication by
 
NR
pressing PTT on the hand set.
RX FREQ ,. KHz AGC
TUNE
,.
RDY

TX FREQ KHz

Note*1 For easy selection of a channel number, you can allocate an identification label to
each channel (See "3.4.3.6 Registering the user channel").

3-8
3.4.2.2 Monitoring the transmission frequency

In semi-duplex mode the TX/RX frequency are set differently , though only one way transmission or
reception is possible at the same time. The transmission frequency signal can be checked for
interference.

Procedure

LISN/
1. Press TX .
LISN/
JSB-196 starts to receive TX frequency. After the check, press TX again or transmit to
return to the initial state.

3.4.2.3 Setting the channel number with keypad

User channel number can be set with keypad as follows.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

(in the TEL mode)
Example of user channel number 101 (RX
frequency 26145.0 kHz / TX frequency
25070.0 kHz).
  
1. Press CH .

"GROUP 1 TEL" appears in the channel

field of the LCD.

2. Press 1 , 0 and 1 .

The channel number is displayed in the  

channel field of the LCD.
User channel number: 1 to 200
Note ITU channel number:
TEL: 401 to 2517 CW : 401 to 2524
TLX: 401 to 2571 DSC: 401 to 2503
3. Press ENT .

The input channel number is fixed.  

NB

RX FREQ ,. KHz AGC

,.
RDY
RDY TUNE

4. Input the RX/TX frequency. TX FREQ KHz

See the「4.3.3.6 Registering the user

channel step 4～7」.

ANT
5. If TUNE is blinking, press TUNE .
 
NR
TUNE lights steadily during tuning, and
disappear when tuning is completed. RX FREQ ,. KHz AGC
TUNE
,.
RDY

6. With these steps, the JSB-196GM is ready TX FREQ KHz

to communicate. Start communication by
pressing PTT on the Hand set.

Note At channel setting, current mode must not be DSC mode.

3-9
3.4.2.4 Manually inputting frequency

In this case, communication mode must be set in advance(For setting of a radio mode, see "5.3.1
setting a communication mode").TX and RX frequency can be set with keypad as follows.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

(in the TEL mode)
Example of RX frequency 4357.0 kHz / TX
frequency 4065.0 kHz .

1. Press 4 , 3 , 5 , 7 and 0 for 

the RX frequency. The RX frequency is
displayed in the channel field of the LCD. RX FREQ ,. KHz
NR
AGC

,.
RDY

TX FREQ KHz

2. Press ENT .

The RX frequency is fixed. When you want

to use this frequency also as a TX
frequency, press ENT again.

3. Press 4 , 0 , 6
, 5 and 0 for
the TX frequency. The TX frequency is RX FREQ ,. KHz
NR
AGC

displayed in the channel field of the LCD.

,.
RDY
TX FREQ KHz

4. Press ENT .

The TX frequency is fixed.


,.
ANT NB
5. If TUNE r is blinking, press TUNE . RX FREQ KHz AGC

,.
RDY TUNE
TUNE lights steadily during tuning, and TX FREQ KHz
disappear when tuning is complete.

6. With these steps, the JSB-196GM is ready

to communicate. Start communication by 
pressing PTT on the Hand set.
,.
NR
RX FREQ KHz AGC
RDY

TX FREQ
,. TUNE

KHz

Note • Press two or three times CH , enable to change the RX/TX frequency
individually.

• Press 0 to change the DISTRESS frequency 2,182.0 kHz.

3-10
3.4.2.5 Scanning reception

The reception frequency stored in user channel group 1 to 10, each 20 channels can be scanned.
You can select a desired group (20 user channels per group) for scanning.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

(in the TEL mode)
Example of group 7.

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until  
"SCAN" appears in the channel field of the
LCD.
 

2. Press ENT .
 
"Group 1 1" appears in the channel field of
the LCD.

3. Turn the Jog Dial until objective group is

displayed.  

4. Press ENT .

Scanning reception starts.

 
SCAN
RX FREQ ,. NR
KHz AGC
TUNE
SCAN appears on the center left of the LCD. ,.
RDY
TX FREQ KHz
The group name and number which are
scanned are displayed in the channel field of
the LCD.

5. To cancel scanning, press CLR . The last

communication mode and the frequencies
are set.

3-11
3.4.3 Other Function Settings

The function setting is basically executed by using MENU key and the Jog Dial, and the settable
items blinks and is set with ENT key.

3.4.3.1 Setting the communication mode

In the use of manually inputting frequency, communication mode must be set in advance.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

(in the TEL mode)
Example of CW.

1. Press MENU .  

"MODE" in the channel field of the LCD
blinks.

2. Press ENT .
 
The current communication mode "TEL"
blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial.

Turn the Jog Dial until objective mode.  

"CW" is blinking.

4. Press ENT .

CW is fixed as communication mode.


5. If TUNE
ANT
is blinking, press TUNE . RX FREQ ,. NB
KHz AGC
RDY
TX FREQ ,. TUNE
KHz
TUNE lights steadily during tuning. And
disappear when tuning is complete.


RX FREQ ,. NR
KHz AGC
TUNE
,.
RDY
TX FREQ KHz

Note • Press CLR to change the communication mode successively.

3-12
3.4.3.2 Setting the output power

The output power can be set to "HI" or "MID" or "LOW".

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"Power" in the channel field of the LCD
blinks.  
2. Press ENT .
 
The current output power "HI" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial until desirable power

"MID" or "LOW"(*) appears.  
4. Press ENT .
 
The output power is set to "MID" or "LOW ".
LO on the lower right corner of the LCD
turns on.

(*) The output power is set as follows.

AC operation DC operation
Remarks
HI MID LOW HI LOW
MF 200W - 50W 100W 50W "MID" can’t set
JSS-296
HF 250W - 50W 150W 50W
MF 400W 150W 50W 100W 50W
JSS-596
HF 500W 150W 50W 150W 50W
MF 400W 150W 75W 100W 50W
JSS-896
HF 800W 250W 75W 150W 50W

3.4.3.3 Turning the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) ON

The AGC circuit functions to maintain a constant receiver output by automatically adjusting the gain
according to the strength of the reception signals.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"AGC" in the channel field blinks.
 
2. Press ENT .
 
The current AGC status "SLW" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial until desirable state "FST"

or "OFF" appears.  
4. Press ENT .

The desirable "AGC" state is fixed.  

“AGC” turn on the right corner of the LCD
when you set to "SLW" or "FST".

Note In “TLX” mode, “AGC” state set to “OFF” automatically.

3-13
3.4.3.4 Adjusting squelch level

The squelch circuit functions to mute received signals based on its level. The larger the squelch
level, the larger the antenna input level is required to open the squelch circuit. When the squelch
circuit is activated (mute status), SQL in the LCD turns on.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU ,then turn the Jog Dial until

"SQUELCH" blinks.  

 
2. Press ENT .

The current squelch level “0” blinks.

 
 
3. Turn the Jog Dial until desired squelch level
appears. When turn the Jog Dial, the bar on
the bottom of the LCD expands to indicate  
the squelch level. SQL
RX FREQ ,. KHz
NR
AGC

,.
RDY TUNE
4. Press ENT . TX FREQ KHz

The squelch level is fixed.

3-14
3.4.3.5 Setting the scanning speed

The scanning time for each channel is settable between 0.3 to 5 seconds.(multiple of 0.1 second)

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

Example of 0.3 seconds.

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

 
"SCAN SPD" blinks.
 
2. Press ENT .

The current value “10” blinks.

 
3. Turn the Jog Dial until desirable scanning
time appears or manually input the value
from keypad.
 

4. Press ENT .

The scanning time is fixed to 0.3 seconds.

3.4.3.6 Registering the user channel

You use frequently can be registered as a user channel up to 200, channel number 1 to 200.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

Example of registration for RX frequency

4357.0 kHz / TX frequency 4065.0 kHz,  
communication mode is TEL, Channel Label
Registration is MITAKA1 at the user channel
number 1.

1. Make sure that a objective communication

MENU
  
mode is set and press and then
turn the Jog Dial until "USR MEMO" blinks.

2. Press ENT .

Select the user channel number with the Jog

  
Dial or keypad.

3. Press ENT .

Select the communication mode with the Jog

  
Dial(*1).

3-15
 Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

4. Press ENT .

Press 4 , 3 , 5 , 7 and 0 for  

the RX frequency. The RX frequency is
displayed in the channel field of the LCD. RX FREQ ,. KHz
NR
AGC

,.
RDY
TX FREQ KHz

5. Press ENT .

The RX frequency is fixed(*2).

6. Press 4 , 0 , 6 , 5 and 0 for

the TX frequency. The TX frequency is
displayed in the channel field of the LCD.
 
,.
NB
RX FREQ KHz AGC

,.
RDY TUNE

ENT TX FREQ KHz

7. Press .

The TX frequency is fixed.

8. Select an alphabet or number(MITAKA1)

with the Jog Dial. Input decision or
“SPACE”ENTkey is .
 
After selection, press CLR ,
,.
NB
and fix to press ENT (*3). RX FREQ KHz AGC

,.
RDY TUNE
9. The Channel Label Registration mode is TX FREQ KHz
set. If you want to complete the inputting
user channel, two times CLR .

Note *1 When correct the registered channel, press ENT , then select the collection
item as follows:
In case of change the communication mode or clear the channel, turn the Jog Dial.
Then press ENT .
In case of change the RX or TX frequency or the channel Label,
press CH successively and input the new parameter.

*2 In step 2, the frequency can be inputted manually. RX frequency and a TX

frequency in this order and go to step 8 (When you want to use an identical
frequency for reception and transmission, press ENT only after inputting RX
frequency).

*3 In step 7, you do not need the label, press ENT and go to step 9.

3-16
3.4.3.7 Registering a channel group name

200 user channels are grouped into 10 groups, each 20 channels. These groups are used for
scanning reception, and can be named for quick selection.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"GRP MEMO" blinks.  

  
2. Press ENT .

A group number “1” blinks in the right end

of the channel field of the LCD.
 
3. Turn the Jog Dial until the objective group
appears.
 

4. Press ENT .

“_” blinks.
 
5. Repeat to select an alphabet or number
with the Jog Dial, and press ENT eight
times.  

6. Channel group number is fixed.

3-17
3.4.3.8 Setting the meter indication mode

The bar indicator on the bottom of the LCD indicates signal level during reception or output during
transmission, furthermore output indication is settable to the output power mode or antenna current
mode.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"METER" blinks .
 
2. Press ENT .
 
"PWR" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial until desired mode

appears.  
"PWR" : Indication for output power.

"ANT" : Indication for antenna current.

4. Press ENT .  

Indication mode, "PWR" or "ANT", is fixed.

3.4.3.9 Setting the Automatic Tuning Start (ATS)

The ATS function is used for pre-tuning at change of channel / frequency, and tuning starts
automatically when the standing-wave ratio (SWR) is wrong.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"ATS" blinks.  
2. Press ENT .
 
"OFF" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial to set "ON" or "OFF".  

4. Press ENT .
 
The ATS function is turned "ON" or "OFF" .

3-18
3.4.3.10 Setting the wait time for ATS

On the ATS function, wait time for tuning start after change of channel / frequency is adjustable.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"ATS WAIT" blinks.  
2. Press ENT .
  
"3" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial to select the time or   

manually input the time with keypad.

4. Press ENT .   

The wait time is fixed.

3.4.3.11 Turning the key-in sounds ON / OFF

The key-in sounds are available for keypad operation.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"BEEP" blinks.  
2. Press ENT .
 
“BEEP” lights steadily and "ON" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial to select "ON" or "OFF".  

4. Press ENT .

The key-in sounds are turned "ON" or

 
"OFF".

Note The key-in sounds are suspended, when set the loudspeaker OFF.

3-19
3.4.3.12 Setting the loudspeaker output ON / OFF

The loudspeaker output can be turned OFF.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial until

"SPEAKER" blinks.  
2. Press ENT .
 
"SPEAKER" lights steadily and "ON" blinks.

3. Turn the Jog Dial to select "ON" or "OFF".  

4. Press ENT .

The loudspeaker output is turned "ON" or 

"OFF".

3-20
3.4.3.13 List of shortcut keys

The following shortcut keys are provided for easy selection of menu items.

Using a shortcut key: The expression "1. Press MENU , then turn the Jog Dial" in the above
procedure steps can be substituted by " Press MENU and input its shortcut key number with
keypad".

Shortcut key
Menu item Function
number

MODE 1 Select the communication mode.

TEL (J3E), DSC (F1B), TLX (F1B), CW (A1A), AME (H3E)

POWER 2 Set the output power to middle or low .

AGC 3 Select the AGC (Auto Gain Control) function.

SQUELCH 4 Adjust the squelch level.

SCAN 5 Enable the scanning function.

SCAN SPD 6 Set the scanning time.

USR MEMO 7 Register the user channel.

GRP MEMO 8 Register the channel group name.

METER 9 Select the bar-meter function.

ANT: antenna current, PWR: output power.

ATS 10 Enable the ATS (Automatic Tuning Start) function.

ATS WAIT 11 Set the wait time for the ATS function.

BEEP 12 Disable the key-in sound panel.

SPEAKER 13 Disable the output of the built-in loudspeaker.

CHECK 14 Perform the Self Diagnosis function.

VERSION 15 Display the farm-ware version on Control unit CDJ-1960, DSP,

Antenna Tuner and Power Amplifier.

Note The software version of JSB-196GM in the May, 2004 is ver3.4.

3-21
3-22
3.5 DSC operations
This section describes menus and modes (Section 3.5.1), receiving DSC calls (Section 3.5.2), and making DSC
calls (Section 3.5.3). Section 3.5.4 describes how to store the calling frequencies used with the DSC, and the
setting of destination IDs, etc.

3.5.1 Menus and Modes

(1) Menu Hierarchy

The menus displayed on the screen have the following hierarchical structure.

DSC watching

MENU#1-EDIT&CALL
1.Individual call
2.Acknowledgement call
3.Distress call
4.Distress relay call
5.Auto/semi-auto call
6.All ships call
7.Group call
8.Area call
9.Position request
10.Polling call
11.Test call

MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP
1.Received distress message readout
2.Received others message readout
3.Setup
1.Data&time edit
2.Position edit
3.Calling frequency registration
4.Address registration
5.Distress setup
6.Others alarm setup
7.Automatic acknowledgement setup
8.Scanning setup
9.Watchkeeping receiver setup
4.Self test
1.Modem loop test
2.Printer test
3.Display test
4.Frequency remote test
5.Watchkeeping receiver test

RECEIVED MESSAGE

PRINT MENU
1.ALL RECEIVED DISTRESS MESSAGES
2.ALL RECEIVED OTHERS MESSAGES
3.ALL EDIT/CALL MESSAGES
4.ALL SETUP INFORMATION

3-23
(2) Transition Among Modes
The following chart shows the keys and key combinations used to shift from one mode to another
on the NCT-196N.

Print
menu

FUNC 3 Select print menu.

FUNC 4 Quit print menu.

Received message
DSC Display and print
watching received message.
FUNC 4

STOP Press once to clear the call alarm

MENU and call lamp.

STOP Press once more to quit call

message display mode.

MENU #1
No. selection
Message
editing

MENU 4
Discards the current edits and quits
FUNC
editing.

FUNC 9 saves the current edits and quits

editing.

STOP or FUNC 4 Quits readout of received message.

No. selection Readout

received
FUNC 4 MENU #2 message.
No. selection
MENU Various
settings

No. selection
Self
diagnosis

FUNC 4 Discards the current settings and

quits editing.

Saves the current settings and

FUNC 9
quits editing.

STOP Stops self-diagnostic tests.

FUNC 9 Quits self-diagnostic mode.

(From any mode, press STOP three times to return to "DSC watching.")

3-24
3.5.2 Receiving Messages

(1) Receiving a Message

When a message is received, it is displayed on the screen and printed out on the printer, if a printer is connected.
In addition, depending on its content, the message is classified as either a distress/urgent message or a general
message and the corresponding panel lamp blinks. Simultaneously, a buzzer sounds to indicate which type of
message has been received. The message is then saved as either a distress/urgent message or a general
message.

●DISTRESS/URGENCY lamp lights.

●Distress/urgent buzzer sounds.
Print received Is this a distress or YES
●Message stored internally as distress/urgent
message. urgent message? message.
●Note, however, that if a message with identical
content has already been received, this
NO message is not stored.

●OTHERS lamp lights.

●General call buzzer sounds.
●Message stored internally as general message.
●Note that even if a message with identical
content has already been received, this
message is stored.

The NCT-196N stores up to 20 received distress/urgent messages and up to 20 general messages. When 20
messages have been stored, the oldest message is deleted each time a new message is received.

In case of distress/urgent messages, newly received messages are not stored if a message with the same
content already exists in memory. However, if any error occurs while receiving the message, both of the
messages containing the error and the error-free message are stored.
In case of general messages, the NCT-196N stores both the original message and the new message even if they
have the same content as each other.

Distress/urgent messages ········· Messages in "DISTRESS" format or for which the category is
Note "DISTRESS" or "URGENCY".
General messages····················· Messages other than distress/urgent messages.

3-25
(2) Reading a Distress/Urgent Message
Messages are loaded at the "DSC watching" screen.

ATTENTION
To prevent unnecessary distress message relay transmission, the NCT-196N automatically deletes
distress/urgency messages after 48 hours since these received. Thus the procedure above-
mentioned to read distress message received is invalid at that time.

Procedure
1. Check that the "DSC watching" screen is displayed.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26 P

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

If the "DSC watching" screen is not displayed, press STOP 3 times in succession to switch to the
Note "DSC watching" screen.
On the screen P mark is displayed when no printer is connected to the NCT-196N.

2. Press MENU .
The "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen is displayed.

MENU #1-EDIT&CALL Select no.

1.Individual call
2.Acknowledgement call
3.Distress call
4.Distress relay call
5.Auto/semi-auto call
6.All ships call Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
7.Group call
8.Area call
9.Position request
10.Polling call
11.Test call

3. Press MENU again.

The "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen is displayed.

MENU #2 -READOUT&SETUP Select no.

1.Received distress message readout
2.Received others message readout
3.Setup Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
4.Self test

3-26
 4. Press 1 , and then press ENT .
The "RECEIVED DISTRESS MESSAGE READOUT" screen is displayed.

RECEIVED DISTRESS MESSAGE READOUT #01

RX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26
Format :DISTRESS
Address :XXXXXXXXX
Nature :UNDESIGNATED DIST
Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
Dist-position :12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
Dist-UTC :01:26
Dist-telecomm :J3E TEL
End of sequence:EOS
RX frequency : . kHz

Use the horizontal cursor keys ( and ) to display other received messages.

Note The following screen is displayed if no distress messages have been received or deleted after
48hours past.

RECEIVED DISTRESS MESSAGE READOUT

Received message not found !!

5. After reading the message(s), press FUNC , and then press 4 .

Operation returns to the "MENU#2 READOUT&SETUP" screen.

6. Press MENU .
Operation returns to the "DSC watching" screen.

3-27
(3) Reading a General Message
Messages are loaded at the "DSC watching" screen.

Procedure

1. Press MENU twice to display the "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen.

The screen shown in step 3 of "(2) Reading a Distress/Urgent Message" is displayed.

2. Press 2 , and then ENT .

RECEIVED OTHERS MESSAGE READOUT #01

RX date&time :06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26
Format :INDIVIDUAL
Address :XXXXXXXXX
Category :ROUTINE
Telecommand1 :J3E TEL Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll.
Telecommand2 :NO INFORMATION
Work TX/RX freq:12,321.0/12,343.2 kHz
End of sequence:ACK RQ
RX frequency :12,187.5 kHz

Note The following screen is displayed if no general messages have been received.

RECEIVED OTHERS MESSAGE READOUT

Received message not found !!

3. After reading the message(s), press FUNC , and then press 4 .

Operation returns to the "MENU#2 READOUT&SETUP" screen.

4. Press MENU .
Operation returns to the "DSC watching" screen.

3-28
3.5.3 Sending Messages

The following table lists the menus and menu items. When compiling a message, select the necessary items from
these menus. Refer to the section on making calls for how to select the items for the respective call types.

Menu Menu items Content

FORMAT INDIVIDUAL
AUTO／SEMI－AUTO
DISTRESS
ALL SHIPS
GROUP
AREA
CATEGORY URGENCY
SAFETY
SHIP’S BUSINESS
ROUTINE
DISTRESS
TELECOMMAND1 POLLING
UNCOMPLY
DATA MODEM
J3E TEL
F1B／J2B FEC TTY
F1B／J2B ARQ TTY
F1B／J2B REC TTY
F1B／J2B TTY
A1A MORSE RECORD
SHIP’S POSITION
A1A MORSE KEY
F1C／F2C／F3C FAX
NO INFORMATION
F3E／G3E SIMP TEL
F3E／G3E DUP TEL
DISTRESS RELAY
DISTRESS ACK
END OF SEQUENCE
TEST
TELECOMMAND2 NO INFORMATION
RES18SHIP／AIR
MEDICAL TRANS
PUB CALL OFFICE
NO REASON
CONGESTION
BUSY
QUEUE
STATION BARRED
NO OPERATOR
NO OPR TEMPRY
EQUIP DISABLED
UNUSABLE FREQ
UNUSABLE MODE
ITU－T V.21
ITU－T V.22
ITU－T V.22 BIS
ITU－T V.23
ITU－T V.26 BIS
ITU－T V.26 TER
ITU－T V.27 TER
ITU－T V.32

3-29
 Menu Menu items Content
NATURE UNDESIGNATED DIST
ABANDONING
EPIRB EMISSION
FIRE／EXPLOSION
FLOODING
COLLISION
GROUNDING
LISTING
SINKING
DISABLED／ADRIFT
MAN OVERBOARD
PIRACY／ROBBERY
TELECOMMAND J3E TEL
F3E／J3E SIMP TEL
F3E／J3E DUP TEL
F1B／J2B FEC TTY
F1B／J2B ARQ TTY
EOS ACK RQ
ACK BQ
EOS

3-30
 (1) INDIVIDUAL CALL

Compiling and transmitting the message is enabled by specifying the address of a specific coastal or ship station.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 SHIP'S POTISION

INDIVIDUAL F1B/J2B FEC TTY NO INFORMATION 12°34'N123°45'E
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY RES18 SHIP/AIR
F1B/J2B REC TTY MEDICALTRANS
ADDRESS F1B/J2B TTY
XXXXXXXXX A1A MORSE RECORD TELECOMMAND-2
SHIP'S POSITION NO INFORMATION
A1A MORSE KEY RES18 SHIP/AIR
CATEGORY NO INFORMATION MEDICALTRANS
URGENCY POLLING PUB CALL OFFICE
ROUTINE J3E TEL TELECOMMAND-2 WORK TX/RX FREQ
SHIP'S BUSINESS F1C/F2C/F3C FAX NO INFORMATION 12345.6/12346.5
SAFETY F3E/G3E SIMP TEL ITU-T V.21
DISTRESS F3E/G3E DUP TEL ITU-T V.22
ITU-T V.22 BIS
ITU-T V.23
TELECOMMAND-1 ITU-T V.26 BIS
DATA MODEM ITU-T V.26 TER
ITU-T V.27 TER
ITU-T V.32
TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2
UNCOMPLY NO REASON
CONGESTION
BUSY
QUEUE
STATION BARRED
NO OPERATOR
NO-OPR TEMPRLY
EQUIP DISABLED
UNUSABLE FREQ
UNUSABLE MODE
TELECOMMAND-1 CALL TX/RX FREQ
TEST 4208.0/4219.5
NOTE:can only be selected when SAFETY category is selected.
TELECOMMAND-1 DIST-ADDRESS
EOS
NOTE:can only be selected when DISTRESS RELAY XXXXXXXXX
ACK RQ
DISTRESS category is selected and the destination is a coastal station.

NATURE DIST-POTISION DIST-UTC DIST-TELECOMM

FIRE/EXPLOSION 12°34'N123°45'E 12:34 F1B/J2B FEC TTY
FLOODING F1B/J2B ARQ TTY
COLLISION J3E TEL
GROUNDING F3E/G3E SIMP TEL
LISTING F3E/G3E DUP TEL
SINKING
DISABLED/ADRIFT
UNDESIGNATED DIST
ABANDONING
PIRACY/ROBBERY
MAN OVERBOARD
EPIRB EMISSION

3-31
 Procedure
Example: ROUTINE procedure.

1. Check that the "DSC watching" screen is displayed.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

2. Press MENU .
The "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen is displayed.

MENU #1-EDIT&CALL Select no.

1.Individual call
2.Acknowledgement
3.Distress call
4.Distress relay call
5.Auto/semi-auto call
6.All ships call Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll the screen.
7.Group call
8.Area call
9.Position request
10.Polling call
11.Test call

3. Press 1 , and then press ENT .

The "INDIVIDUAL CALL" screen is displayed.

INDIVIDUAL CALL Transmissible

Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Category ：ROUTINE
Telecommand-1 ：J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 ：NO INFORMATION Use ▲ and ▼ to
Ship’s position：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E scroll the screen.
Call TX/RX freq： 4,208.0／ 4,219.5 kHz

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Category｣ ：ROUTINE
｢Telecommand-1｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Telecommand-2｣ ：NO INFORMATION
｢Ship’s position｣ ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0/4,219.5 kHz

3-32
 ●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to specify the address of the destination
station (coastal or ship station).
(2) Category
Telecommand-1: Use the and keys to select the items.
Telecommand-2

(3) Ship's position: Use the and keys to determine the direction, and then input the
ship's position using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(4) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies, or use
the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ,and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

(5) Other settings:

・"Work TX/RX freq": Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ,and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

・Switching from "Ship's position" to "Work TX/RX freq": Press FUNC 6 (FREQ).

・Switching from "Work TX/RX freq" to "Ship's position": Press FUNC 5 (POS).

Note Set the "Work TX/RX freq" to a frequency in the same band as "Call TX/RX freq".

4. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

INDIVIDUAL CALL Transmitting

TX frequency : 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time : 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed for a while, and the message is
saved. After that returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

INDIVIDUAL CALL Send Completed

TX frequency : 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time : 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

Refer to the example in "(6) ALL SHIPS CALL" for information on the DISTRESS RELAY procedure.
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).
To discard the message and quit, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).

3-33
(2) ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CALL

In the event that the received general message requests acknowledgement, a message of acknowledgement is
automatically produced. Creating and transmitting a distress acknowledgement message is also possible.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2

ALL SHIPS UNCOMPLY NO REASON
INDIVIDUAL CONGESTION
BUSY
TELECOMMAND-1 QUEUE
ADDRESS F1B/J2B FEC TTY STATION BARRED
XXXXXXXXX F1B/J2B ARQ TTY NO OPERATOR
F1B/J2B REC TTY NO-OPR TEMPRLY
F1B/J2B TTY EQUIP DISABLED
CATEGORY A1A MORSE RECORD UNUSABLE FREQ
URGENCY SHIP'S POSITION UNUSABLE MODE
SAFETY A1A MORSE KEY
SHIP'S BUSINESS NO INFORMATION TELECOMMAND-2
ROUTINE POLLING NO INFORMATION
DISTRESS J3E TEL RES18 SHIP/AIR
F1C/F2C/F3C FAX MEDICALTRANS
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL
CATEGORY F3E/G3E DUP TEL TELECOMMAND-2
DISTRESS NO INFORMATION
[Fixed] TELECOMMAND-1 RES18 SHIP/AIR
DATA MODEM MEDICALTRANS
PUB CALL OFFICE
TELECOMMAND-1
DISTRESS ACK TELECOMMAND-2
DIST-ADDRESS [Fixed] NO INFORMATION
XXXXXXXXX ITU-T V.21
ITU-T V.22
ITU-T V.22 BIS
NATURE ITU-T V.23
FIRE/EXPLOSION ITU-T V.26 BIS
FLOODING ITU-T V.26 TER
COLLISION ITU-T V.27 TER
GROUNDING ITU-T V.32
LISTING
SINKING
DISABLED/ADRIFT
UNDESIGNATED DIST DIST-POTISION SHIP'S POTISION
ABANDONING 12°34'N123°45'E 12°34'N123°45'E
PIRACY/ROBBERY
MAN OVERBOARD
EPIRB EMISSION DIST-UTC WORK TX/RX FREQ
12:34 12345.6/12346.5

DIST-TELECOMM CALL TX/RX FREQ CALL TX/RX FREQ

F1B/J2B FEC TTY 2187.5/2187.5 4208.0/4219.5
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY
J3E TEL
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL EOS EOS
F3E/G3E DUP TEL EOS ACK BQ

3-34
(2-1) INDIVIDUAL ACK CALL

Procedure
Example: An acknowledgement call based on the message received

1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 2 , and then press ENT .

The "Acknowledgement" screen is displayed.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Select no.

1.INDIVIDUAL ack. Rcv：06.Sep.01:20
2.INDIVIDUAL ack. EDIT
3.DISTRESS ack. EDIT

1 :Select 1 to edit the received message.

Note 2, 3 :Select 2 or 3 to edit a new acknowledgement message.

2. Press 1 , and then press ENT .

The "INDIVIDUAL ACK CALL" screen is displayed.

INDIVIDUAL ACK CALL

Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Category ：ROUTINE
Telecommand-1 ：J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 ：NO INFORMATION
Work TX/RX freq：12,345.6/12,456.7kHz Use ▲ and ▼ to
Call TX/RX freq： 4,357.0/ 4,388.5kHz scroll the screen.

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Category｣ ：ROUTINE
｢Telecommand-1｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Telecommand-2｣ ：NO INFORMATION
｢Work TX/RX freq｣ ：12,345.6/12,456.7 kHz
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,357.0/4,388.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to specify the address of the destination
station (coastal or ship station).
(2) Category
Telecommand-1: Use the and keys to select the items.
Telecommand-2

(3) Work TX/RX freq: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly specify a
frequency.

(4) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies, or use
the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ,and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

(5) Other settings:

・Switching from "Ship's position" to "Work TX/RX freq": Press FUNC 6 (FREQ).

・Switching from "Work TX/RX freq" to "Ship's position": Press FUNC 5 (POS).

3-35
 3. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

INDIVIDUAL ACK CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,357.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed for a while. After that returns to the
"MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

INDIVIDUAL ACK CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,357.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

・ Unable to store the message.

Note ・ To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).

3-36
(2-2) DISTRESS ACK CALL
Perform the distress acknowledgement call as follows. The message is not made automatically because
confirmation of the distress condition is necessary. Compile the acknowledgment message manually and
then transmit it.
Compile the acknowledgment call so that the contents are the same as the received distress message.

ATTENTION
When a distress call is received, perform communication according to
"RECEPTION OF DSC DISTRESS ALERT".

Procedure
Example: Acknowledgement call procedure based on received distress message

1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 2 , and then press ENT .

The "Acknowledgement" screen is displayed.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Select no._

1.INDIVIDUAL ack. Rcv：06.Sep.01:20
2.INDIVIDUAL ack. EDIT
3.DISTRESS ack. EDIT

1 :Select 1 to edit the received message.

Note 2, 3 :Select 2 or 3 to edit a new acknowledgement message.

2. Press 3 , and then press ENT .

The "DISTRESS ACK CALL" screen is displayed.

DISTRESS ACK CALL

Dist-address ：XXXXXXXXX
Nature ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position ：12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E
Dist-UTC ：01:20
Dist-telecomm ：J3E TEL Use ▲ and ▼ to
Call TX/RX freq： 2,187.5 / 2,187.5 kHz scroll the screen.

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Nature｣ ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
｢Dist-position｣ ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
｢Dist-UTC｣ ：01:20
｢Dist-telecomm｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：2,187.5/2,187.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to specify the address of the destination
station (coastal or ship station).

(2) Nature
Dist-telecomm: Use the and keys to select the items.

3-37
 (3) Dist-position: Use the and keys to determine the direction, and then input the
ship's position using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(4) Dist-UTC: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the time.

(5) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies, or use
the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ,and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

3. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

DISTRESS ACK CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the following screen is displayed. Press ENT to
tune the tuner and then transmit the message.

tuner mismatch ! !
Press [ENT] key to tune & send
Press [CLR] key to send

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed and, after a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

DISTRESS ACK CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

・ Unable store the message.

Note ・ To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).

3-38
(3) DISTRESS CALL

Data such as the nature of the distress, position, and time can be compiled and transmitted in detail. A distress
call is transmitted repeatedly at 3.5- to 4.5-minute intervals until acknowledgement is received.

FORMAT DIST-ADDRESS NATURE DIST-POTISION

DISTRESS XXXXXXXXX FIRE/EXPLOSION 12°34'N123°45'E
FLOODING
COLLISION
GROUNDING
LISTING
SINKING
DISABLED/ADRIFT
UNDESIGNATED DIST
ABANDONING
PIRACY/ROBBERY
MAN OVERBOARD
EPIRB EMISSION

DIST-UTC DIST-TELECOMM CALL TX/RX FREQ EOS

12:34 F1B/J2B FEC TTY 2187.5/2187.5 EOS
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY
J3E TEL
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL
F3E/G3E DUP TEL

3-39
 Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 3 , and then press ENT .
The "DISTRESS CALL" screen is displayed.

DISTRESS CALL Transmissible

Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Nature ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position ：12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E
Dist-UTC ：01:20 Use ▲ and ▼ to
Dist-telecomm ：J3E TEL scroll the screen.
End of sequence ：EOS
Call TX/RX freq ：2,187.5 / 2,187.5 kHz

The following items have been set in this example.

*｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Nature｣ ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
｢Dist-position｣ ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
｢Dist-UTC｣ ：01:20
｢Dist-telecomm｣ ：J3E TEL
*｢End of sequence｣ ：EOS
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：2,187.5/2,187.5 kHz

Note * Not edit the these setting.

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Nature
Dist-telecomm: Use the and keys to select the items.

(2) Dist-position: Use the and keys to determine the direction, and then input the
ship's position using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(3) Dist-UTC: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the time.

(4) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies, or use
the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ,and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

2. Press DISTRESS for at least 3.5 seconds (until the intermittent alarm tone changes to
a continuous tone).
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted. The same distress message is sent 5
times in succession.

DISTRESS CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30
1/5

On completion of the transmission, the following screen is displayed. Transmission of the distress call is
repeated when the displayed time has counted down to zero.

DISTRESS CALL 2,187.5 kHz

NEXT DISTRESS CALL：AFTER 3.7 min

Press STOP to cancel the DISTRESS transmission.

Note To store the message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).
To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
The distress call is sent repeatedly until a distress call acknowledgement is received.

3-40
●About Distress Calls
Distress calls, distress relay and distress acknowledgement functions are described here.

○Distress Call Transmission

Distress type FORMAT CATEGOLY TELECOMMAND-1 Operating keys No. of transmissions
DISTRESS DISTRESS － － DISTRESS 5 successive transmissions
with intervals
DISTRESS DISTRESS － － CALL＞DISTRESS 5 successive transmissions
with intervals
DISTRESS INDIVIDUAL DISTRESS J3E TEL, etc. CALL＞DISTRESS Once only
ALL SHIPS
GROUP
AREA
DISTRESS RELAY INDIVIDUAL DISTRESS DISTRESS RELAY CALL＞DISTRESS Once only
DISTRESS RELAY ALL SHIPS DISTRESS DISTRESS RELAY CALL＞DISTRESS Once only
DISTRESS ACK ALL SHIPS DISTRESS DISTRESS ACK CALL Once only

○Distress Calls
① When transmitting without editing and using only the DISTRESS key, the message with the contents
previously compiled in the distress setting is transmitted. This message is transmitted five times
successively at 3.5- to 4.5-minute intervals.
② The following are two ways of distress transmitting after editing:
1. Transmitting details of distress conditions
This transmission is made according to 3.5.3 (3), "DISTRESS CALL." The nature of the distress, the
ship's position, time, and communication method are transmitted. The message is transmitted five times
successively at 3.5- to 4.5-minute intervals.
This is the primary method.
2. This transmission includes INDIVIDUAL, ALL SHIPS, GROUP, and AREA, and it is enabled when
"DISTRESS" is selected for the CATEGORY. The contents of the message are the same as other
messages. This message is transmitted only once.

○DISTRESS RELAY CALL

This transmission is made according to 3.5.3 (4), "DISTRESS RELAY CALL." The message to be
transmitted can be edited by selecting "DISTRESS" for FORMAT and "DISTRESS RELAY" for CATEGORY
in individual or all ships calls. However, the contents are the same. The received message is edited so that
it is the same as the received distress message. It is then transmitted to a coastal station. This message is
transmitted only once.

○DISTRESS ACK CALL

This transmission is made according to 3.5.3 (2), "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CALL (2-2)." The message is
not created automatically because the contents need to be confirmed. The acknowledgement message is
edited manually and then transmitted. It is necessary to edit the message to be transmitted according to
the contents of the received message. This message is transmitted only once by using CALL key.

ATTENTION
When a distress message is received, make the transmission according to
"RECEPTION OF DSC DISTRESS ALERT".

3-41
(4) DISTRESS RELAY CALL

Normally, a distress call is acknowledged by a coastal station, but if there is not acknowledgement by any station
(e.g., due to propagation, etc.) relay it after editing the message for a relay call by selecting this menu. Normally, a
distress relay is made by selecting this menu.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 DIST-ADDRESS

ALL SHIPS DISTRESS RELAY XXXXXXXXX
INDIVIDUAL

ADDRESS
XXXXXXXXX

CATEGORY NATURE
DISTRESS FIRE/EXPLOSION
FLOODING
COLLISION
GROUNDING
LISTING
SINKING
DISABLED/ADRIFT
UNDESIGNATED DIST
ABANDONING
PIRACY/ROBBERY
MAN OVERBOARD
EPIRB EMISSION

DIST-POTISION
12°34'N123°45'E

DIST-UTC
12:34

DIST-TELECOMM CALL TX/RX FREQ

F1B/J2B FEC TTY 2187.5/2187.5
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY
J3E TEL
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL EOS
F3E/G3E DUP TEL EOS

3-42
Procedure
Example: Procedure of a distress relay call to all ships

1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 4 , and then press ENT .

The "DISTRESS RELAY CALL" screen is displayed.

DISTRESS RELAY CALL Select no.__

1.ALL SHIP’S DIST rly EDIT
2.INDIVIDUAL DIST rly EDIT

1. Select 1 to relay the call to all ships and coastal stations.

Note 2. Select 2 to relay the call to an individual ship or coastal station.

2. Press 1 . and then press ENT .

The "ALL SHIPS DIST-RELAY" screen is displayed.

ALL SHIP’S DIST－RELAY

Dist-address ：XXXXXXXXX
Nature ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position ：12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E
Dist-UTC ：01:20
Dist-telecomm ：J3E TEL Use ▲ and ▼ to
Call TX/RX freq： 2,187.5 / 2,187.5 kHz scroll the screen.

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Dist-address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Nature｣ ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
｢Dist-position｣ ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
｢Dist-UTC｣ ：01:20
｢Dist-telecomm｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：2,187.5/2,187.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Dist-address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the address of the receiving
station (ship or coastal station).
(2) Nature
Dist-telecomm: Use the and keys to select the items.

(3) Dist-position: Use the and keys to determine the direction, and then input the
ship's position using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(4) Dist-UTC: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the time.

(4) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies, or use
the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ,and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

3-43
 3. Press CALL , and then open the cover on the left and press DISTRESS for at least 3
seconds (until the intermittent alarm tone changes to a continuous tone).
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

ALL SHIP’S DIST-RELAY Transmitting

TX frequency ： 2,187.5 kHz
TX date&time ： 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

・ Press STOP to cancel the DISTRESS transmission.

Note
・ To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
・ Unable to save the message.

3-44
(5) AUTO/SEMI-AUTO CALL

This mode is available only to coastal stations where the telephone on board can be connected on-line to a public
line on the land after DSC communication on the MF/HF band.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 SHIP'S POTISION

AUTO/SEMI SVC F1B/J2B FEC TTY NO INFORMATION 12°34'N123°45'E
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY RES18 SHIP/AIR
F1B/J2B REC TTY MEDICALTRANS
ADDRESS F1B/J2B TTY PUB CALL OFFICE
XXXXXXXXX A1A MORSE RECORD
SHIP'S POSITION
A1A MORSE KEY
CATEGORY NO INFORMATION
ROUTINE POLLING
J3E TEL
F1C/F2C/F3C FAX
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL
F3E/G3E DUP TEL
UNCOMPLY
END OF CALL

TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 WORK TX/RX FREQ

DATA MODEM NO INFORMATION 12345.6/12346.5
ITU-T V.21
ITU-T V.22
ITU-T V.22 BIS
ITU-T V.23
ITU-T V.26 BIS
ITU-T V.26 TER
ITU-T V.27 TER
ITU-T V.32
TELEPHONE NO.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

CALL TX/RX FREQ

4208.0/4219.5

EOS
ACK RQ

3-45
 Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 5 , and then press ENT .
The "AUTO/SEMI-AUTO CALL" screen is displayed.

AUTO/SEMI-AUTO CALL Transmissible

Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Telecommand-1 ：J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 ：NO INFORMATION
Ship’s position：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
Telephone no. ：04224507XX Use ▲ and ▼ to
Call TX/RX freq： 4,208.0/4,219.5kHz scroll the screen.

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Telecommand-1｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Telecommand-2｣ ：NO INFORMATION
｢Ship’s position｣ ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
｢Telephone no.｣ ：04224507XX
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0/4,219.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the address of the receiving station
(ship or coastal station).
(2) Telecommand-1: Use the and keys to select the items.
Telecommand-2

(3) Ship's-position: Use the and keys to determine the direction, and then input the
ship's position using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(4) Telephone no. Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the telephone number.

(5) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies, or use
the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to specify a frequency
directly.

(6) Other settings:

・"Work TX/RX freq": Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly specify a
frequency.

・Switching from "Ship's position" to "Work TX/RX freq": Press FUNC 6 (FREQ).

・Switching from "Work TX/RX freq" to "Ship's position": Press FUNC 5 (POS).

ATTENTION
This call requires the auto/semi-auto call service of a coastal station.
Please ask the coastal station you use for details.

3-46
 2. Press CALL
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

AUTO/SEMI-AUTO CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. After a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

AUTO/SEMI-AUTO CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).

3-47
(6) ALL SHIPS CALL

An all ships call is transmitted to all ships. Normally, this feature is used to acknowledge when a distress call is
received and a distress acknowledgement from a coastal station has not been received in response.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2

ALL SHIPS UNCOMPLY NO REASON
CONGESTION
BUSY
CATEGORY TELECOMMAND-1 QUEUE
URGENCY F1B/J2B FEC TTY STATION BARRED
SAFETY F1B/J2B ARQ TTY NO OPERATOR
DISTRESS F1B/J2B REC TTY NO-OPR TEMPORALITY
F1B/J2B TTY EQUIP DISABLED
A1A MORSE RECORD UNUSABLE FREQ
SHIP'S POSITION UNUSABLE MODE
A1A MORSE KEY
NO INFORMATION TELECOMMAND-2
POLLING NO INFORMATION
J3E TEL RES18 SHIP/AIR
F1C/F2C/F3C FAX MEDICALTRANS
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL
F3E/G3E DUP TEL TELECOMMAND-2
PUB CALL OFFICE
TELECOMMAND-1
DATA MODEM TELECOMMAND-2
NO INFORMATION
TELECOMMAND-1 ITU-T V.21
TEST ITU-T V.22
ITU-T V.22 BIS
TELECOMMAND-1 ITU-T V.23
DISTRESS RELAY ITU-T V.26 BIS
ITU-T V.26 TER
ITU-T V.27 TER
ITU-T V.32

TELECOMMAND-2
DIST-ADDRESS NO INFORMATION
987654321 [Fixed]

NATURE DIST-POTISION WORK TX/RX FREQ SHIP'S POTISION

FIRE/EXPLOSION 12°34'N123°45'E 12345.6/12346.5 12°34'N123°45'E
FLOODING
COLLISION
GROUNDING DIST-UTC WORK TX/RX FREQ
LISTING 12:34 NONE/NONE
SINKING
DISABLED/ADRIFT
UNDESIGNATED DIST DIST-TELECOMM CALL TX/RX FREQ
ABANDONING F1B/J2B FEC TTY 4208.0/4219.5
PIRACY/ROBBERY F1B/J2B ARQ TTY
MAN OVERBOARD J3E TEL
EPIRB EMISSION F3E/G3E SIMP TEL EOS
F3E/G3E DUP TEL EOS

3-48
Procedure
Example: Procedure for a distress relay call to all ships

1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 6 , and then press ENT .

The "ALL SHIPS CALL" screen is displayed.

ALL SHIPS CALL

Category ：DISTRESS
Telecommand-1 ：DISTRESS RELAY
Dist－address ：XXXXXXXXX
Nature ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
Dist-position ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E Use ▲ and ▼ to
Dist-UTC ：01:20 scroll the screen.
Dist-telecomm ：J3E TEL
Call TX/RX freq： 4,208.0 / 4,208.0 kHz

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Category｣ ：DISTRESS
｢Telecommand-1｣ ：DISTRESS RELAY
｢Dist-address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Nature｣ ：UNDESIGNATED DIST
｢Dist-position｣ ：12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E
｢Dist-UTC｣ ：01:20
｢Dist-telecomm｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0 / 4,208.0 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Dist-address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the address of the receiving
station (ship or coastal station).
(2) Category
Telecommand-1: Use the and keys to select the items.
Nature
Dist-telecomm

(3) Dist-position: Use the and keys to select the bearing, and then input the value
using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(4) Dist-UTC: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the time.

(5) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies.
Alternatively, use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly
specify a frequency.

Note Set the "Work TX/RX freq" to a frequency in the same band as the "Call TX/RX freq".

3-49
 2. Press CALL , then open the cover on the left and press DISTRESS for at least 3
seconds (until the intermittent alarm tone changes to a continuous tone).
The following screen is displayed and the set distress message is transmitted.

ALL SHIPS CALL Transmitting

TX frequency： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed and the message is automatically
saved. After a brief interval, operation returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

ALL SHIPS CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

See (1), "Individual Call" for how to send a general message.

Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).
To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).

3-50
(7) GROUP CALL

This process is used to edit and transmit a message to a specific group.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 SHIP'S POTISION

GROUP UNCOMPLY NO REASON 12°34'N123°45'E
CONGESTION
BUSY
GROUP ADDRESS TELECOMMAND-1 QUEUE
XXXXXXXXX F1B/J2B FEC TTY STATION BARRED
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY NO OPERATOR
F1B/J2B REC TTY NO-OPR TEMPORALITY
CATEGORY F1B/J2B TTY EQUIP DISABLED
URGENCY A1A MORSE RECORD UNUSABLE FREQ
SAFETY SHIP'S POSITION UNUSABLE MODE
SHIP'S BUSINESS A1A MORSE KEY
ROUTINE NO INFORMATION TELECOMMAND-2
DISTRESS POLLING NO INFORMATION
J3E TEL RES18 SHIP/AIR
F1C/F2C/F3C FAX MEDICALTRANS
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL WORK TX/RX FREQ
F3E/G3E DUP TEL TELECOMMAND-2 12345.6/12346.5
PUB CALL OFFICE

TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2
DATA MODEM NO INFORMATION
ITU-T V.21
ITU-T V.22
ITU-T V.22 BIS
ITU-T V.23
ITU-T V.26 BIS
ITU-T V.26 TER CALL TX/RX FREQ
ITU-T V.27 TER 4208.0/4219.5
ITU-T V.32

EOS
EOS

3-51
 Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 7 , and then press ENT .
The "GROUP CALL" screen is displayed.

GROUP CALL
Group address ：XXXXXXXXX
Category ：ROUTINE
Telecommand-1 ：J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 ：NO INFORMATION
Work TX/RX freq： 4,444.1／4,455.5 kHz Use ▲ and ▼ to
Call TX/RX freq： 4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz scroll the screen.

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Group address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX

｢Category｣ ：ROUTINE
｢Telecommand-1｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Telecommand-2｣ ：NO INFORMATION
｢Work TX/RX freq｣ ：4,444.1／4,455.5 kHz
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Group address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the address of the receiving
station (ship or coastal station).
(2) Category
Telecommand-1: Use the and keys to select the items.
Telecommand-2

(3) Work TX/RX freq Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly specify a
frequency.

(4) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies.
Alternatively, use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly
specify a frequency.
(5) Other settings:
・”Ship's position”: Use the and keys to select the bearing, and then input the
value using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

・Switching from "Ship's position" to "Work TX/RX freq": Press FUNC 6 (FREQ).

・Switching from "Work TX/RX freq" to "Ship's position": Press FUNC 5 (POS).

Note Set the "Work TX/RX freq" to a frequency in the same band as "Call TX/RX freq".

3-52
 2. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

GROUP CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. After a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

GROUP CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).

3-53
(8) AREA CALL

This procedure is used to edit and transmit a call message to ships in the specified area.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 SHIP'S POTISION

AREA UNCOMPLY NO REASON 12°34'N123°45'E
CONGESTION
BUSY
GEOGRAPHIC AREA TELECOMMAND-1 QUEUE
N12E123DA10DO50 F1B/J2B FEC TTY STATION BARRED
F1B/J2B ARQ TTY NO OPERATOR
F1B/J2B REC TTY NO-OPR TEMPORALITY
CATEGORY F1B/J2B TTY EQUIP DISABLED
URGENCY A1A MORSE RECORD UNUSABLE FREQ
SAFETY SHIP'S POSITION UNUSABLE MODE
SHIP'S BUSINESS A1A MORSE KEY
ROUTINE NO INFORMATION TELECOMMAND-2
DISTRESS POLLING NO INFORMATION
J3E TEL RES18 SHIP/AIR
F1C/F2C/F3C FAX MEDICALTRANS
F3E/G3E SIMP TEL WORK TX/RX FREQ
F3E/G3E DUP TEL TELECOMMAND-2 12345.6/12346.5
PUB CALL OFFICE

TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2
DATA MODEM NO INFORMATION
ITU-T V.21
ITU-T V.22
ITU-T V.22 BIS
ITU-T V.23
ITU-T V.26 BIS
ITU-T V.26 TER CALL TX/RX FREQ
ITU-T V.27 TER 4208.0/4219.5
ITU-T V.32

EOS
EOS

3-54
●Area call setting

An area call is received by all ships navigating in a designated geographical area. For the area of called
stations (PARTY AD), latitude, longitude, deviation latitude (from North to South), and deviation longitude
(from West to East) are necessary. The area of the shaded part is designated in the figure below.

N
Reference point
20°

Deviation latitude (DLAT)=10°

10°

W E
120° 170°
S Deviation longitude (LONG)=50°

First, select the direction from N.E. (North-East), N.W. (North-West), S.E. (South-East), and S.W.
(South-West). In this example, the direction is N.E.

PARTY AD ：N E DLAT LONG ／

Next, enter 20°, 120°, making this latitude 20° and longitude 120°.

PARTY AD ：N20E120 DLAT LONG ／

In addition, as the deviation latitude (DLAT) and deviation longitude (LONG) are, respectively, 10° and 50°,
input 1050..

PARTY AD ：N20E120DLAT10LONG50

Finally, press ENT to confirm the area.

Up to 99° can be input for deviation latitude and deviation longitude.

Note Ranges that include the Arctic Pole or Antarctic Pole cannot be specified.

Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 8 , and then press ENT .
The "AREA CALL" screen is displayed.

AREA CALL Transmissible

Area ：N20E120DLAT10LONG50
Category ：ROUTINE
Telecommand-1 ：J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 ：NO INFORMATION
Work TX/RX freq ： 4,444.1／4,455.5 kHz Use ▲ and ▼ to
Call TX/RX freq ： 4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz scroll the screen.

3-55
 The following items have been set in this example.

｢Area｣ ：N20E120DLAT10LONG50
｢Category｣ ：ROUTINE
｢Telecommand-1｣ ：J3E TEL
｢Telecommand-2｣ ：NO INFORMATION
｢Work TX/RX freq｣ ：4,444.1／4,455.5 kHz
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Category
Telecommand-1: Use the and keys to select the items.
Telecommand-2

(2) Area
Ship's position: Use the and keys to select the bearing, and then input the value
using the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ).

(3) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies.
Alternatively, use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly
specify a frequency.
(4) Other settings:
・"Work TX/RX freq": Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly specify a
frequency.

・Switching from "Ship's position" to "Work TX/RX freq": Press FUNC 6 (FREQ).

・Switching from "Work TX/RX freq" to "Ship's position": Press FUNC 5 (POS).

Note Set the "Work TX/RX freq" to a frequency in the same band as "Call TX/RX freq".

2. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

AREA CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. After a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

AREA CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).

3-56
(9) POSITION REQUEST CALL

This feature is used when a coastal station wants to know a ship's position, or two ships want to know each
other's position.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 FREQ/POTISION

INDIVIDUAL SHIP'S POSITION NO INFORMATION NONE/NONE
[Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed]

ADDRESS CALL TX/RX FREQ

XXXXXXXXX 4208.0/4219.5

CATEGORY EOS
ROUTINE [Fixed] ACK RQ

3-57
 Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 9 , and then press ENT .
The "POSITION REQUEST" screen is displayed.

POSITION REQUEST
Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Call TX/RX freq ： 4,208.0/4,219.5 kHz

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Address: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the address of the receiving station
(ship or coastal station).

(2) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the preset frequencies.
Alternatively, use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly
specify a frequency.

2. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

POSITION REQUEST Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. After a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

POSITION REQUEST Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).

3-58
(10) POLLING CALL

This feature is used to confirm that the destination station exists within a communication area.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 FREQ/POTISION

INDIVIDUAL POLLING NO INFORMATION NONE/NONE
[Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed]

ADDRESS CALL TX/RX FREQ

XXXXXXXXX 4208.0/4219.5

CATEGORY EOS
ROUTINE [Fixed] ACK RQ

3-59
 Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 1 0 , and then press ENT .
The "POLLING CALL" screen is displayed.

POLLING CALL
Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Call TX/RX freq： 4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

●Entering the respective items:

After selecting each item, press ENT to confirm the selection.

(1) Adress: Use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 ) to enter the address of the receiving station
(ship or coastal station).

(2) Call TX/RX freq: Use the and keys to select one of the present frequencies.
Alternatively, use the numerical keys ( 0 to 9 , and . ) to directly
Specify a frequency.

2. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

POLLING CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. After a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

POLLING CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).

3-60
(11) TEST CALL

If possible, refrain from making tests using the frequencies used for DSC distress or safety calls. However, should
such a test become unavoidable, first obtain permission from the targeted coastal station.

FORMAT TELECOMMAND-1 TELECOMMAND-2 FREQ/POTISION

INDIVIDUAL TEST NO INFORMATION NONE/NONE
[Fixed] [Fixed] [Fixed]

ADDRESS CALL TX/RX FREQ

XXXXXXXXX 4208.0/4219.5

CATEGORY EOS
SAFETY ACK RQ

3-61
 Procedure
1. From the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen, press 1 1 , and then press ENT .
The "TEST CALL" screen is displayed.

TEST CALL Transmissible

Address ：XXXXXXXXX
Call TX/RX freq： 4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

The following items have been set in this example.

｢Address｣ ：XXXXXXXXX
｢Call TX/RX freq｣ ：4,208.0／4,219.5 kHz

2. Press CALL .
The following screen is displayed and the message is transmitted.

TEST CALL Transmitting

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

If the tuner is not tuned to the transmission frequency, the "tuner mismatch!!" warning message is
Note displayed. Press ENT to tune the tuner, then transmit the message.

When the transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. After a brief interval, operation
returns to the "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen.

TEST CALL Send Completed

TX frequency ： 4,208.0 kHz
TX date&time ：06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

To discard the message and quit without sending it, press FUNC 4 (QUIT).
Note To store a message without sending it, press FUNC 9 (SAVE).
Normally, the message content is predetermined so that the message is sent to a coastal station.

3-62
3.5.4 Other Functions

(1) Frequency scanning

When the JSB-196/196GM Radiotelephone is connected, scanning*1 reception among the six specified
2
frequencies is available. When the NCT-196N automatic acknowledgement setting* is ON and a message
3
requiring acknowledgment is received* , the acknowledgement message is transmitted on a transmit frequency
that is paired with the reception frequency.
This section describes how to set up the scanning function.

*1： The selected reception frequency (scanning frequency) is switched at intervals of about 0.3 sec.
*2： See "● AUTO ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SETUP" in Section 3.5.4 (4), "Other Settings."
*3： Indicates that the "EOS" of the message compiled in steps (1) to (11) of Section 3.5.3, "Transmitting Messages" is set
to ACK RQ (acknowledgement required).

● Starting and stopping scanning

The scanning frequency must be specified before starting or stopping scanning. Refer to "Specifying the scanning
frequency" below.

Procedure

1. Press FUNC , and then 1 (SCAN).

Scanning starts for the specified frequencies.

2. Press FUNC , and then 1 (SCAN).

Scanning stops.

● Specifying the scanning frequency

Procedure

1. Check that the "DSC watching" screen is displayed.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

99ﾟ99’N999ﾟ99’E SPEED:__._KT at 88:88

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

If the "DSC watching" screen is not displayed, press STOP 3 times in succession to switch to the
Note "DSC watching" screen.
When the P mark is displayed on the screen, no printer is connected to the NCT-196.

3-63
 2. Press MENU .
The "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen is displayed.

MENU #1 －EDIT&CALL Select no.

1. Individual call
2. Acknowledgement call
3. Distress call
4. Distress relay call
5. Auto / semi－auto call
6. All ships call Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll the screen.
7. Group call
8. Area call
9. Position request
10. Polling call
11. Test call

3. Press MENU again.

The "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen is displayed.

MENU #2－READOUT&SETUP Select no.

1.Received distress message readout
2.Received others message readout
3.Setup
4.Self test Use ▲ and ▼ to
scroll the screen.

4. Press 3 , and then press ENT .

The "SETUP" screen is displayed.

SETUP Select no.

1. Date&time edit
2. Position edit
3. Calling frequency registration
4. Address registration
5. Distress setup Use ▲ and ▼ to
6. Others alarm setup scroll the screen.
7. Automatic acknowledgement setup
8. Scanning setup
9. Watchkeeping receiver setup

3-64
 5. Press 8 , and then press ENT .
The "SCANNING SETUP" screen is displayed.

SCANNING SETUP
[1] 1,610.0 ／ 1,615.0 kHz
[2] 2,000.0 ／ 2,000.0 kHz
[3] 3,000.0 ／ 3,000.0 kHz
[4] 4,208.0 ／ 4,219.0 kHz Use ▲ and ▼ to
[5] 5,000.0 ／ 5,000.0 kHz scroll the screen.
[6] 6,000.0 ／ 6,000.0 kHz

TX RX

6. Enter the "Transmit frequency/Receive frequency" pair for each channel.

Note Press CLR and then ENT to cancel a setting and leave it blank.

7.On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).

Tune regist frequency?

[ENT] key ：TUNE
[STOP] key：NO TUNE

Press ENT to tune the tuner and then return to the "SETUP" screen.

Press STOP to abort tuning and return to the "SETUP" screen.

Note Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-65
(2) Useful Functions

The NCT-196N register up to six party addresses with a shorthand name, and up to six calling frequencies.
The registered contents are retrieved by using and when compiling a call message, obviating the need
to enter numbers.
The addresses and calling frequencies are stored from the "SETUP" screen. See steps 1 to 3 of (1) Specifying the
scanning frequency" for how to display the "SETUP" screen.

SETUP Select no.

1. Date&time edit
2. Position edit
3. Calling frequency registration
4. Address registration
5. Distress setup Use ▲ and ▼ to
6. Others alarm setup scroll the screen.
7. Automatic acknowledgement setup
8. Scanning setup
9. Watchkeeping receiver setup

● Registering a calling frequency

Procedure
1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 3 , and then press ENT .
The "CALLING FREQUENCY REGISTRATION (TX/RX)" screen is displayed.

CALLING FREQUENCY REGISTRATION (TX/RX)

[1] 12,345.6/12,356.7 kHz ( )
[2] NONE / NONE kHz ( )
[3] NONE / NONE kHz ( )
[4] NONE / NONE kHz ( ) Use ▲ and ▼ to
[5] NONE / NONE kHz ( ) scroll the screen.
[6] NONE / NONE kHz ( )

2. Enter the "Transmit frequency/Receive frequency (name)" for each channel.

・ Enter the transmit frequency/receive frequency pair using 0 to 9 and . .

・ Enter (name) as follows: 1. Selecting characters: Use and to select characters inside the
parentheses ().
2. Confirming characters: After selecting each character, press ENT .

To go to the next channel or skip to the next channel without specifying a name, press ENT two times.

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).

Tune regist frequency?

[ENT] key ： TUNE
[STOP] key： NO TUNE

Press ENT to tune the tuner and then return to the "SETUP" screen.

Press STOP to abort tuning and return to the "SETUP" screen.

Press CLR , ENT , ENT to delete registered calling frequency.

Note
Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-66
● Registering an address

Procedure
1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 4 , and then press ENT .
The "ADDRESS REGISTRATION" screen is displayed.

ADDRESS REGISTRATION
[1] ＿ ( )
[2] ( )
[3] ( )
[4] ( ) Use ▲ and ▼ to
[5] ( ) scroll the screen.
[6] ( )

2. Enter the address (name) for each channel.

・ Enter the address using 0 to 9 and . .

・ Enter (name) as follows: 1. Selecting characters: Use and to select characters inside the
parentheses ().
2. Confirming characters: After selecting each character, press ENT .

To go to the next channel or skip to the next channel without specifying a name, press ENT two times.

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).

Note Press CLR , ENT to delete registered address.

Note Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-67
 (3) Printing function

When a printer is connected, all received messages are printed out upon reception. In addition, it is also possible
to print out other stored information.

The printing function enables the followings and the procedures are described in this section.
・ The printing of all of the files, which classification is selected from the print menu.
・ The printing of a selected file, which contents is displayed on screen.

● Printing from the print menu (batch printing of multiple files)

Procedure
1. Check that the "DSC watching" screen is displayed.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

If the "DSC watching" screen is not displayed, press STOP 3 times in succession to switch to the
Note "DSC watching" screen.
When the P mark is displayed on the screen, no printer is connected to the NCT-196.

2. Press FUNC , and then 3 (PRINT).

The "PRINT MENU" screen is displayed.

PRINT MENU
1．ALL RECEIVED DISTRESS MESSAGES
2．ALL RESEIVED OTHERS MESSAGES
3．ALL EDIT／CALL MESSAGES
4．ALL SETUP INFORMATION Use ▲ and ▼ to
scroll the screen.

3. Select the item to be printed, and then press ENT .

Printing starts.

4. When printing is finished, press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT).

Operation returns to the "DSC watching" screen.

● Printing a specified file

Procedure
1. Press MENU once or twice.
The "MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen or "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen is displayed.

2. Enter the number of the file to be printed, and then press ENT .
The file content is displayed.

3. Press FUNC , and then press 3 (PRINT).

The displayed file is printed.

4. When printing is finished, press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT).

Operation returns to the"MENU#1-EDIT&CALL" screen or "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen.
3-68
 (4) Other settings

The following procedures are explained in this section:

・ How to compile the message transmitted when pressing DISTRESS .
・ How to set the auto acknowledgement to ON/OFF for an acknowledgment required call
・ Other settings.

ATTENTION
Pay close attention when inputting and/or modifying the information described in this section as the contents
are critical for operating the DSC. If these operations are unclear, contact JRC or our agents.

The data is input using the "SETUP" screen. See the above-mentioned “Specifying the scanning frequency" 1-3
steps of “(1) Frequency scanning” for how to display the "SETUP" screen. However regarding the "DATE&TIME
EDIT" and "POSITION EDIT" settings in this setup menu, see Section 4.2 "Setting Position and Time Data".

SETUP Select no.

1. Date&time edit
2. Position edit
3. Calling frequency registration
4. Address registration
5. Distress setup Use ▲ and ▼ to
6. Others alarm setup scroll the screen.
7. Automatic acknowledgement setup
8. Scanning setup
9. Watchkeeping receiver setup

3-69
● DISTRESS SETUP

This function is used to compile a distress call message to be transmitted by pressing DISTRESS .

Nature : UNDESIGNATED DIS ← 【FIXED】 Nature of the distress (undesignated distress)

Position : 12 ﾟ 34’N123 ﾟ 45’E ← 【AUTO or MANUAL】The navigation equipment data or manually
entered data.
Time : 19:00 ← 【AUTO or MANUAL】The navigation equipment data or manually
entered data.
Telecommand : J3E TEL ← 【VARIABLE】 The data set using this menu.
Tx frequency : 2187.5kHz ← 【VARIABLE】 The data set using this menu.

"Telecommand" shows the follow-on communication mode with the RCC that received the distress message.
Normally, select either radiotelephone mode or MF/HF ARQ communication (F1B/J2B ARQ).
"Tx frequency" shows a transmission frequency for DSC distress message calls. When the radio equipment is set
to 2187.5 or 8414.5kHz, those frequencies take priority.

Procedure
1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 5 and then press ENT .
The "DISTRESS SETUP" screen is displayed.

DISTRESS SETUP
Dist-telecomm ： J3E TEL
Dist-TX/RX freq： 2,187.5kHz

2. Enter each item.

・ Use and to change a setting and ▲ and ▼ to move the cursor and select the item.
・ Press ENT to confirm a setting.
・ See Section 4.3.3 (3), "Distress Call" for items for which "Telecommand" can be selected.

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).
Operation returns to the "SETUP" screen.

Note Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-70
● OTHERS ALARM SETTING

This alarm can be set ON/OFF when receiving non-distress/non-urgency calls. Distress calls can be distinguished
from other calls by the difference in the beeping sounds. When receiving distress calls, the alarm always sounds;
the alarm for distress calls cannot be turned OFF.

Procedure

1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 6 and then press ENT .

The "OTHERS ALARM SETTING" screen is displayed.

OTHERS ALARM SETUP

Alarm：ON

2. Select "ON" or "OFF".

・ The default setting is "ON". Use and to change the setting.

・ Press ENT to confirm the setting.

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).
Operation returns to the "SETUP" screen.

Note Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-71
● AUTOMATIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SETUP

The DSC terminal can be set to automatically send back an acknowledgement call (with ACK BQ for EOS) when
receiving a DSC call with ACK RQ for EOS. However, when the CATEGORY is DISTRESS, URGENCY, or
SAFETY, no acknowledgement is made automatically, even though ACK RQ is specified for EOS.
Acknowledgement is made manually for all distress calls.

Procedure

1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 7 and then press ENT .

The "AUTOMATIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SETUP" screen is displayed.

AUTOMATIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SETUP

Acknowledgement：ON

2. Select "ON" or "OFF".

・ The default setting is "ON". Use and to change the setting.

・ Press ENT to confirm the setting.

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).
Operation returns to the "SETUP" screen.

Note Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-72
● WATCHKEEPING RECEIVER SETUP

This procedure sets the Watch-keeping receiver's scanning frequency. The 2187.5kHz and 8414.5kHz
frequencies are preselected; here, frequencies are selected for the other four channels.
The "DISTRESS FREQUENCY" lamps (on the front panel) are turned ON/OFF for each set channel. The lamps
for 2187.5kHz and 8414.5kHz are always ON.

Procedure

1. From the "SETUP" screen, press 9 and then press ENT .

The "WATCHKEEPING RECEIVER SETUP" screen is displayed.

WATCHKEEPING RECEIVER SETUP

CH1. 2187.5kHz ： ON（const）
CH2. 4207.5kHz ： ON
CH3. 6312.0kHz ： OFF
CH4. 8414.5kHz ： ON（const） Use ▲ and ▼ to
CH5. 12577.0kHz ： OFF scroll the screen.
CH6. 16804.5kHz ： ON

2. Select "ON" or "OFF".

・ The default setting is "ON". Use and to change the setting.

・ Press ENT to confirm the setting.
The corresponding lamp for that frequency is turned ON or OFF according to the setting.

3. On completion of entering the data, press FUNC , and then press 9 (SAVE).
Operation returns to the "SETUP" screen.

Note Press FUNC , and then press 4 (QUIT) to cancel this menu.

3-73
● CLICK SOUND SETTING

The click sound set to ON/OFF during turning on the NCT-196N.

Procedure
1. Press FUNC and 0 .

Note When turning OFF the power switch, click sound is reset to ON.

● MODEM RESET

This operation is the same as the Power ON reset.

Procedure
1. Press FUNC and STOP .
The following display appears.

JRC NCT-196N DSC/NBDP MODEM

Software Version MAIN:X.XX SUB:X.XX
Navigation :NMEA0183
Transceiver:JSB-196/196GM

2. The initialization is completed in several seconds.

The following initial display appears.

DSC watching 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:26

12ﾟ34’N123ﾟ45’E SPEED:12.4KT at 01:26

Self-ID = XXXXXXXXX [UTC]

3-74
3.6 NBDP operations

The NCT-196N DSC/NBDP MODEM has several communication methods in telex (TLX) mode as NBDP function.
Previously created message files or keyboard-typed messages can be sent during the communication. All of
operations are performed using NDZ-127J/NDZ-227 DTE, and the communication methods and other settings for
TLX mode are described in this chapter. (Regarding the MODE selection for TLX, see “3.2.2 MODE change to
TLX”.)

3.6.1 NBDP Settings

Before operations in TLX mode, setup the NBDP functions using SYSTEM Î NBDP setup menu of the
NDZ-127J/227 DTE. The following screen appeared by selecting the menu item.

NBDP setup
ARQ/FEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID : 543210000
GFEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID : 111110000
ARQ/FEC 9-digit Self-ID : 987654321
GFEC 9-digit Self-ID : 222222222
Answerback : 54321 FFFFF X
Max. FEC error rate. : 30%
Max. automatic call series : 1
Collective FEC receiving : ON
Internal alarm : ON
Time duration for AUTO/MRTX : 10 min.
Restart : ON
Finite start/restart : ON ↓

[ Save ] [ Cancel ]

Each parameter is set as follows:

ARQ/FEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID : Fixed

GFEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID : Fixed
ARQ/FEC 9-digit Self-ID : Fixed
GFEC 9-digit Self-ID : Fixed
Answerback : Fixed
Max. FEC error rate : Press Enter key and setup in the input window.
Max. automatic call series : Press Enter key and set a value of 1-99 in the input display.
Collective FEC receiving : Press Enter key to change ON/OFF.
Internal alarm : Press Enter key to change ON/OFF.
Time duration for AUTO : Press Enter key and setup the time in the input window.
Restart : Press Enter key to change ON/OFF.
Finite start/restart : Press Enter key to change ON/OFF.
Transmitter pre-key time : Press Enter key and setup the time in the input window.

After these settings, select the [Save] button or [Cancel] button to finish this setup.

Note ✩ The above parameters showed “Fixed” have already been set and are impossible to be changed.

✩ The meanings of the above items are as follows;

・Max. FEC error rate :The limit value of error rate to continue to receive CFEC/
SFEC. When the error rate is beyond the value due to
the noisy radio circuit condition or any other signals, the
MODEM stops the receiving and return to stand-by.

・Max. automatic call series : The limit value of retrying the CALL mode sequence. The
interval to retry is 15 minutes respectively.

3-75
 ・Collective FEC receiving : ON - CFEC receiving is permitted.
OFF - CFEC receiving is prohibited.

・Internal alarm : ON - Internal alarm works.

OFF - Internal alarm does not work.

・Time duration for AUTO : Time duration setting for AUTO mode

・Restart : ON - The MODEM tries to reconnect when the

circuit
established once is lost for 32 times of
successive REPEAT condition
OFF - The MODEM returns to stand-by when the
circuit established once is lost for 32 times of
successive REPEAT condition

・ Finite start/restart : ON - The MODEM returns to stand-by when the

times of calling a partner station are reached to
128 in ARQ mode.
OFF - The MODEM continues to call a partner station
even if the times of calling are reached to 128
in ARQ mode.

・Transmitter pre-key time : Adjustment of timing from KEY ON to signal output for
the transmitter electrical specification. It is also available
to arrange the Send/Receive timing between long-ranged
partner station.

3-76
3.6.2 ARQ Communication

ARQ mode is two way telex communication with a partner as a destination station. When beginning to call a
partner using ARQ mode, it is necessary to select a partner (ID) and a communication channel. The operation
from the beginning until the end of the communication with a partner are described in this section.

ATTENTION
・Before transmitting, confirm that the selected channel/frequency is not occupied by other station(s).
・Do not operate JSB-196 during ARQ communication.

Procedure
1. Select Connect Î ARQ and press Enter key.

2. Select a partner station from the following window and press Enter key.

If [ Manual ] button is selected using Tab and Enter keys, the partner ID and Frequency/Channel
Note can be set manually.

3-77
 3. Select Tx/Rx frequency from the following window and press Enter key.

4. After the following window opened, check the channel condition and if not occupied,
press Enter key.

If the channel is occupied by the other stations, select [ NO ] and return to step 3 to select another
Note channel.

5. The channel is tuned automatically and the NCT-196N begins to call a partner
station.
The following screen is displayed while calling.

3-78
6. When the connection is established, the following screen appears and the DTE is
ready to communicate with a partner station.
Send message to the partner station using the keyboard.

In case of sending the previously created message file, press F8 (F.Send) and select the file to be
sent on the following window.

7. To terminate communication, press F10 .

The following display appears and the DTE returns to the stand-by.

3-79
 Note ・The meanings of cells showed in [ STATUS INFO ] are as follows;

(no use) (*1) (*2) (*3) (*4) (*5) (*6)

*1 : Communication mode (stand-by, ARQ, CFEC, SFEC)

*2 : The position related with a partner station (Calling - master, Called - slave)
*3 : The right to send message (Send - enable to send message, Receive - wait)
*4 : MODEM condition on connecting with a partner station (Phasing, Rephasing)
*5 : Communication data error condition (Repeat - resending data)
*6 : Communication condition (TRAF - sending data completed, RQ - repeating)

・The function key F2 ~ F10 assignments are as follows;

F2 : WRU - Request to send Answerback code of a partner station

F3 : Here is - Sending Answerback code of own station
F4 : TMS - Sending the time of own position
F5 : Over - Exchanging the right to send message
F6 : POLL - Getting the right to send messages without terminating the
communication even if a partner station try to terminate
F8 : F.Send - Sending the previously created file
F10 : Stop - Terminating communication

3-80
 3.
3.6.3 CALL Communication

The CALL mode can be performed when a coast station is automated against the CALL mode sequence. After
calling the coast station from own station and the circuit is established, the messages, which formatted and
previously prepared in accordance with an order of the coast station’s request, are automatically sent to the coast
station and distributed to the intended destination.

ATTENTION
・Before transmitting, confirm that the selected channel / frequency is not occupied by other station(s).

Procedure
1. Select Connect Î CALL and press Enter key.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect Service System Help
[ STATUS INFO ]
ARQ
ST-BY
CALL
Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER
AUTO TELEX
[No scanning] TUNER :[READY]
Tx.POWER:[FULL]
Last statusFEC
messages>

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

2. Select a command from the following window and press Enter key.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect Service System Help
[ TELEX Terminal Window ]
ST-BY

Command input
List of Commands
DIRTLX [ Ok ]
FAX
MULTI [ Manual ]
TLX
AMV+ [ Cancel ]
BRK+
FREQ+
HELP+
HLP+
INF+

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

3-81
 3. Select a destination from the following opened window and press Enter key.

・ This screen is appeared when command of “DIRTLX” or “TLX” are selected.

Note
・ The list of FAX numbers/Party names is appears when selecting the command of “FAX”.
・ No destination list appears when the other commands are selected.

4. Input message in the following opened window. After completed, select [ End/Start ]
and press Enter key.
Be sure to close the message by [ 5:/KKKK/ ] or [ 6:/NNNN/ ] at the end.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect Service System Help
[ TELEX Terminal Window ]
ST-BY

Sequence input
Command+ = DIRTLX123456789+

Sequence list...
END [ 1: WRU ] [ 5:/KKKK/ ]
[ 2:Hereis ] [ 6:/NNNN/ ]
[ 3: TMS ] [ 7:/****/ ]
[ 4:F.Send ] [ 8: Over ]

[ Del: Delete ]
[ End/Start ]
[ Editor ]
[ Cancel ]

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

3-82
 5. Select a coast station from the following window and press Enter key.

If [ Manual ] button is selected using Tab and Enter keys, the partner ID and Frequency/Channel
Note can be set manually.

6. Select Tx/Rx frequency from the following window and press Enter key.

7. After the following window opened, check the channel condition and if not occupied,
press Enter key.

3-83
 If the channel is occupied by the other stations, select [ NO ] and return to step 6 to select another
Note channel.

8. The channel is tuned automatically and the CALL mode is started.

3-84
 3.
3.6.4 AUTO TELEX Communication

The AUTO mode can be performed when receiving a free signal from coast station. After receiving the free signal
and the circuit is established, the messages are automatically sent to the coast station and distributed to the
intended destination.

ATTENTION
・Before transmitting, confirm that the selected channel / frequency is not occupied by other station(s).

Procedure
1. Select Connect Î AUTO TELEX and press Enter key.

2. Select a coast station from the following window and press Enter key.

3-85
 3. Select a command from the following window and press Enter key.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect Service System Help
[ TELEX Terminal Window ]
ST-BY

Command input
List of Commands
DIRTLX [ Ok ]
FAX
MULTI [ Manual ]
TLX
AMV+ [ Cancel ]
BRK+
FREQ+
HELP+
HLP+
INF+

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

4. Select a destination from the following opened window and press Enter key.

Note ・ This screen is appeared when command of “DIRTLX” or “TLX” are selected.
・ The list of FAX numbers/Party names is appears when selecting the command of “FAX”.
・ No destination list appears when the other commands are selected.

5. Input message in the following opened window.

Be sure to close the message by [ 5:/KKKK/ ] or [ 6:/NNNN/ ] at the end.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect Service System Help
[ TELEX Terminal Window ]
ST-BY

Sequence input
Command+ = DIRTLX123456789+

Sequence list...
END [ 1: WRU ] [ 5:/KKKK/ ]
[ 2:Hereis ] [ 6:/NNNN/ ]
[ 3: TMS ] [ 7:/****/ ]
[ 4:F.Send ] [ 8: Over ]

[ Del: Delete ]
[ End/Start ]
[ Editor ]
[ Cancel ]

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

3-86
 6. After completed to input message, select [ End/Start ] and press Enter key.
The following screen appeared and the MODEM starts scanning for free signal from the coast station.

7. When receiving the free signal, the MODEM begins to connect the radio circuit. And
after the circuit is established, the AUTOTELEX communication starts.

The AUTO form is constructed as follows;

Note
AUTO <abbreviated letter > <command+>
Sequence : <command procedure> END

For example, when using AUTO mode for sending own Answerback code, Date & Time and
“REPORT.TXT” file to a Hong Kong station assigned ID:12345 (Country code:802) via a coast
station assigned ID:11111 by TLX mode based Store-and-Forward, the structure is as follows;

AUTO 11111 TLX80212345+

Sequence : DE TMS REPORT.TXT /KKKK/ END

Furthermore, the representative commands are showed as below.

・TLXxy+ : Request to send the message in TLX mode to the designated destination.
( x: country code, y: TLX ID of destination )

・DIRxy+ : Request for connecting directly to destined station.

・FREQ+: Request for the frequencies scanning in coast station

・HLP+ : Request for the command list for the station.

・MED+ : Request for medical message urgently.

・MRK+ : Request for TONE sending to adjust tuning of own station.

・MSG+ : Request for messages destined for own station if exist.

・OPR+ : Request for connection to an operator in coast station.

・NAV+ : Request for navigation report.

・RTL+ : Information meant that the next message is TLX letter.

・TGM+ : Information meant that the next message is a radio telegram.

3-87
 ・URG+ : Request for immediate connection to an operator in coast station. (Urgent only)

・WX+ : Request for weather report.

・MAN+ : Information from coast station meant that the country code for the next message
does not exist.

・BRK+ : Control code to terminate the radio circuit to a coast station.

・TST+ : Request for sending the QBF (Quick Brown Fox) message to check the radio
equipment of own station.

3-88
 3.
3.6.5 FEC Communication

There are two types of FEC modes such as SFEC (Selective FEC) in which a destination is specified and CFEC
(Collective FEC) in which the destination is not specified. The ways to communicate using FEC modes are
described below. Note that the FEC receiving is automatic so the operation method is left out in this section, and
furthermore CFEC receiving can be disabled using NBDP setup. (See “6.1 NBDP settings.)

3.6.5.1 SFEC Communication

ATTENTION
・Before transmitting, confirm that the selected channel / frequency is not occupied by other station(s).

Procedure
1. Select Connect Î FEC Î SFEC and press Enter key.

2. Select a partner station from the following window and press Enter key.

If [ Manual ] button is selected using Tab and Enter keys, the partner ID and Frequency/Channel
Note can be set manually.

3-89
 3. Select Tx/Rx frequency from the following window and press Enter key.

4. After the following window opened, check the channel condition and if not occupied,
press Enter key.

If the channel is occupied by the other stations, select [ NO ] and return to step 3 to select another
Note channel.

5. The channel is tuned automatically and the NCT-196N begins to call a partner
station.
・ The communication is started after displayed “Message start…” on screen.
・ To terminate communication, press F10 .

3-90
3.6.5.2 CFEC Communication

ATTENTION
・Before transmitting, confirm that the selected channel / frequency is not occupied by other station(s).

Procedure
1. Select Connect Î FEC Î CFEC and press Enter key.

2. Input Tx/Rx frequency on the following window. Then select [ Set ] using Tab key
and press Enter key.

Note If input using ITU channel, select [ ITU CHANNEL ] button using Tab and Enter keys.

3-91
 3. After the following window opened, check the channel condition and if not occupied,
press Enter key.

If the frequency is occupied by the other stations, select [ NO ] and return to step 2 to select
Note another frequency.

4. The frequency is tuned automatically and the NCT-196N begins to call all ships.
・ The communication is started after displayed “Message start…” on screen.
・ To terminate communication, press F10 .

3-92
 3.
3.6.6 Scanning for TLX mode

The NBDP function of the NCT-196N can be set to scan a specified group channels so that the NCT-196N
respond to the station automatically if there is a station calling own station by ARQ or transmitting by FEC. The
way to start/stop the scanning is described in this section.

3.6.6.1 Scanning start

Procedure
1. Select Tune Î Scanning start and press Enter key.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect
Tune Service System Help
[ STATUS INFO ]
ST-BY
Frequency List
Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER
[No scanning]
ITU Channel set TUNER :[READY]
Tx/Rx frequency set Tx.POWER:[FULL]
Last statusTx.
messages
Tune
Scanning start

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

2. Select the desired station on the following window and press Enter key.
Scanning is started in order by the channel number.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect
Tune Service System Help
[ STATUS INFO ]
ST-BY
Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER
[No scanning] Station List for [TLX] mode TUNER :[READY]
No. Station Name Stat.ID Location F.Sign
Tx.POWER:[FULL]
Last 1status
JRCMITAKA
messages 123456789 N12.34E123.46 DOTDOT [ Scan ]
2 JRCSAITAMA 223456789 N44.00E134.00 K/QQV/
3 [ Cancel ]
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

Note To adjust the intervals for scanning, Select System Î Scan speed and set scan speed.

3-93
3.6.6.2 Scanning stop

Procedure
1. Select Tune Î Scanning stop and press Enter key.

[TLX] Tx=12345.6kHz / Rx=12345.6kHz (ITU CH= 0) 10-APR-2002 12:00(LT)

Loc: N19.00 E115.30 at 11:00(UTC)
File Tune Connect
Tune Service System Help
[ STATUS INFO ]
ST-BY
Frequency List
Scanning info Tuner/Tx.POWER
[No scanning]
ITU Channel set TUNER :[READY]
Tx/Rx frequency set Tx.POWER:[FULL]
Last statusTx.
messages
Tune
Scanning start
stop

Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑,↓,→,← then press Enter

2. Scanning is stopped and the NCT-196N returns to stand-by condition.

The Tx/Rx frequency is set to the frequency scanned last.

3-94
3.7 PA operations
The NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier connected to JSB-196GM can be used basically without any settings
after installation. However for checking such as output power, voltages or currents or for setting such as alarm
or charge mode, the NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier has functions as described below.

3.7.1 AC/DC power source voltage checking

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “AC/DC VOLTAGE” menu on the LCD.

AC,DC VOLTAGE

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows the AC/DC voltages.

AC Volt 221V
DC Volt 24.2V

3. After completed, press Menu button again to return to menu selection.

3.7.2 DC (Battery) charge/discharge current checking

NAH-692 /695/698 is equipped with the battery charger and the charge current can be checked.

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “DC CURRENT” menu on the LCD.

DC CURRENT

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows the value of DC (Battery) charge/ discharge current.

DC CURR +2.5A
(- : DISCHG,+ : CHG)

3. After completed, press MENU button again to return to menu selection.

The charge function and charge current are already set up at the installation, and it is not necessary to
Note
change them.

3-95
3.7.3 PA current checking

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “PA CURR” menu on the LCD.

PA CURR

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows the value of PA current.

PA CURR 0.0 A

3. After completed, press MENU button again to return to menu selection.

3-96
3.7.4 PA voltage (Vc) and current (Ic) checking

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “PA(A) Vc, Ic ” menu on the LCD.

PA (A) Vc, Ic

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows the Vc and Ic values of PA(A) .

PA(A) Vc 0 V
PA(A) Ic 0.0 A

3. After completed, press MENU button again to return to menu selection.

When checking the Vc and Ic for PA(B) or PA(C), substitute the above “PA(A)” for “PA(B)”
Note
or “PA(C)”. Furthermore, the components of PA(A/B/C) differs by the type of NAH-692/ 695/
698 respectively such as the following table.

PA (A) PA (B) PA (C)

NAH-692 (250W)
NAH-695 (500W)
NAH-698 (800W)

3-97
3.7.5 SWR of PA output checking

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “PA SWR” menu on the LCD.

PA SWR

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows the SWR value of PA output.

SWR (A)
--.--

3. After completed, press MENU button again to return to menu selection.

When checking the SWR for PA(B) or PA(C), substitute the above “PA(A)” for “PA(B)” or
Note
“PA(C)”. Furthermore, the components of PA(A/B/C) differs by the type of NAH-692/ 695/
698 respectively such as the following table.

PA (A) PA (B) PA (C)

NAH-692 (250W)
NAH-695 (500W)
NAH-698 (800W)

3-98
3.7.6 Beeping sound ON/OFF setting

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “TOUCH TONE” menu on the LCD.

TOUCH TONE

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows setting of TOUCH TONE.

TOUCH TONE
ON

3. Turn the dial to select ON or OFF.

TOUCH TONE
OFF

4. Press ENT button to set it and return to menu selection.

3.7.7 Alarm sound ON/OFF setting

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “ALARM TONE” menu on the LCD.

ALARM TONE

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows setting of ALARM TONE.

ALARM TONE
ON

3. Turn the dial to select ON or OFF.

ALARM TONE
OFF

4. Press ENT button to set it and return to menu selection.

3-99
3.7.8 Battery charge mode (Ordinary/Equal) setting

Procedure

1. Press MENU button and turn the dial to “CHARGE METHOD” menu on the LCD.

CHARGE METHOD

2. Press ENT button.

The menu is selected and LCD shows setting of CHARGE METHOD.

CHARGE METHOD
ORDINARY

3. Turn the dial to select ORDINARY or EQUAL.

CHARGE METHOD
EQUAL

ORDINARY: Automatic charge mode.

The battery is kept fully-charged. This mode is normally used.
EQUAL: Equalizing charge mode.
The cells of battery are equally charged.
After setting it as EQUAL mode, when charge current decreased, or when
charge time has passed for 2 hours, it changes to ORDINARY mode
automatically.

4. Press ENT button to set it and return to menu selection.

When charge mode changes the EQUAL to the ORDINARY, JSB-196GM may turn off. In
Note
this case turn on the JSB-196GM.

3.7.9 DC operation

Attention for DC operation

1. Single Setting
Either JSB or SES is usable in this setting.
・Turn on JSB-196GM : SES is turned off automatically.
(JSB-196GM shows “SES OFF” on LCD.)
・Turn off JSB-196GM : SES is turned on automatically after 30-60sec.
2. Dual Setting
Both JSB and SES are simultaneously usable in the setting.

Note Refer to “Installation manual” about Single/Dual setting.

3-100
3.8 Printer operations
The contents of the communication files and messages can be printed out if connected the NKG-800 Printer to
the NCT-196N DSC/NBDP MODEM and the NDZ-127J/NDZ-227 DTE via PRINTER SELECTOR. This chapter
describes the printer operation, paper roll loading, ribbon cassette cartridge replacement and how to set the DIP
switch.

CAUTION
Notes on using the printer
Be sure to turn OFF the printer’s power when opening and closing the printer cover.
Failure to comply could result in electrical shock, failure, or injury.

Do not drop or strike the printer.

Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printing head is high.

Do not touch the printing head until the temperature goes down.
Doing so may cause a burn or an injury.

Never try to disassemble or repair the printer yourself.

Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Do not touch any part of the cutter.

Doing so is potentially dangerous.

When attaching the ribbon, be sure it does not get twisted.

Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Wait at least two seconds to restart the system after turning the power switch OFF.
Otherwise the initialization may not proceed correctly or a malfunction may occur.

Do not attempt to print without the ribbon cassette cartridge or paper.

Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

When the printer is working, be sure not to allow your hands, any articles of clothing
or accessories (a necktie or jewelry for instance) too close to the unit.
Doing so may cause injury.

Do not place anything such as liquids or metals on top of the printer.

They may drop into the printer, causing fire or malfunction.

Do not install the printer in the following locations.

Doing so may cause a fire, malfunction or degradation of printing quality.
･ On a surface that is not horizontal, or where the vibration is severe.
･ In a location subject to direct sunlight or excessive dust.
･ In a location subject to extremely high or low temperatures.
･ In a location subject to excessive humidity.

3-101
3.8.1 Names and Functions

Operation Panel

3-102
3.8.2 Operation Panel

From the operation panel, switching on-line/off-line, selecting of high quality characters, forced line feed, and
forced page feed can be controlled.

3-103
3.8.3 Opening / Closing the Printer Cover

When opening the printer cover, move the paper roll stand unit one step back. To open/close the printer cover,
follow the procedures consecutively.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the printer's power when opening and closing the printer cover.
Failure to comply could result in electrical shock, failure, or injury.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printing head is high. Do not touch the
printing head until the temperature goes down.
Failure to comply could result in a burn or injury.

Do not touch any part of the cutter. Doing so is potentially dangerous.

Procedure
1. Loosen the two screws holding the paper roll stand unit fixed.
When closing the printer cover, follow the steps in reverse order.

2. Move the paper roll stand unit one step backwards.

3-104
3. Open the printer cover.

3-105
3.8.4 Replacing the Roll Paper

When replacing the paper roll, proceed as follows.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the printer power when opening and closing the printer cover.
Failure to comply could result in electrical shock, failure, or injury.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printer head is high. Do not touch the printer head
until the temperature goes down.
Failure to comply could result in a burn or injury.

Do not touch any part of the cutter. Doing so may result in injury.

Procedure
1. Insert the roll bar through the center of the paper roll.
If the leading edge of paper is torn or bent, cut it off in a straight line.

2. Attach the roll bar with the paper roll onto the paper roll stand unit holder, taking
care to notice he paper roll's direction.
Set the sensor guide lever so that it touches the paper roll.

・ Perform the consecutive procedures while the printer cover is open.

Note ・ To open the printer cover, refer to "3.8.3 Opening/Closing the Printer Cover".

3-106
3. Pull out the leading edge of the paper onto the paper guide bar.

4. Insert the leading edge of the paper from behind the platen

5. Turn the paper feed knob and pull out the leading edge of the paper.

3-107
 6. Adjust the paper position for both sides of paper in and paper out, so that the
left and right guide rings of the paper guide bar support the paper lightly.

7. Pull down the reflection lever.

The paper touches the platen securely.

8. Pull down the reflection lever.

Lift the paper setting lever to harness the paper emerging from the platen.

3-108
9. First, insert the axis of the left side of the paper roll cover into the left hole of the
paper roll stand, then set the right side.

10. Lower the paper roll cover and then push down the paper support bar.

11. Close the printer cover.

For further details of steps 11 through 13, refer to "3.8.3 Opening/Closing the Printer Cover".

12. Pull the paper roll stand unit one step forward.

13. Turn the screws tightly to stabilize the paper roll stand unit.

3-109
3.8.5 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette Cartridge

When the printing quality becomes faint, replace the ribbon cassette cartridge with a new one.
To replace, proceed as follows.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the printer power when opening and closing the printer cover.
Failure to comply could result in electrical shock, failure, or injury.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printer head is high. Do not touch the printer head
until the temperature goes down.
Failure to comply could result in a burn or injury.

Do not touch any part of the cutter. Doing so may result in injury.

Procedure
1. Open the printer cover.

Note ・ To open the printer cover, refer to "3.8.3 Opening/Closing the Printer Cover".

2. Lift up the tip of the ribbon cassette cartridge by grasping the projection on top,
and remove it.

3-110
 3. Turn the cassette knob of the new ribbon cassette cartridge counterclockwise to
increase the tension of the ribbon.

4. Manually, move the printing head to the home position (left side) and place the
ribbon cassette cartridge in the printer so that the ribbon is positioned between
the ribbon mask and the printing head. In this case, make sure that the ribbon
feed axis is inserted through the hole under the ribbon cassette knob.

・ Lightly press the ribbon cassette cartridge at both ends.

Note
・ Turn the cassette knob again to increase the tension of the ribbon.
・ Confirm that the ribbon is positioned properly in front of the printing head.

5. Close the printer cover

3-111
3.8.6 Adjusting the Printing Pressure (to Printing Paper Thickness)

The printing pressure can be adjusted with the head adjust lever located on the right side of the inner part of the
printer.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the printer power when opening and closing the printer cover.
Failure to comply could result in electrical shock, failure, or injury.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printer head is high. Do not touch the printer head
until the temperature goes down.
Failure to comply could result in a burn or injury.

Do not touch any part of the cutter. Doing so may result in injury.

Procedure
1. Open the printer cover and set up the head adjusting lever.
Each type of paper should be set as follows:

Normal paper : The optimal position among the numbers shown is ③.

Three layers of copying paper : The optimum position is ⑤ or ⑥.

・ The printing pressure increases in numerical order (①→⑥).

Note
・ To open/close the printer cover, refer to "3.8.3 Opening/Closing the Printer Cover".

3-112
3.8.7 Setting the DIP Switch

Set the DIP switch to select a language, character set, or particular function.

ATTENTION
Before beginning the procedure, be sure to turn the power OFF.
Failure to do so may cause electrical shock, malfunction or injury.

Just after printing, the temperature of the printer head is high. Do not touch the printer head
until the temperature goes down.
Doing so may cause burns or injury.

Do not touch any part of the cutter.

Doing so is potentially dangerous and may cause injury.

Procedure
1. Open the printer cover, remove the ribbon cassette cartridge, and move the
printing head manually to the right end.

・ The printing pressure increases in numerical order (①→⑥).

Note
・ To open/close the printer cover, refer to "3.8.3 Opening/Closing the Printer Cover".
・ To remove the ribbon cassette cartridge, refer to "3.8.5 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette
Cartridge".

2. Hold the tip of the partition cover and slide it to the left to remove it.
The DIP switch appears.

3-113
 3. Set the DIP switch to desired mode
The following diagrams describe the relation between each DIP switch position and the content of
each setting.

4. When settings are completed, put the partition cover back in its place, set up the
ribbon cassette, and then close the printer cover.

5. While pressing NLQ turn the power ON.

After initialization is carried out, the selected function and current setting status of the DIP switch are
printed.

・ When printing under the current setting status, the printer is set to an off-line state. When the test
Note pattern is completely printed out, it is automatically set to an on-line state.

3-114
 Note Dip switch setting for each equipment.

DIP switch setting

DIP switch
JSS-296/596/896,
JSB-196GM(NCT-196/196N), ON
JSS-825DA/DC, JSS-2150,
JUE-85(with NDZ-227) OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIP switch
JSS-850 ON
JUE-75C(with NDZ-127C)
JUE-85(with NDZ-127C)
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIP switch
ON
JSS-825NA/NC(NDZ-127N)
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.8.8 How to Attend to Error Detection

There are two types of errors. When an error is detected, a beep sounds, and the P.OUT lamp blinks 5 times.

(1) Paper discharge error

When the "out of paper" state is not detected, even though an 18 inch line feed procedure is performed, a
paper discharge error will result. The P.OUT lamp remains blinking until the error state is canceled.
When this happens, manually pull the paper out of the printer, or remove the paper automatically by using
LF or FF , then press ONLINE .

(2) Paper sending error

If the paper is not properly set, even though a 10 inch line feed procedure is performed, a paper sending
error results. In addition, if this error happens when the printing instruction is entered, the P.OUT lamp
remains blinking until the error state is canceled.

When this happens, follow the procedure below.

Procedure
1. Press ONLINE switch.
The printer is set to an off-line state.

2. Press FF switch, set the paper, then press ONLINE .

The printer is set to an on-line state.

3-115
3-116
 4. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
ATTENTION
This chapter describes about the JSS-296/596/896 Radio Equipment as a whole. So if further
information is required, see the specialized instruction manuals such as the JSB-196GM Radiotelephone
or NCT-196N DSC/NBDP MODEM.

The performance and longevity of this equipment depend on careful maintenance. To maintain the best
performance, the following periodic inspections are highly recommended.

(1) Keep the power supply voltage within the specified value.
(2) Know the condition of normal status when the equipment is properly functioning. Keep comparing the
current status to the normal status to immediately detect any malfunctions.

WARNING
If you remove a unit, be sure to store it in a non-conductive bag. If you wrap
It up with materials such as aluminum foil, the back-up power supply may S
hort circuit and the ICs may be damaged.

There are no user-serviceable parts inside this equipment. Inspection or

maintenance by unauthorized persons may result in fire or electric shock.
For inspection and maintenance, contact JRC or its authorized agents.

CAUTION
Do not turn the trimmer resistors or trimmer capacitors on the PCB unit (they are
preset at the factory). Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.

Leave installation of this equipment to JRC or our agents. Installation by an

unauthorized person may lead to malfunction.

4-1
4.1 General Maintenance and Inspection
General maintaining and inspecting items with usual tools and apparatus are listed below.

No. Item Maintenance and inspection

Gently clean the surface of the panel, knobs, switches, and upper/bottom cover with
a soft cloth or silicon oil.
1 Cleaning
Remove dust in the unit using a brush or vacuum cleaner. No oil is needed because
this unit has no moving mechanisms inside.
Inspect for looseness and correctly tighten the following:
Looseness
2 screws, nuts, knobs, switches, volume pots, connectors and relays inserted into
of parts
sockets.
If the power source fuse is blown, be sure to inspect the cause before replacing the
3 Fuse
blown fuse with a new one.

Remove screws mounting the unit, demount the unit from the main chassis, and
4 PCB Unit inspect the unit for discoloration and parching of components. To exchange parts,
call our service center or agents.

If you remove the PCB unit, be sure to store it in a non-conductive bag. If you wrap it up with materials
Note
such as aluminum, the buck-up power supply may short circuit and the IC may be damaged.

4.2 Consumables
Consumables of JSS-296/596/896 are as follows.

Location Product name Product model Code Time to replace

JSB-196GM
Fan H-7BZJD0001 7BZJD0001 5 years
Radio Equipment
NAH-692/695/698
Fan FBA12G24H(*) 5BFAH00055 5 years
Power Amplifier
Red appearing on the left of
Printer the paper roll indicates that
Roll paper 214X100 1PLAY 5ZPCM00006
NKG-800 replacement needs to be
done soon.
Printer When the printout density
Ink ribbon cartridge SP-16051 5ZZCM00003
NKG-800 decreases.
Printer When the shape of letters
Printer Head #SP-24090A1 5ZYWZ00001
NKG-800 becomes deformed.

(*) Three Fans are included in one Power Amplifier.

4-2
4.3 Self Diagnosis
4.3.1 Radio Equipment

The Self-Diagnosis function checks whether the internal circuit is functioning correctly or not.

Procedure Examples of display on the LCD

1. Press MENU .

"MODE" blinks in the channel field of the LCD.

   
2. Turn Jog Dial until "CHECK" appears.  
"CHECK" blinks in the channel field of the LCD.

3. Press ENT .

Self Diagnosis function starts.

4. After completion, the result of the self diagnosis

is displayed.
(ex.)
・No fault  

・Fault of CMN-1960 TRX unit  (*1)

・Fault of CAH-1960 PA unit  (*2)

・Fault of the serial-communication   (*3)

between NAH and NFC.

・Fault of NFC-296/896  (*4)

5. Press CLR .
The JSB-196GM exits the self diagnosis mode.

(*1) The message of "CMN-1960 TRX UNIT" will be scrolled on the LCD.
Note
(*2) The message of "CAH-1960 PA UNIT" will be scrolled on the LCD.
(*3) The message of "NAH-NFC SERIAL" will be scrolled on the LCD.
(*4) The message of "NFC" will be scrolled on the LCD.

4-3
4.3.2 Modem

The NCT-196N has self-diagnosis function for checking its internal circuits. Regarding this
self-test results, the operator can judge if it works normally or not. Note that this self-tests are
based upon DSC function but it also means NBDP function test since the electrical circuit of the
DSC is almost in common with that of the NBDP.
1. Preparation of self-diagnosis
From the "MENU#2-READOUT&SETUP" screen, press 4 and then press ENT .
The "SELF TEST" screen is displayed.

SELF TEST
1.Modem loop test
2.Priter
3.Display test
4.Frequency remote test Use ▲ and ▼ to

5.Watchkeeping receiver test scroll the screen.

ENT to select the item.
2. Modem loop test
A test message is transmitted and received internally by the NCT-196N (it is not output from the
radio). The transmitted message and received message are displayed on the screen and on a
printer if connected. Check the messages are the same as each other.

If this test is executed, OTHERS LED will light up, buzzer will sound and the following messages
will be printed. Then press STOP to stop the buzzer and to display the messages on the LCD.
When the self-diagnosis finishing, press STOP again.

MODEM LOOP TEST

Format : INDIVIDUAL
Address : XXXXXXXXX
Category : ROUTINE
Telecommand-1 : J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 : NO INFORMATION
Work TX/RX freq : 12.346.5kHz/12346.5kHz
End of sequence : EOS
TX frequency : . kHz
TX data & time : 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30

RECEIVED MESSAGE
[RX : 05.Sep.2001 (Wed) 14:35]
RX date & time : 06.Sep.2001(Thu) 01:30
Format : INDIVIDUAL
Address : XXXXXXXXX
Category : ROUTINE
Telecommand-1 : J3E TEL
Telecommand-2 : NO INFORMATION
Work TX/RX freq : 12,346.5kHz/12,346.5kHz
End of sequence : EOS
RX frequency : . kHz

4-4
3. Printer test
This test checks the NCT-196N printer interface circuit and the connection between the NCT-196N and a printer.
Alphanumeric data are printed out as a result as follows.

123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

If this pattern is not printed, the printer connector may be loose, or either the printer or the printer interface circuit
in the NCT-196N may be faulty.

4-5
4.4 Troubleshooting
Each rectangle indicates process.

Each hexagon indicates decision.

JSB-196GM Radio Equipment

(1) No receiving sound

No receiving sound

Is [POWER] switch pressed NO Press [POWER] switch 1 second

1 second or longer? or longer.

YES

I s [VOLUME] volume turned fully YES Turn the volume clockwise to the
counter clockwise? optimum position.

NO

Is [RF Gain] volume turned fully YES

Turn the volume fully clockwise.
counter clockwise?

NO

YES Set Squelch to 0.

Does SQL light?

NO

There is a possibility that

YES transmission is already
Does TX light?
activated, perform the following.

(1) Disconnect hand set.

(2) Disconnected telegraph key if
connected.
NO

Call our service center or agents.

4-6
(2) No display on the LCD

No display on the LCD

Is [POWER] switch pressed NO Press [POWER] switch 1 second

1 second or longer? or longer.

YES

YES Connect the power

Is the power cable disconnected?
cable firmly.

NO

Determine the cause for the fuse

NO
malfunction and replace the fuse
Is the fuse OK?
with a new one of the same
capacity.

YES

Call our service center or agents.

NAH-692/695/698 Power Amplifier

(1) No display on the LCD

No display on the LCD.

Is the LCD NO Turn the dial to the right after

back-light ON? pushing CLR and ENT.

YES

Is the power supply NO Connect the cable correctly.

connected correctly?

YES

Check the fuse on the PS

unit.

4-7
NCT-196N DSC/NBDP MODEM

(1) No response from keys

No response when keys on

panel are pressed.

Does the display

NO
show "DSC Press [STOP] three times.
watching"?

YES

Turn OFF the power switch, and then

ON again.
If there is still no response from the
keys, contact our service center or
agent.

(2) Messages not received

Messages not received

Is the modem loop NO Contact our service center

test OK? or agent.

YES

Can you hear Is the Self-ID number

YES NO Call our service center or
received signal from correct? agents to set the correct ID
radio? number.
NO YES

Are the radio Check the cable connecting

YES
reception frequency between the NCT-196N and
radio.
and RF gain set

NO

Set the correct reception

frequency and set the RF
gain to maximum.

4-8
(3) Messages not transmitted

Messages not
transmitted

Is the modem loop Contact our service center

NO
test OK? or agent.

YES

Is the NCT-196N Connect the NCT-196N and

connected correctly NO
to the radio. radio correctly.

YES

Contact our service center

or agent.

(4) Printer does not print

Printer does not print

Is the P mark Does the printer Printer may be faulty.

YES NO Contact our service center
displayed on the
self-test run OK?
screen? or agent.

NO YES

Can printing be Is the connector Contact our service center

NO YES
performed from
connected correctly? or agent.
"PRINT MENU"?

YES NO

Incorrect operation. Read Connect the cable

the Instruction manual between the NCT-196N
thoroughly. and printer correctly.

4-9
 (5) Cannot select "DSC watching"

Cannot select "DSC watching"

Contact our service

Is the LCD back-light YES At startup, are the YES
center or agent.
ON? navigation aid and

NO NO

Is the equipment Contact our service

YES
connected correctly to the
connectors on the rear center or agent.
panel?
NO

Connect the cable

Is the power supply NO
correctly.
connected correctly?

YES

Check the fuse on the

rear panel.

4-10
 5. AFTER-SALES SERVICE

5.1 Before returning repair

If what appears to be a defect is detected, refer to Troubleshooting descriptions of the specialized instruction
manual for every unit to check if the equipment is actually defective before requesting repair.
If the defect persists, immediately stop operation and call our service center or agents.

z During the warranty period, we or our agencies will repair the malfunction without any fee,
according to the specified procedure.
z After the warranty expires, we will repair the malfunction for a fee, if repair is possible.
z Items for notification
- Product name, type, manufactured data, serial number,
- information about the malfunction (the more detailed, the better),
- Results of Self diagnosis (refer to “4.3 Self Diagnosis”),
- your company or organization name, address and phone number.

5.2 Periodical maintenance recommended

Performance of this equipment may degrade over time because parts wear out, although degradation depends
on how this unit has been maintained, thus we recommend periodic professional maintenance checks in
addition to daily maintenance. So please contact our service center or agents for periodic professional
maintenance (This maintenance requires a service charge), or for further information about after-sales service.

5-1
5-2
 6. SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL

Frequency range: Transmit: 1.6 to 27.5MHz (100Hz steps)

Receive: 0.1 to 29.9999MHz (100Hz steps)
Frequency tolerance: ±10Hz or better
Emission mode: J3E (TEL), F1B (DSC/TLX), A1A (CW), H2B,
H3E (AME: reception only)
User definable channels: 200ch (20ch X 10 Groups)
Preset ITU channels: 1722ch [ TEL:283, DSC:29, TLX:891, CW:519 ]
Scanning channel 20 user defined channels
Communication mode: Simplex and semi-duplex
Antenna impedance: 50 ohms
Operating temperature: -15 to +55oC
Power requirement: 296: 90～132V/180～264V AC, Single-phase, 50/60Hz
596/896:180～264V AC, Single-phase, 50/60Hz
296: Tx: 2.0kVA max, Rx: 0.5kVA max
596: Tx: 3.0kVA max, Rx: 0.5kVA max
896: Tx: 3.5kVA max, Rx: 0.5kVA max
21.6～31.2V DC
Tx: 30A max, Rx: 7A max
Compass safe distance: 1.5m

2. TRANSMITTER

Output power(*) AC power source:

296: 200Wpx ( 1.6 to 4MHz ) , 250Wpx ( 4 to 27.5MHz )
596: 400Wpx ( 1.6 to 4MHz ) , 500Wpx ( 4 to 27.5MHz )
896: 400Wpx ( 1.6 to 4MHz ) , 800Wpx ( 4 to 27.5MHz )
DC power source:
100Wpx ( 1.6 to 4MHz ) , 150Wpx ( 4 to 27.5MHz )
(*) at 10ohm+250pF Artificial antenna for 1.6 to 4MHz
at 50ohm Artificial antenna for 4 to 27.5MHz
Occupied bandwidth: J3E (TEL) 3kHz or better
F1B (DSC/TLX), A1A (CW) 0.5kHz or better
Carrier suppression: 40dB or better
Spurious suppression: 43dB or better
AF frequency response: 350 to 2700Hz (6dB bandwidth)
Microphone input: 600 ohms (-40dBm standard)
Line input: 600 ohms, 0dBm (balanced)

6-1
3. RECEIVER

Receiving system: Triple superheterodyne

Intermediate frequencies: 70.455MHz, 455kHz, 20.217kHz
Sensitivity (SINAD 20dB): J3E (TEL) 6.3uV or better (1.6 to 4MHz)
3.5uV or better (4 to 27.5MHz)
F1B (DSC/TLX) 1.8uV or better (1.6 to 4MHz)
1.0uV or better (4 to 27.5MHz)
Selectivity: J3E (TEL) 6dB bandwidth 2.4 to 3kHz,
66dB bandwidth Within ±2.1kHz
F1B (DSC/TLX) 6dB bandwidth 270 to 300Hz,
60dB bandwidth Within ±550Hz
Spurious response: 60dB or better
Clarifier range: ±200Hz in 1Hz steps
AF output: 5.0W max. 1W rated
Line output: 600 ohms, 0dBm (balanced)

4. DSC/NBDP TERMINAL

DSC MODEM
Communications protocol: In conformity with ITU-RM.493 and M.541
Emission: F1B/J2B 100 baud
Code: 10 units error detection specified by ITU-RM.493.
Memory capacity: Received Distress messages: 20
Received Other messages: 20
Transmitted message: 11
Clock: Within +/- 30ppm
Data backup time: 24 hours (message content and time data)
Mark frequency: 1615 +/- 0.5Hz
Space frequency: 1785 +/- 0.5Hz
Output level: 0dBm (-20 to +10dBm variable/600 ohms balanced)
Input frequency : 1700 +/- 85Hz
Input level : -25 to +10dBm (600-ohm balanced load)
NBDP MODEM
Communications protocol: In conformity with ITU-RM.476, M.490, M.491, M.492, M.625
and ITU-T Rec. F130
Emission: F1B/J2B 100 baud
Code: 7-bit code 4B/3Y ratio constant mark signal
Clock: Within +/- 30ppm
Mark frequency: 1615 +/- 0.5Hz
Space frequency: 1785 +/- 0.5Hz
Output level: 0dBm (-20 to +10dBm variable/600 ohms balanced)
Input frequency : 1700 +/- 85Hz
Input level : -25 to +10dBm (600-ohm balanced load)
5. WATCHKEEPING RECEIVER

Receiving frequencies: 2187.5kHz、4207.5kHz、6312kHz、8414.5kHz、12577kHz、

16804.5kHz
Receiving system: Double superheterodyne
Intermediate frequencies: 40.455MHz, 455kHz
Reception mode: F1B/J2B
Sensitivity: Symbol error rate of 1% or better at 1 micro-volt input
Frequency stability: Within +/- 10Hz after 1-minute warm-up
Antenna impedance: 50 ohms unbalanced

6. ANTENNA TUNER

Frequency range: 1.6 to 30MHz

Power capability: NFC-296: 250Wpx (1.6～4MHz)、300Wpx (4～27.5MHz)
NFC-896: 500Wpx (1.6～4MHz)、1000Wpx (4～27.5MHz)
SWR after tuning: 2:1
Tuning method: Automatic tuning and preset tuning
Operating temperature: -25 to +55 oC

7. BATTERY CHARGER

Charging current: 20A (Ordinary charge)

10A (Equalizing charge)
Alarm function: Charge /Low voltage/ High voltage alarm

8. DATA TERMINAL

Controlled item: NBDP function (Control the DSC/NBDP Terminal)

9. KEYBOARD

Interface: Matrix
Contact method: Membrane sheet
Life: 5 million strokes

10. PRINTER

Print method: Serial impact dot matrix

Interface: Centronics
Paper feed method: Paper roll holder
Paper type: 209 to 216mm Roll paper

6-3
 ⬉ᄤֵᙃѻક᳝ᆇ⠽䌘⬇ᯢ
᮹ᴀ᮴㒓᷾ᓣӮ⼒
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements
of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited

᳝↦᳝ᆇ⠽䋼៪‫ܗ‬㋴ⱘৡ⿄ঞ৿䞣
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements䋩

ᔶᓣৡ(Type): JSS-296/596/896 ৡ⿄(Name): MF/HF Radio Equipment

᳝↦᳝ᆇ⠽䋼៪‫ܗ‬㋴
䚼ӊৡ⿄ (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name)
䪙 ∲ 䬝 ݁Ӌ䫀 ໮⒈㘨㣃 ໮⒈Ѡ㣃䝮
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)

໽㒓
(Antenna)
㬍 㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍

㠍‫ݙ‬㺙㕂
(Inboard Unit)
䊶᮴㒓⬉䆱
(Radio Telephone)
䊶DSC/NBDP
䇗ࠊ㾷䇗఼
(DSC/NBDP Modem)
㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍
䊶᭄᥂㒜ッ
(Data Terminal)
䊶ᠧॄᴎ(Printer)
䊶ࡳ⥛ᏺᆑ
(Power Amplifier)

໪䚼䆒໛(Peripherals)
䊶䗝ᢽ(Options)
䊶⬉㒓㉏(Cables)
㬍 㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍
䊶᠟‫(ݠ‬Documennts)

䂾䋺㸼⼎䆹᳝↦᳝ᆇ⠽䋼೼䆹䚼ӊ᠔᳝ഛ䋼ᴤ᭭Ёⱘ৿䞣ഛ೼6-7ᷛ‫ޚ‬㾘ᅮⱘ䰤䞣㽕∖ҹϟDŽ
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
㬍䋺⴫␜䆹᦭Ქ᦭ኂ‛䋼⥋ዋ࿷䆹ㇱઙ⊛ᨱ৻ဋ䋼᧚ᢱਛ⊛฽㊂⿥಴SJ/T11363-2006 ᷛಎ㾘ቯ⊛㒢㊂ⷐ᳞䇯
䇭䇭䇭(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
䇭䇭䇭 the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

JRC Code No. : 7ZPJD0162B

5(ЁढҎ⇥݅੠೑⬉ᄤֵᙃѻક∵ᶧ᥻ࠊㅵ⧚ࡲ⊩
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China

䋭1/1䋭
 For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPJD0162B 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JAN. 2011 Edition 2 JRC Printed in Japan
 NCR-333
NAVTEX RECEIVER

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

Not use the asbestos

/CTKPG5GTXKEG&GRCTVOGPV
6GNGRJQPG 
(CEUKOKNG 
GOCKN VOUE"OLTEEQLR
#/56'4&#/$TCPEJ
6GNGRJQPG 
(CEUKOKNG 
GOCKN LTE"LTETPN
5'#66.'$TCPEJ
6GNGRJQPG 
(CEUKOKNG 
/1&'.0%4 GOCKN UGTXKEG"LTECOGTKECEQO
%1&'0Q<2,&# 㪇㪈㪜㪫㪤 +51Ღ+51%GTVKHKGF
% 'FKVKQP,4% 㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㪻㩷㫀㫅㩷㪡㪸㫇㪸㫅
 Preface

Thank you for purchasing NCR-333 NAVTEX Receiver.

The NAVTEX receiver automatically receives NAVTEX service broadcasts supplied in English
and other optional languages.

• Be sure to read this manual for full comprehension before using the equipment.

• Save this manual near at hand for quick reference in the future.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.

i
 Before Operation
Concerning the symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to explain correct operation and to prevent
injury or damage to property.
The symbols and descriptions are as follows. Understand them before proceeding with
this manual.

WARNING Indicates a warning that, if ignored, may

result in serious injury or even death.

CAUTION Indicates a caution that, if ignored, may

result in injury or damage to property.

Examples of symbols
The △ symbol indicates caution (including DANGER and WARNING).
The illustration inside the △ symbol specifies the content of the caution
more accurately. (This example warns of possible electrical shock.)

The symbol indicates that performing an action is prohibited.

The illustration inside the symbol specifies the contents of the
prohibited operation. (In this example disassembly is prohibited.)

The ● symbol indicates operations that must be performed.

The illustration inside the ● symbol specifies obligatory instructions. (In
this example unplugging is the obligatory instruction.)

ii
 Handling Precautions

WARNING
Do not disassemble or customize this unit. Doing so may cause fire,
electrical shock or malfunction.

Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment.
Doing so causes electrical shock or malfunction.

Do not use a voltage other than specified. Doing so may cause fire,
electrical shock or malfunction.

Do not attempt to inspect or repair the inside of this equipment with the
exception of qualified service personnel, as doing so may cause fire, electric
shock or malfunction. If any malfunctions are detected, contact our service
center or agents.

iii
 Handling Precautions

CAUTION
Do not use this equipment for anything other than specified.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to persons.

Do not adjust the trimmer resistors or the trimmer capacitors on the PCB
unit.
Doing so may cause malfunction or damage to persons. They are preset at
the factory.

Do not install this equipment in a place other than specified or in one with
excessive humidity, steam, dust or soot. Doing so may cause fire, electric
shock, malfunction or damage to persons.

Do not place this equipment anywhere vibration or impact is likely to occur.

Doing so may cause a fall or damage to property and persons.

Do not place any objects on this equipment.

Doing so may cause a fall, malfunction or damage to property and persons.

Leave installation of this equipment to our service center or agents.

Installation by an unauthorized person may lead to malfunction.

iv
 External Views

NCR-333 NAVTEX Receiver

NAW-333 NAVTEX Antenna

v
 NBG-319 Power Supply Unit

NBG-320 Power Supply Unit

vi
 CONTENTS
Preface .................................................................................................................. i
Before Operation .................................................................................................. ii
Handling Precautions ........................................................................................... iii
External Views ...................................................................................................... v

1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Outlines .................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Features ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Components ............................................................................................. 1-2
1.3.1 Standard Components .......................................................................... 1-2
1.3.2 Options ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3.3 Configuration ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Outline ..................................................................................................... 1-4

2. INSTALLATION DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 2-1

3. PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS ................................................................. 3-1

3.1 NCR-333 NAVTEX Receiver .................................................................... 3-1

4. DISPLAYS ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Displays ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Message text screen ............................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Message list 1 screen ........................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Message list 2 screen ........................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Select message list screen ................................................................... 4-3
4.1.5 Position/date screen ............................................................................. 4-3
4.1.6 Setup screen ......................................................................................... 4-4

5. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Selection of location .............................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 Mounting ............................................................................................... 5-1

6. OPERATION .................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Menu Tree ................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Basic Operation ....................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Turning ON the power............................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1.1 Start up (Normal) ................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1.2 Start up (Abnormal-1) ......................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1.3 Start up (Abnormal-2) ......................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1.4 Start up (Abnormal-3) ......................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Turning OFF the power........................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Back light adjustment.............................................................................. 6-5
6.2.4 Contrast adjustment .............................................................................. 6-5
6.2.5 Alarm ...................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.6 Screen switching..................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.7 Displaying the message.......................................................................... 6-7
6.2.7.1 Message text ...................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.7.2 Message list 1 .................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.7.3 Message list 2 .................................................................................. 6-22
6.2.7.4 Select message list .......................................................................... 6-23
vii
 6.3 MAIN MENU .......................................................................................... 6-25
6.3.1 RX STATION screen ........................................................................... 6-26
6.3.1.1 Receiving mode setting (RX MODE)................................................. 6-27
6.3.1.2 Receiving channel setting (OPERATING FREQ.) ............................. 6-27
6.3.1.3 Automatic receiving station selection (AUTO MODE SETTING) ....... 6-28
6.3.1.4 Manual receiving station selection (MANUAL MODE SETTING) ...... 6-32
6.3.2 Receiving message type settings (MESSAGE TYPE SETTING) ......... 6-33
6.3.3 DISPLAY setting menu (DISPLAY SET) ............................................. 6-34
6.3.3.1 Contrast adjustment (CONTRAST) ................................................. 6-35
6.3.3.2 Back light settings (DIMMER) .......................................................... 6-35
6.3.3.3 Buzzer settings (BUZZER) .............................................................. 6-35
6.3.3.4 Time Difference setting (LOCAL TIME) ........................................... 6-36
6.3.3.5 Assigning to the USER key (USER KEY SETTING) ....................... 6-37
6.3.3.6 POSITION/TIME screen settings (POS/TIME DISP.SET) ............... 6-38
6.3.4 NAVTEX setting menu (NAVTEX) ...................................................... 6-39
6.3.4.1 Character size setting (CHARACTER SIZE) ................................... 6-40
6.3.4.2 CER setting (CER DISP.SETTING) ................................................. 6-40
6.3.4.3 Automatic scrolling setting (MESSAGE SCROLL) ............................ 6-41
6.3.4.4 Scrolling speed adjustment (MESSAGE SPEED) ............................. 6-41
6.3.4.5 External printer settings (PRINTER PROPERTY) ............................. 6-42
6.3.4.6 External equipment msg output settings (INS MSG OUTPUT SET) . 6-43
6.3.4.7 External printer msg output settings (PRINTER MSG OUTPUT SET) 6-45
6.3.5 MAINTENANCE menu (MAINTENANCE)............................................ 6-46
6.3.5.1 Self Diagnosis (SELF DIAGNOSIS) .................................................. 6-47
6.3.5.2 NAVTEX alarms (NAVTEX ALARM).................................................. 6-50
6.3.5.3 Setting status of the NAVTEX Receiver (STATUS) ........................... 6-52
6.3.5.4 Port monitor (PORT MONITOR)........................................................ 6-53
6.3.5.5 Software version (SOFTWARE VERSION) ....................................... 6-56
6.3.6 The display language setting (LANGUAGE) ........................................ 6-56

7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ............................................................. 7-1

7.1 General Maintenance and Inspection ...................................................... 7-1
7.2 Periodic Inspection .................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Confirming the Rx station and Message type ...................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Confirming the Alarm Status................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Trouble Shootings ..................................................................................... 7-3
7.3.1 Trouble Shootings .................................................................................. 7-3
7.3.2 Maintenance Units ................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.3 Spear parts for periodic maintenance..................................................... 7-4

8. AFTER-SALES SERVICE ............................................................................. 8-1

Before returning repair .................................................................................. 8-1
Periodical maintenance recommended ......................................................... 8-1

9. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 General (NCR-333) ................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 Receiver ............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Operation panel .................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.3 Power supply ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.4 External interfaces ................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.5 Environmental condition ....................................................................... 9-2
9.1.6 Supported interface sentences ............................................................. 9-2
9.1.7 Received message log ......................................................................... 9-2
9.2 NAVTEX ANTENNA (NAW-333 - Option) ................................................ 9-3
viii
 9.2.1 Electrical characteristics ....................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 Environmental condition ........................................................................ 9-3
9.3 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (NBG-320 - Option) ........................................... 9-3
9.4 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (NBG-319 - Option) ........................................... 9-3

Appendix LOCATION & TIME SCHDULE FOR NAVTEX COAST STATIONS

Environmental information

ix
x
 1. GENERAL

1.1 Outlines
The NAVTEX NCR-333 function receives and displays the various types of information broadcast
at frequencies of 518 kHz, 490 kHz and 4209.5 kHz, such as: navigational warning,
meteorological warning, search and rescue information, and other types of information. NCR-333
also provides the function that selects information type and coast station for intended uses.

1.2 Features
● Receiving NAVTEX broadcasts
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 receives NAVTEX broadcasts automatically on 518 kHz, 490 kHz, and 4209.5 kHz.

● Large screen allows comfortable visibility

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 has a 5.7-inch LCD screen display with clear visibility.
It also provides three different character sizes of display, and can be selected at your
convenience.

● Message saving function

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 can store up to 200 message identification codes for 70 hours. Moreover, the stored
message of each channel can be saved up to 50 messages permanently.

● Automatically receiving station setting function

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 can select receiving stations automatically on GPS position data is valid.

● Permanent storage of data settings

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 can set and store the message type and seashore station that receive to internal
memory. The data, therefore, does not need to be re-set, even after power has been turned off.

● Dual voltage supply input

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 can be used on wither 24 VDC or 12 VDC vessels.

● Self-diagnosis Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 has automatic self-diagnosis function. This function allows easy maintenance and high
system reliability.

● Connection to external equipment

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
NCR-333 can be used with the JRC Total Navigator (ECDIS) and external serial printers.

1-1
1.3 Components
1.3.1 Standard Components

No. Name Type Quantity Remarks

1 NAVTEX Receiver NCR-333 1
2 Tapping screws MPTG31659 1 4 tapping screws
3 Instruction manual 7ZPJD0304B 1 Present volume
4 Operation card 7ZPJD0306A 1
5 Antenna cable 7ZCJD0251 1 0.5 m

1.3.2 Options

No. Options Type Quantity Remarks

1 NAVTEX Antenna NAW-333 1 Whip antenna for NCR-333
2 Power supply unit NBG-319 1 12 / 24VDC input
3 Power supply unit NBG-320 1 100/220VAC Manual Setting
4 External printer DPU-414 1
5 Printer cable 7ZCJD0254A 1 D-sub 9-pin 1.5 m
6 Printer cable 7ZCJD0270B 1 D-sub 9-pin 10 m
7 Printer power cable 7ZCJD0257B 1 1.5 m
7ZCJD0257B and
8 Printer connection kit 7ZXJD0076 1
2-pin terminal block
9 Printer paper 6ZCAF00252A 1 112mm x φ50mm 25m x1
10 NAVTEX buzzer CGC-300B 1 External buzzer
11 DMC NCH-321A 1 Distress Message Controller
External buzzer 1.5 m cable and
12 7ZXJD0074 1
connection kit 2-pin terminal block
1.5 m cable and
13 Data connection kit 7ZXJD0075 1
3-pin terminal block
14 Console mount kit MPBC39314 1
15 External printer NKG-91 1
16 Printer paper 7ZPJD0384 1 58mm x φ50mm 25m x1
17 Wall mount kit MPBP31446 1 For NKG-91

1-2
1.3.3 Configuration

• System Block Diagram

NAW-333
NAVTEX ANTENNA
NCR-333
(OPTION)
NAVTEX RECEIVER

DPU-414
PRINTER
(OPTION)

DC +12V
NBG-320 DC +6.5V
POWER SUPPLY
(OPTION) NKG-91
PRINTER
(OPTION)

NBG-319
POWER SUPPLY
(OPTION)

AC 100/220V DC +12/24V

1-3
1.4 Outline
• Outline Drawing of NCR-333 NAVTEX Receiver
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 2.1 kg

1-4
• Outline Drawing of NAW-333 NAVTEX Antenna
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.3 kg

1-5
• Outline Drawing of NBG-319 Power Supply Unit
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

70±0.5
15±0.7

6±0.5
1.5

1.5

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.9 kg
• Outline Drawing of NBG-320 Power Supply Unit
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
70±0.5
20±0.7

6±0.5
1.5

1.5

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 3.3 kg

1-6
• Outline Drawing of DPU-414 Printer
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.7 kg

1-7
• Outline Drawing of NKG- 91 Printer
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
● Flush mount type

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 0.8kg

● Wall mount type

Unit: mm
Mass: approx. 1.5kg

1-8
 NCR-333

Notes:
NAVTEX RECEIVER
NAVTEX CMN-2333
Hi-Z 50ohm ANTENNA
J151 J152 J153 RX UNIT
J502
DATA OUT2 DISP EXT ALM

PRINTER / MAINTENANCE

Installation by an unauthorized person may result in malfunction.

Leave installation of this system to our service center or agents.
J1 J3 J2

EXT ALM+
EXT ALM-
GND-ISO

GND-ISO
NKG-91

TX-A
TX-B

TX-A
TX-B
1+

GND-ISO

GND-ISO
2- PRINTER
3E

RX-A
RX-B
1

TX-B
TX-A
31 31 2

GND
DC -
DC+
+BK
NAVTEX ANTENNA

-BK
7ZCJD0254A *
1 13

2.
(Cable Length = 1.5m)
or
NAW-333

+ANT
-ANT
* 7ZCJD0270B
(Cable Length = 10m)
DPU-414
7ZCJD0257B: Cable only

INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
(Cable Length = 1.5m) PRINTER
WLH-30/0/18-U-5 GND

EXT ALM Connection KIT

*

(Cable Length = 1.5m)

(ATTACHMENT)
Printer Connection KIT

7ZXJD0074
7ZXJD0076

CAUTION
(Cable Length = 1.5m) Maximum cable length between
NBG-319/320 and DPU-414 is 10m
COAXIAL CABLE
RG-58A/U

(Cable Length = 1.5m)

(Cable Length = 1.5m)

AND CONNECTOR

DATA Connection KIT

DATA Connection KIT

(ATTACHMENT)
0.42m Typ. * POWER SOURCE

7ZXJD0075

7ZXJD0075
DC+12/24V
- +
CGC-300B

*2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5)

EXT ALM- +
Connector: N-P-8
1
(JRC Supply) NAVTEX
*2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5) 2
EXT ALM+
3 BUZZER

TB10
*2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5) EXT ALM-
27 DAL NCH-321A
28 S-GND
EXT ALM+ DMC
*RG-10UY 29 DAL
30 DAL +
50m max.
*1 x 2 x 0.75mm 2 (JIS TTYCS-1)
MULTI PURPOSE DISPLAY
ABOVE DECK
*1 x 2 x 0.75mm 2 (JIS TTYCS-1) REMOTE MAINTENANCE
SERVER
Connector: N-P-8 *2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5)
EMERGENCY
BELOW DECK (JRC Supply) 7ZCJD0251
POWER SOURCE
(Cable Length = 0.5m)
DC+12/24V
+ DC6.5V
- OUT
*1 x 2 x 0.75mm2 (JIS TTYCS-1) NBG-319
MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENTS
POWER SUPPLY
*2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5)
*1 x 2 x 0.75mm2 (JIS TTYCS-1) + DC12/24V DC12/24V + EMERGENCY
INS / (D)GPS RECEIVER (IEC61162-1) - OUT - POWER SOURCE
IN
2 DC+12/24V
*1 x 2 x 0.75mm (JIS TTYCS-1)
INS / ECDIS (IEC61162-1)
GND
*

NBG-320
POWER SUPPLY
*2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5)
+ DC6.5V AC IN U EMERGENCY
- OUT V POWER SOURCE
AC110/220V
*2 x 1.5mm2 (JIS DPYC-1.5)
+ DC12V DC24V IN + EMERGENCY
- OUT - POWER SOURCE
DC+24V

GND
*
2-1

Note1: * marked cables are supplied by dock yard

Note2: marked components are optional
2-2
 3. PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
3.1 NCR-333 NAVTEX Receiver

● Front view

LCD Panel
For further information, refer to “● Display indicators” and “4. DISPLAY”.

A: Key Panel
USER Key DISP Key
Displays the screen assigned to this key. Changes the screen, refer to “4. DISPLAY”.
Refer to "6.3.3.5 USER KEY" about the
setting of USER key.

MENU Key Up, Down, Left, Right Key

Displays the “Main Menu”. Moves the cursor, scrolls the display
screen, and selects the item.

Buzzer

CLR Key ENTER Key

Clears input errors or cancel operations. Determines selection of an item and fixes
Turns off the buzzer sound. a setup.

＊ Key
DIMMER Key Displays the small window.
Adjusts the back light brightness of the
LCD.

POWER/CONTRAST Key
Turns the power ON. Adjusts the contrast
Power Off of the LCD while power is turned on.
Turns the power off with pressing the
PWR/CONT key and the DIM key at the
same time.
3-1
● Rear view

Protective cover
To connect the antenna cable and the power cable, remove this cover.

External equipments connector

ECDIS, external buzzer, and MPD (Multi purpose display) cables are connected to the connector.

Printer/Maintenance connector
Serial printer and Maintenance PC cables are connected to the connector.

3-2
● Rear panel (Terminal)

― + ― + ― +

Terminal Number and Name Description

1 ANT +
ANT Connect an antenna cable.
2 ANT -
3 BK + Connect the key lines leading from the
BK
4 BK - transmitter.
5 RXA Connect the INS / External GPS cable for serial
6 RXB communication.
DATA IN
Connect the isolated signal ground cable for
7 GND ISO
serial communication.
8 TXA Connect the INS cable for serial communication
DATA OUT with INS.
9 TXB
Connect the isolated signal ground cable for
10 GND ISO
serial communication.
11 + Connect the power supply cable.
12/24V
The voltage range of the power supply between
12 DC IN - 10.8 and 35.0 VDC.
This terminal is for electrical grounding to the
13 GND
vessel.

3-3
● Display indicators

/ Station selection mode ⅤⅢ NAVAREA No.

: "AUTO MODE" is selected for coast station The NAVAREA number is displayed with
selection. position data input.
: "MANUAL MODE" is selected for coast station
selection.

SORT
Displays the sorting order of the message list.
Refer to “6.2.7.2 Message list 1”.

Display title
The title of the current screen
Save message
This message has been saved.

Unread message
Unread message is stored. MSG LIST SORT:MSG TYPE ⅤⅢ
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 04/06/09 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
Check mark MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 04/06/09 10:34
Refer to ”6.2.7.2 Message list 1”. STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
/ Arrow mark KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
‘▲’ ‘▼’marks are displayed on the top/ bottom MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
line when the display screen is able to scroll KH13 518 5 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
upward/downward. MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
KP16 518 9 04/06/09 01:34
Status bar STATION : KUSIRO
DATA:321/342
Displays alarm, received message
type and other status
Receiving message
The channel number is displayed while receiving message on the channel.
: 518kHz : 490kHz : 4209.5kHz

NAVTEX Alarm
‘ALR’ is displayed while NAVTEX alarm has occurred.
Refer to “6.3.5.2 NAVTEX alarm”.

SAR message
When a search and rescue (SAR) message is received
with the buzzer sound.

Alarm message
When an alarm message (MSG TYP: A,B,L) is received
with the buzzer sound.

Unread message
Unread messages exist.

GPS position data

"GPS" is displayed while external GPS position data has input.

3-4
 4. DISPLAYS
4.1 Displays
Each time the DISP key is pressed, the screen is switched in the order below:
Message text -> Message list 1 -> Message list 2 -> Selected message list -> Position/date -> ...
After NCR-333 is started, a message text screen is displayed.

4.1.1 Message text screen

Message text screen displays the text of the received message.

This screen is displayed after NCR-333 is turned on, or after receiving a message.

Title Bar
The following items are displayed.

ID: ID number of the message text

FREQ: Received channel frequency

LINES: The total line of the message text

DATE: Received date （DD/MM/YY）
TIME: Received time (UTC)

IA01 4209.5 18 31/10/06 12:34

123400 UTC JUNE 04
JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2004
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO WEST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 28 JUNE 2004
.
AREA BOUNDED BY
35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E
35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
LINE: 10/ 18

Cursor position Scroll Bar

LINE: 10 / 18 The cursor position on the message
(a) (b) text is indicated.
(a) Cursor line position
(b) Total line

4-1
4.1.2 Message list 1 screen

Message list 1 screen displays the list of the stored messages.

This screen is displayed by indicating ID, FREQ, LINES, DATE (DD/MM/YY), TIME, STATION and
Message Type of each message.
Move the cursor up/down to select the message, and press the ENT key to display the message
text.

MSG LIST 1 SORT:MSG TYPE ⅤⅢ

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 04/06/09 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 04/06/09 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:321/600

Cursor position Scroll bar

DATA: 321 / 600 The cursor position on the total
(a) (b) message data is indicated.
(a) Cursor data position
(b) Total data

4.1.3 Message list 2 screen

The message list 2 displays more message indexes than the message list 1, by indicating only ID,
FREQ, LINES, DATE (DD/MM/YY), and TIME of each message.
Move the cursor up/down to select the message, and press the ENT key to display the message
text.

MSG LIST 2 SORT:MSG TYPE ⅤⅢ

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
IB02 490 20 09/06/04 11:34
IC03 4209.5 12 09/06/04 10:34
ID04 518 5 09/06/04 10:34
IE05 518 30 09/06/04 10:34
IF06 518 12 09/06/04 09:34
IG07 490 15 09/06/04 09:34
IH08 490 11 09/06/04 09:34
II09 4209.5 10 09/06/04 09:34
KJ10 490 20 09/06/04 05:34
KK11 518 20 04/06/04 05:34
KL12 518 14 03/06/04 05:34
KH13 518 10 02/06/04 05:34
KN14 518 7 01/06/04 05:34
KO15 518 12 28/05/04 01:34
DATA:321/600

4-2
4.1.4 Select message list screen

Select message list screen displays the list of the selected messages.
This screen is displayed by indicating ID, FREQ, LINES, DATE (DD/MM/YY), TIME, STATION and
Message Type of each message.
Move the cursor up/down to select the message, and press the ENT key to display the saved
message text.

SELECTED MSG SORT:MSG TYPE ⅤⅢ

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 04/06/09 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 04/06/09 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA: 21/ 93

4.1.5 Position/date screen

Position/date screen displays time, position, navigational data (SOG, COG, HDG, and ROT) when
GPS data is valid.
These parameters are not displayed when no GPS data.

POS/TIME SORT:MSG TYPE ⅤⅢ

Position
89°59.999’N
179°59.999’E

TIME 23:59(UTC) SOG: 102.2KT

COG: 359.9°
Navigational
DATE 31/12/04 HDT: 359.9° data
Date / time (DD/MM/YY) ROT:+127.1°/MIN

4-3
4.1.6 Setup screen

To display “Main menu”, press the MENU key.

Refer to “6.3 MAIN MENU” for NCR-333 settings

MAIN MENU ⅤⅢ

1.RX STATION_
2.MESSAGE TYPE
3.DISPLAY
4.NAVTEX
5.MAINTENANCE
6.LANGUAGE: ENGLISH

[EXIT]

4-4
 5. INSTALLATION
5.1 Installation

5.1.1 Selection of location

The NAVTEX NCR-333 is designed so that it can be installed on either a desk, a wall, or the ceiling of the
vessel. Select an installation location that satisfies the criteria listed on the followings.

WARNING
The installation location should be free from direct sunlight.

The length of the grounding wire should be minimized.

The installation location should also be: free from excessive heat, moisture, and vibration; in
case of installation on the ceiling, free from the stagnant heat as well as the above, and; in case
of installation near a window, free from salt water spray as well as the above.

The distance from the magnetic compass should be at least 1 meter.

The antenna cable, power cable, and grounding wire should be routed so as not to be in close
proximity with transmitter, radar, and other sources of electronic noise, as well as the cables of
these external units.

5.1.2 Mounting
Mount the NCR-333 on a table top, a bulkhead, or a ceiling by using the mounting base. Opening the case
is not necessary for mounting.
And keep a clearance for the maintenance (refer to figure below).
The mounting procedure is as follows;
- Loose the two knobs to remove the mounting base.
- Mount the mounting base on the selected location.
- Install the case on the mounting base by securing the two knobs.

4 -φ6.5

MOUNTING BASE (BOTTOM VIEW)

Wall

CLEARANCE (Unit: mm)

Space required for receiver installation

5-1
5-2
 6. OPERATION
6.1 Menu Tree
[DISP] Key

POS/TIME

SELECT MSG LIST

MSG LIST 2
[ENT

MSG LIST 1
[DISP] key
(Power ON)
MSG VIEW

[ ], [ENT] Key [ ], [ENT] Key [ ], [ENT] Key [ ], [ENT] Key

[MENU] [CLR]
[MENU]
[ ], [CLR] Key [ ], [CLR] Key [ ], [CLR] Key [ ], [CLR] Key
[MENU] Key

MAIN MENU 1. RX STATION 1. RX MODE

2. OPERATING FREQ.
3. AUTO MODE SETTING 1. STATION (AUTO)
4. MANUAL MODE SETTING 1. STATION (MANUAL)
2. MESSAGE TYPE 1. MSG TYPE
3. DISPLAY 1. CONTRAST
2. DIMMER
- MAXIMUM
- TYPICAL
- MINIMUM
- ALARM
3. BUZZER
- ALARM MSG
- RECEIVED MSG
- NAVTEX ALARM
- CLICK
4. LOCAL TIME
5. USER KEY SETTING 1. USER KEY
6. POS/TIME DISP. SET
4. NAVTEX 1. CHARACTER SIZE
2. CER DISP.SETTING
3. MESSAGE SCROLL
4. MESSAGE SPEED
5. PRINTER PROPERTY
- DATA OUT
- DATA FORMAT
- BAUDRATE
- FLOW CONTROL
- PRINT DIRECTION
6. INS MSG OUTPUT SETTING
7. PRINT MSG OUTPUT SETTING
5. MAINTENANCE 1. SELF DIAGNOSIS 1. SELF DIAGNOSIS
2. LCD DIAGNOSIS
3. SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG
2. NAVTEX ALARM 1. ALARM HISTORY
3. STATUS 1. STATUS

4. PORT MONITOR 1. PORT SELECTION 1. MONITOR screen

2. PORT LOG 1. LOG screen
5. SOFTWARE VERSION
- PROGRAM
- LANGUAGE
- OPTION
6. LANGUAGE

6-1
6.2 Basic Operation
6.2.1 Turning ON the power

Holding down the PWR/CONT key turns on the power, the starting screen appears, and then the
self-diagnosis screen appears for 15 seconds later. After diagnosis is finished, message text screen appears.

Caution
Check the main power supply of a switchboard, and a cable connection of NCR-333 NAVTEX
Receiver when the power cannot be turned on.

* SELF-DIAGNOSING...
* NOW LOADING...
ROM CHECK: OK
NCR-333
RAM CHECK: OK
NAVTEX RECEIVER
ANT CHECK: OK
VERSION 2.00
LOOP TEST:

- PRESS ‘CLR’ KEY TO EXIT -

Starting screen Self-diagnosis screen

Note
Self diagnosis can be canceled when the CLR key is pressed. A message text screen is displayed.

6.2.1.1 Start up (Normal)

When all the results of self-diagnosis are 'OK', the result screen is displayed for about 5 seconds. And then
the result screen changes to the latest message test screen automatically.

IA01 4209.5 15 04/06/09 12:34

* SELF-DIAGNOSING... 123400 UTC JUNE 04
JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2004
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO WEST PASSAGE.
ROM CHECK: OK DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 28 JUNE 2004
5 sec. .
later AREA BOUNDED BY
RAM CHECK: OK 35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E
35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
ANT CHECK: OK 35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
LOOP TEST: 35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3N 139-45-16.6E
- PRESS ‘CLR’ KEY TO EXIT - 35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
LINE: 10/ 18

Self-diagnosis screen The latest message text screen

6-2
6.2.1.2 Start up (Abnormal-1)

When any result of self-diagnosis is “NG”, a message text screen does not change automatically. And the
caution sentence as shown in the following figure is displayed on the self-diagnostic screen. In this case,
press the CLR key. The latest message text screen appears.

Caution
When “NG” is in a result, be sure to carry out self diagnosis in the “MAIN MENU” after displaying the
message text screen. Check the detailed result of the “NG” item. (Refer to “6.3.5.1 Self diagnosis”)

* SELF-DIAGNOSING...

ROM CHECK: OK

RAM CHECK: OK

ANT CHECK: OK

LOOP TEST: NG

PLEASE CARRY OUT ‘SELF-DIAGNOSIS’

IN MAINTENANCE MENU.
[PRESS ‘CLR’ KEY]

6.2.1.3 Start up (Abnormal-2)

When the result of “ROM CHECK” is “NG”, the sub screen may be displayed as shown in the following
figure.
Be sure to select "[START]" on the sub screen. In this case, although NCR-333 operates, the screen cannot
display in languages other than English.
[START]: The latest message text screen is displayed.
[INST]: The software installation screen is displayed.

When the installation screen is displayed, press and hold the PWR/CONT and DIM keys simultaneously until
the power is turned off. Turn on the power, and restart the NCR-333.

Caution
Contact our service center or agents.

* SELF-DIAGNOSING...

ROM CHECK: NG

*LANGUAGE DAT.ERR*
RAM CHECK: OK
STARTING NAVTEX?
OR
ANT CHECK: OK
RE-INSTALL
[START] [INST]
LOOP TEST: OK
[Option language data error]
PLEASE CARRY OUT ‘SELF-DIAGNOSIS’
*OPTION DAT.ERR*
IN MAINTENANCE MENU.
[PRESS ‘CLR’ KEY] STARTING NAVTEX?
OR
RE-INSTALL
[START] [INST]

6-3
6.2.1.4 Start up (Abnorma-3)

When the following screen is displayed, press and hold the PWR/CONT and DIM keys simultaneously until
the power is turned off.

Caution
Contact our service center or agents.

_ CHECK SUM _
_ COMPARING ERROR ! _
_ _
_ PLEASE RE-INSTALL _
_ THE PROGRAM. _

PLEASE RESTART AFTER

SOFTWARE UPDATE

PRESS AND HOLD [DIM]+[PWR]

6.2.2 Turning OFF the power

Press and hold the PWR/CONT and DIM keys simultaneously for one second until the power is turned off.

DIM PWR
CONT

6-4
6.2.3 Backlight adjustment

Brightness of display can be adjusted in 4 levels.

The display is medium-intensity brightness at starting.

To change the britness, press the DIM key.

Maximum -> Medium -> Minimum -> Turn off the light -> Maximum ->...

DIM PWR
CONT

Notes
The brightness becomes the brightest in the following case;
- Failure alarm is occurred. (“NAVTEX ALARM” screen appears.)
- After reception of “Navigational warnings” message (Message type “A”)
- After reception of “Meteorological warnings” message (Message type “B”))
- After reception of “Search and rescue information, and pirate attack warnings” (Message type
“D”)
- After reception of “Navigational warnings (Additional to letter “A”)” message (Message type “L”)

6.2.4 Contrast adjustment

Contrast of view area can be adjusted in 13 levels.

To change the contrast, press the PWR/CONT key. Contrast of View area is changed each time the
PWR/CONT key is pressed.

DIM PWR
CONT

6-5
6.2.5 Alarm

To stop the buzzer sound, press the CLR key. Similarly, to stop the external buzzer sound (option:
CGC-300B), press the CLR key.

An alarm buzzer beeps in the following case;

- Failure alarm is occurred. (“NAVTEX ALARM” screen appears.)
- After reception of “Search and rescue information, and pirate attack warnings” (Message type “D”)
- After reception of “Navigational warnings” message (Message type “A”)
- After reception of “Meteorological warnings” message (Message type “B”))
- After reception of “Navigational warnings (Additional to letter “A”)” message (Message type “L”)
- After reception of other messages

Refer to “6.3.3.3 Buzzer settings” for a setup of alarm buzzer.

6.2.6 Screen switching

To change the display screen, press the DISP key.

SELECTED MSG SORT:DATE XI

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
DISP STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34 DISP
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:329/438

DISP
DISP

DISP

6-6
6.2.7 Displaying the message

6.2.7.1 Message text

After starting this equipment, the latest message text screen is displayed.
Additionally, the latest message text screen is displayed just after reception of message while opening any
screen.

IA01 518 18 31/12/05 18:20

JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
.
AREA BOUDED BY
35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E
35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
.
LINE: 10/ 18

The number on the left side of DATA shows the line number of
the present cursor position. The right side number shows the
total number of lines.
(Character size: Normal)

IA01 4209.5 18 31/12/05 18:20 IA01 4.2 31/12/05

JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005 JAPAN NAVTEX N.W.
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006 NR 1260/2005
. KEIHIN KO, TOKYO
AREA BOUDED BY EAST PASSAGE.
35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E DAYTIME DAILY
35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E .
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E AREA BOUDED BY
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E 35-35-37.9N 139-47
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E -18.4E
LINE: 13/ 18 L: 9/ 18
(Character size: Medium) (Character size: Large)

Fig.6-1 Message text screen

Notes
The number of lines of the message text screen is changed as follows;
- Character size “Normal”: The message text of 16 lines is displayed at the maximum.
- Character size “Medium”: The message text of 13 lines
- Character size “Large”: The message text of 10 lines
Refer to “6.3.4.1 Character size setting” about change of character size.

6-7
The message type and the message identification codes are as follows.

The message identification codes displayed on upper-left side of the message text screen (“lA01” in the
above example) indicates the message type.
These codes consist of four alpha-numeric characters which denote the coast station originating the
message, the message type and the report number.
a. First character
The coast station that has transmitted the message is assigned by a character from A to Z.
b. Second character
This character identifies the type of message.
[A] Navigational warnings
[B] Meteorological warnings
[C] Ice reports
[D] Search and rescue information, and pirate attack warnings
[E] Meteorological forecasts
[F] Pilot service messages
[G] AIS
[H] LORAN-C messages
[J] SATNAV messages
[K] Other electronic navaid messages
[L] Navigational warnings (Additional to letter “A”)
[V - Y] Special services
[Z] QRU (No messages on hand)
c. Third and fourth characters
These characters denote the report number assigned to the message by the coast station where the
message originated.

The four-character identification code is stored in memory only when the message is received at a
character error rate (CER) of 33 % or less. When an incoming message has the same identification code
as one already stored message at CER of 4 % or less in memory (about 70 hours), it will not be displayed
and stored. The above, however, does not apply to report number ‘00’. For report number ‘00’, the
code is not held in memory and messages are displayed and stored each time they are received
when the stations are selected.

Notes
After receiving the search and rescue [D] message will display the detailed screen of search and
rescue information message until the alarm buzzer is stopped.
Press the CLR key to display the newest message after stopping the alarm buzzer.

a. Clear the unread mark

The message text is displayed after the message has been received.
Unread mark on the status bar shows unread messages has been received.
IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
Procedures JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
1) If the ENT key is pressed, the caution sentence DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
.
disappears, and this message changes to read AREA BOUDED BY
message. If all messages are read messages, the “ ” 35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E
mark of status bar is cleared. 35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
Notes 35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
- Unread messages can also be checked on the 35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
message list 1 or 2. 35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
(Refer to “6.2.7.2” or “6.2.7.3”) THE MSG WAS RECEIVED. PRESS[ENT]KEY
Be sure to clear the unread mark after reading a LINE: 10/ 18
message. Caution sentence Unread mark

6-8
b. Read the message

Screen scrolling 1
The ‘ ‘ (‘ ‘) mark is displayed when the message text
IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
scroll downward (upward) is available. JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
Procedures .
AREA BOUDED BY
1) To move the cursor up/down to the next line, press 35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E
35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
the ▲ ▼ key. (Cursor scrolls one by one in the 35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
message text.) 35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
2) To scroll the next page of the message text 35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
downward (upward) when cursor is on the bottom 35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
(top) line, press the ▼ (▲) key. 35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
.
LINE: 10/ 18

Screen scrolling 2
To skip to the next / previous message text screen is available.

Procedures
1) To display to the previous / next screen, press the key.

c. Read the other message

IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20

Read the new message JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
The new message can be displayed on the message KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
text screen. DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
.
AREA BOUDED BY
Procedures * SET139-47-18.4E
35-35-37.9N UP *
35-34-58.9N [NEXT MSG]
139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N [PREV. MSG]
139-48-03.1E
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. 35-35-02.0N [SAVE MSG]
139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N [PRINT OUT]
139-47-16.6E
DATA OUT
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
2) Select the “[NEXT MSG]”, and press the ENT key. 35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
3) The new message is displayed. 35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
.
LINE: 10/ 18
Notes
- “[NEXT MSG]” can be selected when there is new message.

Read the old message

The old message can be displayed on the message text screen.

Procedures
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears.

2) Select the “[PREV. MSG]”, and press the ENT key.

3) The old message is displayed.

Notes
- “[PREV.MSG]” can be selected when there is old message.

6-9
d. Save the message

Save the message

The currently open message can be saved. IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
The saved message is permanently stored in the data JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
memory. DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
.
AREA BOUDED BY
Procedures * SET139-47-18.4E
35-35-37.9N UP *
35-34-58.9N [NEXT MSG]
139-48-08.6E
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. 35-34-53.9N [PREV. MSG]
139-48-03.1E
35-35-02.0N [SAVE MSG]
139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N [PRINT OUT]
139-47-16.6E
2) Select the “[SAVE MSG]”, and press the ENT key. DATA OUT
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
3) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Select the “[OK]”, 35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
and press the ENT key. (“NOW SAVING...” is . *SAVE MSG*
displayes on the sub screen.) LINE: 10/ 18
ARE YOU SURE?

To return to the sub screen (SET UP), select

“[CANCEL]” and press the ENT key. [OK] [CANCEL]

4) After message saving has been completed, press

the ENT key or the CLR key. *SAVE MSG*

SAVE OK

[OK] [CANCEL]

Notes
- The message that is not saved (the stored message) is automatically erased from the data memory
about 70 hours after receiving.
- 50 messages of an average length of 500 characters can be saved in each channel.

The message cannot be saved

When the saved message in the data memory is full, the IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
sub screen is displayed as shown in the following figure, JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
and the status bar shows which channel cannot be KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
saved ( mark). DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
.
AREA BOUDED BY
Refer to “c. Put a check mark” (6.2.7.2 Message list 1) 35-35-37.9N
*SAVE139-47-18.4E
MSG*
35-34-58.9N
TO 139-48-08.6E
ADD A NEW MSG,
for explanation of the display of the status bar. 35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
UNSAVE A UNSAVED
35-35-02.0N
MSG.139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
[OK]
Save again after unsaving the unnecessary message in 35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
message list when unable to save a message. 35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
.
LINE: 10/ 18 RX1--OV

6-10
e. Print the message

Print the message

The currently open message can be printed when IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
having connected the external printer. JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
Procedures .
AREA BOUDED BY
* SET139-47-18.4E
35-35-37.9N UP *
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. 35-34-58.9N [NEXT MSG]
139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N [PREV. MSG]
139-48-03.1E
35-35-02.0N [SAVE MSG]
139-47-55.3E
2) Select the “[PRINT OUT]”, and press the ENT key. 35-35-32.3N [PRINT OUT]
139-47-16.6E
DATA OUT
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
3) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Select the “[OK]”, 35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
and press the ENT key. (“NOW PRINTING...” is 35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
displayed on the sub screen.) . *PRINT OUT*
LINE: 10/ 18
To return to the sub screen (SET UP), select ARE YOU SURE?
“[CANCEL]” and press the ENT key.
[OK] [CANCEL]

4) After message printing has been completed, press

the ENT key or the CLR key. *PRINT OUT*

PRINT OUT OK

[OK] [CANCEL]

Notes
- To stop printing, press the CLR key while printing.
- "[PRINT OUT]" cannot be selected when "DATA OUT" of "PRINTER PROPERTY" has set up "OFF".
Refer to “6.3.4.5 External printer settings”.

The message cannot be printed

When printing is unable, the sub screen is displayed as IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
shown in the following figure. JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
In this case, check the followings; .
- The connection between the external printer AREA BOUDED BY
35-35-37.9N 139-47-18.4E
* PRINTER ERROR *
and NCR-333. 35-34-58.9N 139-48-08.6E
PLEASE CHECK THE
- “PRINTER PROPERTY” settings. (Refer 35-34-53.9N 139-48-03.1E
“ PRINTER
35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E
PROPERTY ”
to “6.3.4.5 External printer settings”) 35-35-32.3N 139-47-16.6E
SETTING.
- Confirm the external printer. (Paper out, etc...) 35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
[OK]
35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
.
LINE: 10/ 18

6-11
f. Output the message from an external port
The data of currently opened message text can be
output to the connected the external equipment (ECDIS, IA01 518 15 31/12/05 18:20
JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2005
etc). KEIHIN KO, TOKYO EAST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 08 JULY 2006
.
AREA BOUDED BY
Procedures * SET139-47-18.4E
35-35-37.9N UP *
35-34-58.9N [NEXT MSG]
139-48-08.6E
35-34-53.9N [PREV. MSG]
139-48-03.1E
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. 35-35-02.0N [SAVE MSG]
139-47-55.3E
35-35-32.3N [PRINT OUT]
139-47-16.6E
DATA OUT
35-35-35.0N 139-47-15.1E
2) Select the “[DATA OUT]”, and press the ENT key. 35-33-37.9N 139-46-18.4E
35-33-58.9N 139-46-16.6E
3) Select the port which outputs message data. 35-33-32.3 N 139-45-16.6E
35-35-35.0N 139-44-15.1E, WGS-84
- SEL-DATA OUT: The message data is outputted . *DATA OUT*
from a "DATA OUT" port. [SEL-ECDIS OUT]
LINE: 10/ 18
[SEL-DISP OUT]
- SEL- DISP OUT: The message data is outputted
from a "DISP" port. [CANCEL]

4) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Select the “[OK]”,

and press the ENT key. (“NOW OUTPUTTING...” is
displayed on the sub screen.) *DATA OUT*

To return to the sub screen (SET UP), select ARE YOU SURE?
“[CANCEL]” and press the ENT key.
[OK] [CANCEL]

5) After message outputting has been completed,

press the ENT key or the CLR key.
*DATA OUT*

DATA OUT OK

[OK] [CANCEL]

Notes
- To stop outputting, press the CLR key while outputting.

6-12
6.2.7.2 Message list 1

Press the DISP key several times. The list of the currently stored messages appears.
This list shows a receiving station and a message type for each message.

MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:329/438

The number on the left side of DATA shows the

message number of the present cursor position. The
right side number shows the total number of messages.

(Character size: Normal)

MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE Ⅵ MSG LIST1 Ⅵ

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME ID FREQ DATE
IA01 4209.5 15 28/12/05 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA IA01 4.2 28/12/05
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS STN:YOKOHAMA
KA04 518 10 28/12/05 12:33 MT :NAV WARNINGS
STATION : KOSHIRO KA04 518 28/12/05
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 28/12/05 12:32 STN:KUSHIRO
STATION : YOKOHAMA MT :NAV WARNINGS
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS IA07 490 28/12/05
KC10 490 12 27/12/05 18:30 STN:YOKOHAMA
STATION : KUSHIRO
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS MT :NAV WARNINGS
DATA:321/429 D:321/429
(Character size: Medium) (Character size: Large)

Fig.6-2 Message list 1

Notes
- "LINES" and "TIME" are not displayed when character size has been selected "LARGE".
(Same applies to the message list 2 and a select message list)

6-13
a. Select a message

Screen scrolling 1
The ‘ ‘ (‘ ‘) mark is displayed when the message list 1 MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
scroll downward (upward) is available. IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
Procedures MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
1) To move the cursor up/down to the next line, press MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
the ▲ ▼ key. (Cursor scrolls one by one in the STATION : YOKOHAMA
message list 1.) MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
2) To scroll the next page of the message List 1 MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
downward (upward) when cursor is on the bottom KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
(top) line, press the ▼ (▲) key. MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:329/438
3) To read a message text, move the cursor to the
message and press the ENT key.

Screen scrolling 2
Skipping to the next / previous message text screen is available.

Procedures
1) To display to the previous / next screen, press the key.

Notes
Selecting "[PGUP]"or "[PGDN]" of the sub screen can also scroll the message list 1 screen similarly to
the above procedures. To display the sub screen, press the * key.
- [PGDN]: Previous screen
- [PGUP]: Next screen

6-14
b. Sort messages
To search message quickly, messages can be sorted.
MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI
Procedures ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
2) Select the “LIST”, and press the ENT key. STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
LIST_ WARNINGS
The items of “LIST” appear. IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
3) The items of “LIST” are as follows; KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
SORT: The stored messages are displayed STATION : YOKOHAMA
- DATE: in the order of the date received in reverse MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
- STATIONS: in the order from the receiving station "A" STATION : KUSIRO
- NAVAREA: in the order from the NAVAREA “I” MSG TYPE:
*LIST*LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:329/438
SORT:[DATE]
- MSGTYP: in the order from the message type “A”
STATIONS
- UNREAD: in the order of the date received in reverse NAVAREA
(unread messages) MSGTYP
UNREAD

4) Select "SORT" item, and then select “REVERSE” item.

*LIST*
5) Select the [OK], and press the ENT key. REVERSE:OFF
Sorting message starts.

6) After message sorting has been completed, press the ENT key [OK] [CANCEL]
or the CLR key.

NOW SETTING...

[OK] [CANCEL]

Rearrange the order of message conversely

Highlight a title
MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
Procedures IB21 4209.5 15 12/05/05 11:10
STATION : YOKOHAMA
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA33 518 10 13/05/05 22:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*LIST*
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
REVERSE:OFF
2) Select the “REVERSE”, and press the ENT key. KA67 490 20 04/06/09 02:15
- ON : The order of reverse is on. STATION : YOKOHAMA
- OFF: The order of reverse is off. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
PC01 490
[OK] 12[CANCEL]
04/06/09 10:25
STATION : YOKOHAMA
3) The order of the message currently displayed is MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
rearranged conversely, and title of ‘SORT’ is highlighted. STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:329/438

6-15
c. Put a check mark (Save/Unsave/print/output more than one message at the same time)
Each checked message can be saved (printed or output)
at the same time. MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
Procedures STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
LIST WARNINGS
IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
2) Select the “[CHECK]”, and press the ENT key. STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
The sub screen is closed, and the message list 1 KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
changes to the check screen. STATION : YOKOHAMA
The check screen highlights the "CHECK" on the MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
display title. STATION : KUSIRO
The number of check marks is displayed on the status MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
line. DATA:329/438
Check screen
3) Select the message for checking, and press the ENT CHECK SORT:DATE XI
key. ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
The “ “ is displayed on a line with cursor. STATION : YOKOHAMA
This mark means having checked the message. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
4) Press the ENT key and put a check to other MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
messages. IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
When all messages check, press the * key, MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
select the “[SELECT ALL]”, and press the ENT key. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
5) Press the * key, to display the sub screen. CHECKING - PRESS [ENT] KEY
Select "SAVE MENU", "PRINT MENU", or "PORT FINISHED - PRESS [*] KEY
MENU" in the auxiliary screen. DATA:329/438 0
To save, print or output messages at the same time, Number of check marks
refer to the procedure of d), e) and f). CHECK SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
If the CLR key is pressed on the sub screen, “EXIT IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
WITHOUT SETTING” is displayed in the sub screen. If MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
"O.K." is selected, the check marks are removed and KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
the display screen returns to the message list 1 MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
screen. IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
CHECKING - PRESS [ENT] KEY
FINISHED - PRESS [*] KEY
DATA:329/438 1

CHECK SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
MSG TYPE: [SELECT
NAVIGATIONAL
ALL] WARNINGS
IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 *SET
518 UP* 5 09/06/04 05:34
CHECKINGEXIT WITHOUT
- PRESS [ENT] KEY
FINISHED - PRESS SETTING.
[*] KEY
ARE YOU
DATA:329/438 3 SURE?

[OK] [CANCEL]

6-16
d. Save messages

Save one message MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
The selected message can be saved. IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
Procedures KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
1) Move cursor to the message to save. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
LIST WARNINGS
IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
2) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
3) Select the “SAVE MENU”, and press the ENT key. MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
4) Select the “[SELECT MSG]” in the sub screen of MSG TYPE:
*SAVE LORAN
MENU*MESSAGE
“SAVE MANU”. DATA:329/438[SELECT MSG]
[CHECK MSG]
Notes [RESET CHECK]
[CANCEL]
- Select an item in the same procedure as “d. Save
the message - 3)” (p.6-10) after the above
procedure. To display to previous
screen, select “[CANCEL]”.
5) The “ “ mark on the saved message line shows the
message has saved completely.

Save messages at the same time

The messages which are put the check mark can be saved CHECK SORT:DATE XI
at the same time. ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
Procedures MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
1) Continued from Procedure 5) of "c. Put a check mark". MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
LIST WARNINGS
IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
2) Select the “SAVE MENU”, and the ENT key. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
In addition, when the following characters are KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
displayed, STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34 KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
CHECKING - PRESS [ENT] KEY CHECKING - PRESS [ENT]
*SAVE KEY
MENU*
FINISHED - PRESS [*] KEY FINISHED - PRESS [SELECT
[*] KEY
MSG]
DATA:329/438 RX1--OV DATA:329/438 3 [CHECK MSG]
[RESET CHECK]
It means that the checked number is exceeded the [CANCEL]
number which can be saved in the memory.
RX1--OV: RX1(518kHz) cannot be saved any more to the memory.
RX2--OV: RX2 (490 kHz) MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
RX3--OV: RX3 (4209.5 kHz) IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
RX12-OV: RX1 and RX2 STATION : YOKOHAMA
RX13-OV: RX1 and RX3 MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
RX23-OV: RX2 and RX3 STATION : KUSIRO
RX123OV: RX1, RX2 and RX3 MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 04/06/09 09:34
In this case, messages still can be put a check, STATION : YOKOHAMA
however, the messages cannot be saved. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
3) Select the “[CHECK MSG]”, and the ENT key. MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
To clear to all check marks, select “[RESET CHECK]” KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
and press the ENT key. MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA:329/438
Notes
- Select an item in the same procedure as “d. Save
the message - 3)” (p.6-10) after the above procedure.

4) The “ “ mark on the saved message line shows the message has saved completly.

6-17
e. Unsave the saved message

If the message is unsaved from the message list, “ ” mark displayed on the message list 1 or select
message list will also be deleted.

Caution
The unsaved message will be deleted from the message list, if it is stored more than 70 hours.

Unsave one message MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI

The selected message can be unsaved. ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
Procedures KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION*SET
: KUSIRO
UP*
1) Move cursor onto the message to unsave. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
LIST WARNINGS
IA07 490[CHECK]
20 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
2) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
UNSAVE MENU
KC10 490 12 04/06/09 05:34
PRINT MENU
STATION : YOKOHAMA
3) Select the “UNSAVE MENU”, and press the ENT key. MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
4) Select the “[SELECT MSG]” in the sub screen of MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
“UNSAVE MENU”. DATA:329/438

*UNSAVE MENU*
5) After message unsaving has been completed, the [SELECT MSG]
selected message is unsaved from the message list [CHECK MSG]
[RESET CHECK]
and the “ “ mark is deleted from the message list 1 or [CANCEL]
select messge list. In addition, the message that is unsaved
after stored for 70 hours will be deleted from the message list.
CHECK SORT:DATE XI
Unsave messages at the same time ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
The messages which are put the check mark can be IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
unsaved at the same time. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
Procedures *SET UP*
MSG TYPE: [SELECT
NAVIGATIONAL
ALL] WARNINGS
IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
1) Put check marks in the same procedure as "c.Put a STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
check mark" of "6.2.6.2 Message list 1." MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
KC10 490 PRINT12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
2) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
CHECKING - PRESS [ENT] KEY
3) Select the “UNSAVE MENU”, and press the ENT key. FINISHED - PRESS [*] KEY
DATA: 21/*UNSAVE
37 MENU*
[SELECT MSG]
4) Select the “[CHECK MSG]”, and the ENT key. [CHECK MSG]
[RESET CHECK]
MSG LIST1 [CANCEL]
SORT:DATE XI
5) If the ENT key is pressed after selecting ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
“[RESET CHECK]”, all check marks are cleared. KC10 490 12 09/06/05 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
6) After message unsaving has been completed, the KH13 518 5 09/06/05 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
selected message has been unsaved from the MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
message list and the “ “ mark is deleted from the IA11 518 10 08/06/05 22:20
message list. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
The message that is unsaved after stored for 70 hours IA13 518 14 08/06/05 18:20
will be deleted from the message list. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA42 518 28 07/06/05 22:21
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
DATA: 18/ 34

6-18
f. Print messages or the information on equipment

Print one message MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
The selected message can be printed. IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
Procedures KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
1) Move cursor onto the message to print. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
LIST WARNINGS
IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
2) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
3) Select the “PRINT MENU”, and the ENT key. MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
STATION : KUSIRO
4) Select the “[SELECT MSG]” in the sub screen of MSG TYPE:
*PRINTLORAN
MENU*MESSAGE
“PRINT MENU”. DATA:329/438[SELECT MSG]
[CHECK MSG]
[LIST]
Notes [STATUS]
BATCH PRINT
- Select an item in the same procedure as “e. Print the
message - 3)” (p.6-11) after the above procedure.

Print messages at the same time

The messages which are put the check mark can be CHECK SORT:DATE XI
printed at the same time. ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
Procedures MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
1) Continued from Procedure 5) of "c. Put a check mark". MSG TYPE: [SELECT
NAVIGATIONAL
ALL] WARNINGS
(The sub screen is displayed.) IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
2) Select the “PRINT MENU”, and the ENT key. KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
3) Select the “[CHECK MSG]”, and the ENT key. KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
To clear to all check marks, select “[RESET CHECK]” CHECKING - PRESS [ENT] KEY
FINISHED
*PRINT- PRESS
MENU*[*] KEY
and press the ENT key. DATA:329/438[SELECT
3 MSG]
[CHECK MSG]
[LIST]
Notes [STATUS]
BATCH PRINT
- Select an item in the same procedure as “e. Print the *PRINT MENU
message - 3)” (p.6-11) after the above procedure. [LIST]
[STATUS]
BATCH PRINT
[RESET CHECK]
[CANCEL]

To display to previous screen,

select “[CANCEL]”.

6-19
 Print the information on equipment
The list of stored messages and the setting status can be printed.
*PRINT MENU*
[SELECT MSG]
[CHECK MSG]
Procedures [LIST]
[STATUS]
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. BATCH PRINT

2) Select the “PRINT MENU”, and press the ENT key.

3) Select the “[LIST]” or “[STATUS]”, and press the ENT key.

[LIST]: The list of stored messages is printed.
[STATUS]: The setting status is printed. The contents of "6.3.5.3 Setting status of the NAVTEX
receiver" are printed.

4) Printing starts. After printing is completed, close the sub screen.

Print messages at the same time

The stored messages can be printed at the same time according to *PRINT MENU*
type, station and channel. [SELECT MSG]
[CHECK MSG]
[LIST]
Procedures [STATUS]
BATCH PRINT
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears.

2) Select the “PRINT MENU”, and the ENT key.

*BATCH PRINT MENU*

3) Select the “BATCH PRINT”, and press the ENT key. [ALL STORED MSG]
The sub screen of “BATCH PRINT MENU” appears.
[ALL SAVE MSG]

4) Select the following message type for printing. *BATCH PRINT MENU*
The "SELECT MSG" can select the message printing by the -- SELECT MSG --
CHANNEL:4209.5
receiving channel, receiving station, message type. STATION:A
[ALL STORED MSG]: All stored messages are printed. MSG TYP:L
[ALL SAVE MSG]: All saved messages are printed.
SELECT MSG: The messages of the conditions
selected from the following three items are printed.
- CHANNEL: The receiving channel is selected from ‘518kHz’, ‘490kHz’, ‘4209.5kHz’ or ‘ALL’.
- STATION: The receiving station is selected from 'A' to 'Z', or 'ALL'.
- MSG TYP: The message type is selected from ‘A' to 'Z', or 'ALL'.

5) To start printing, select item and press the ENT key.

“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed on the sub screen, if the ENT key is pressed after selecting “[ALL
STORED MSG]” or “[ALL SAVE MSG]”.
When in “SELECT MSG”, “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed on the sub screen, if the ENT key is pressed
after selecting “MSG TYP”.

Notes
- Select an item in the same procedure as “e. Print the message - 3)” (p.6-10) after the above
procedure.

6-20
g. Output messages from an external port

Output one message MSG LIST1 SORT:DATE XI

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
The external serial port outputs the selected message’s IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
data from DATA OUT port. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
Procedures STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
MSG TYPE: [CHECK]
NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 SAVE20 MENU
04/06/09 09:34
1) Move cursor to the message to output. STATION : YOKOHAMA
UNSAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
PRINT MENU WARNINGS
KC10 490 PORT12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
2) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
3) Select the “PORT MENU”, and the ENT key. STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE:
*PORT LORAN
MENU*MESSAGE
4) Select the “[SEL-DATA OUT]” or “[SEL-DISP OUT]” in DATA:329/438
[SEL-DATA OUT]
[SEL-DISP OUT]
the sub screen of “PORT MENU”. [CHK-DATA OUT]
[CHK-DISP OUT]
[RESET CHECK]

Notes
- Select an item in the same procedure as “f. Output the message from an external port - 3)” (p.6-12)
after the above rocedure.

Output messages at the same time

The messages with the check mark can be output at the CHECK SORT:DATE XI
same time. ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
Procedures MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
1) Continued from Procedure 5) of "c. Put a check mark". MSG TYPE: [CHECK]
NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
(The sub screen is displayed.) IA07 490 SAVE20 MENU
04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
UNSAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
PRINT MENU WARNINGS
2) Select the “PORT MENU”, and the ENT key. KC10 490 PORT12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
3) Select the “[CHK-DATA OUT]” or “CHK-DISP OUT”, KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
and the ENT key. CHECKING - PRESS [ENT] KEY
FINISHED
*PORT - PRESS
MENU* [*] KEY
To clear to all check marks, select “[RESET CHECK]” DATA:329/438 3
[SEL-DATA OUT]
and press the ENT key. [SEL-DISP OUT]
[CHK-DATA OUT]
[CHK-DISP OUT]
- CHK-DATA OUT: Message data outgoing from [RESET CHECK]
ECDIS or INS port.
- CHK-DISP OUT: Message data outgoing from DISP port.

Notes
- Select an item in the same procedure as “f. Output the message from an external port - 3)” (p.6-12)
after the above rocedure.

6-21
6.2.7.3 Message list 2

Press the DISP key several times. The list of the currently stored messages appears.
This list displays more messages on a screen than the message list 1 by not displaying “STATION” and
“MSG TYPE”.

MSG LIST2 SORT:DATE VI

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 27/06/05 12:34
IB02 490 20 27/06/05 11:34
IC03 4209.5 10 27/06/05 10:34
ID04 518 5 27/06/05 10:34
IE05 518 30 27/06/05 10:34
IF06 518 12 27/06/05 09:34
IG07 490 15 27/06/05 09:34
IH08 490 11 27/06/05 09:34
II09 4209.5 10 27/06/05 09:34
KJ10 490 20 27/06/05 05:34
KK11 518 20 26/06/05 05:34
KL12 518 14 25/06/05 05:34
KH13 518 10 24/06/05 05:34
KN14 518 7 21/06/05 05:34
KO15 518 12 28/05/05 01:34
DATA:321/429

(Character size: Normal)

MSG LIST2 SORT:DATE Ⅵ MSG LIST2 Ⅵ

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME ID FREQ DATE
IA01 4209.5 15 27/06/05 12:34
IB02 490 20 27/06/05 11:34 IA01 4.2 27/06/05
IC03 4209.5 10 27/06/05 10:34 IB02 490 27/06/05
ID04 518 5 27/06/05 10:34 IC03 4.2 27/06/05
IE05 518 30 27/06/05 10:34 ID04 518 27/06/05
IF06 518 12 27/06/05 09:34
IG07 490 15 27/06/05 09:34 IE05 518 27/06/05
IH08 490 11 27/06/05 09:34 IF06 518 27/06/05
II09 4209.5 10 27/06/05 09:34 IG07 490 27/06/05
KJ10 490 20 27/06/05 05:34 IH08 490 27/06/05
KK11 518 20 26/06/05 05:34
KL12 518 14 25/06/05 05:34 II09 4.2 27/06/05
DATA:321/429 D:321/429
(Character size: Medium) (Character size: Large)

Fig.6-3 Message list 2

Notes
- Selecting of each message, scrolling, saving, and the printing method are carried out in the same
procedure as the message list 1.
Refer to the operation procedure of the message list 1.

- The message list 2 does not display “ ” mark which shows the saved message. When you confirm
that the message was saved, display and check the message list 1 or the select message list.

6-22
6.2.7.4 Select message list

Press the DISP key several times. The list of the messages that is currently selected appears.
Only the list of messages selected by “Message list 1” or “Message list 2” is displayed.

SELECTED MSG SORT:DATE Ⅵ

ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 28/12/05 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 28/12/05 12:33
STATION : KUSHIRO
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
IA07 490 20 28/12/05 12:32
STATION : YOKOHAMA
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KC10 490 12 27/12/05 18:30
STATION : KUSHIRO
MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 27/12/05 18:29
STATION : KUSHIRO
MSG TYPE: LORAN MESSAGE
DATA: 21/ 37
Fig.6-4 Select message list
Notes
- Selecting of each message, scrolling, saving, and the printing method are carried out in the same
procedure as the message list 1.
Refer to the operation procedure of the message list 1 about operation.

6-23
a. Select the displayed message

Select the displayed message

The displayed message can be selected. SELECTED MSG SORT:DATE XI
ID FREQ LINES DATE TIME
IA01 4209.5 15 09/06/04 12:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
Procedures MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL WARNINGS
KA04 518 10 09/06/04 10:34
STATION : KUSIRO
*SET UP*
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
FILTER WARNINGS
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. IA07 490 20
[CHECK] 04/06/09 09:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
SAVE MENU
MSG TYPE: NAVIGATIONAL
UNSAVE MENU WARNINGS
2) Select the “FILTER”, and press the ENT key. KC10 490 PRINT
12 MENU
04/06/09 05:34
STATION : YOKOHAMA
The items of “FILTER SET” appear. MSG TYPE: ICE REPORTS
KH13 518 5 09/06/04 05:34
3) The messages displayed on the select four items. STATION : KUSIRO
MSG TYPE: LORANSET*
*FILTER MESSAGE
(Items: channel, navarea, message, and msg id.) DATA: 21438 CHANNEL:ALL
Press the ▲ ▼ key to select, and press the ENT key. NAVAREA:ALL
MESSAGE:ALL
MSG ID :????
[OK] [CANCEL]

-CHANNEL : The display channel is selected from ‘518kHz’, ‘490kHz’, ‘4209.5kHz’ or ‘ALL’.
-NAVAREA : The display NAVAREA is selected from ‘I’ to ‘XVI’ or ‘ALL’.
-MESSAGE : The display message is selected from ‘SAVED’, ‘UNSAVED’ or ‘ALL’.
-MSG ID : The display msg ID is selected from ‘A’ to ‘Z’, ‘0’ to ‘9’ or ‘?’(ALL).

MSG ID ? ? ? ?

The display message type is selected from ‘0’ to ‘9’, or ‘?’(ALL).

The display message type is selected from ‘A’ to ‘Z’, or ‘?’(ALL).
The display coast station is selected from ‘A’ to ‘Z’, or ‘?’(ALL).

4) Select the [OK], and press the ENT key. Selecting message starts.

6-24
6.3 MAIN MEMU
Main menu displays menu items for setting, and maintenance, etc.
To display the Main menu, press the MENU key during operation.

MAIN MENU ⅤⅢ

1.RX STATION_
2.MESSAGE TYPE
3.DISPLAY

4.NAVTEX
5.MAINTENANCE
6.LANGUAGE: ENGLISH

[EXIT]

Fig.6-5 Main menu

Procedures
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key to select the menu item.

2. When the ENT key or the key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item is displayed.

Notes
Previous screen is displayed when the CLR key is pressed. (Such as message text display or message
list 1, etc).

The outlines of menus are as follows;

1. RX STATION: Displays the menu for selecting receiving stations (See 6.3.1)
2. MESSAGE TYPE: Displays the menu for selecting message types (See 6.3.2)
3. DISPLAY: Displays the menu for setting the display unit. (See 6.3.3)
4. NAVTEX: Displays the menu for setting the NAVTEX receiver. (See 6.3.4)
5. MAINTENANCE: Displays the maintenance menu. (See 6.3.5)
6. LANGUAGE: Selects the menu display language. (See 6.3.6)
[EXIT]: Return to the previous screen (Such as message text display or message list 1,
etc.)

6-25
6.3.1 RX STATION screen

To display RX STATION menu screen, select 1. RX STATION.

RX STATION ⅤⅢ

1.RX MDOE: AUTO

2.OPERATING FREQ.:RX1/RX2/RX3

3.AUTO MODE SETTING

4.MANUAL MODE SETTING

Fig.6-6 RX STATION menu screen

Procedures
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key to select the menu item.
2. When ENT key or key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item is displayed.
- When cursor is on the item 1 and 2, cursor moves to the right side of ":"
- When cursor is on the item 3 and 4, the menu screen of item 3 and 4 appears.

Notes
- To return to the MAIN MENU screen, press the CLR key or key.
- If the key is pressed when cursor is on the right side of ":" of item 1 and 2, cursor returns on the
item 1 and 2. (1.RX MODE, 2.OPERATING FREQ.)

The outlines of Menus are as follows;

1. RX MODE: Select “AUTO” or “MANUAL” as the receiving station selection mothod.
(See 6.3.1.1)
2. OPERATING FREQ.: Select receiving channels. (See 6.3.1.2)
3. AUTO MODE SETTING: Displays the menu screen by automatically selecting the receiving station
in each NAVAREA (Navigation area).
(See 6.3.1.3)
4. MANUAL MODE SETTING: Displays the menu screen for selecting the receiving station regardless of
NAVAREA. (See 6.3.1.4)

6-26
6.3.1.1 Receiving mode setting (RX MODE)

The automatic select mode and the manual select mode for RX station :

- AUTO: Automatic select mode

When normal GPS position data is inputted, the position and NAVAREA of a ship are automatically
specified, and the message of the receiving station in the NAVAREA is received.
(The “ “ mark is displayed on the status bar.)

Notes
“AUTO” can be operated only when the GPS data is inputted.

- MANUAL: Manual select mode

Regardless of the NAVAREA, messages are received according to the station selection settings of
each channel.

Notes
The information of code number “00” is always received when the stations are selected, displayed
and stored automatically regardless of the setting.
(Refer to “6.2.7.1 Message text”.)

6.3.1.2 Receiving channel setting (OPERATING FREQ.)

A receiving channel selection

Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items;

- RX1 (518 kHz)/ RX2 (490 kHz)/ RX3 (4209.5 kHz)
- RX1 / RX2
- RX1 / RX3

RX1 (518kHz) is always selected.

6-27
6.3.1.3 Automatic receiving station selection (AUTO MODE SETTING)

To display AUTO MODE SETTING screen, select 3.AUTO MODE SETTING from RX STATION menu (6.3.1).

Select the receiving station of each channel for every NAVAREA.

STATION(AUTO) ⅩⅠ
NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL
A:JAYAPURA N:GUANGZHOU
B:AMBON O:FUZHOU
C:SINGAPORE P:MEILUNG
D:MAKASSAR Q:SHANGHAI
E:JAKARTA R:DALIAN
F:BANGKOK RADIO S:SANDAKAN
G:NAHA T:MIRI
H:MOJI U:PENANG
I:YOKOHAMA V:CHUKPYON/GUAM
J:OTARU W:PYONSAN
K:KUSHIRO/DANANG X:HO CHI MINH
L:HONG KONG Y:
M:SANYA Z:

Fig.6-7 The receiving station selection screen (Auto mode setting)

The items of the receiving station selection screen (auto mode) are as follows;
- NAVAREA: Select the NAVAREA (I - XVI).
- FREQUENCY: Select the channel (RX1 (518k), RX2 (490k), RX3 (4209.5k)).
- SELECT ALL: Select all the stations from A to Z.
: A message is received.
: A message is not received.
- Receiving station A – Z: Select receiving stations from A to Z

Notes
- When GPS data is inputted, the receiving station in NAVAREA is automatically displayed in the
selection screen. Otherwise, the stations in NAVAREA I are displayed first.

6-28
a. Select receiving stations

Select the receiving station of each channel for every NAVAREA.

All stations of initial setting are “A message is received: ” Selection of NAVAREA
STATION(AUTO)
NAVAREA__:ⅠⅩ
FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
Procudure SELECT ALL
A:BUSHEHR N
B:HAMALA O
1) Select NAVAREA, and press the ENT key. C: P
Cursor moves to the right side of ":" (on a number). D: Q
E: R

ENT

2) Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the number of NAVAREA. STATION(AUTO)

And then, press the ENT key. NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
aa, aa
FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
The cursor moves to the lower line (on the “FREQUENCY”). SELECT ALL
A:JAYAPURA N
B:AMBON O
C:SINGAPORE P
D:MAKASSAR Q
3) Select FREQUENCY, and press the ENT key. E:JAKARTA R
Cursor moves to the right side of ":" (on the “RX1”).
ENT

STATION(AUTO)
NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
4) Press the ▲ ▼ key and select a channel. FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL
RX1 (518K): 518 kHz A:JAYAPURA N
RX2 (490K): 490 kHz B:AMBON O
RX3 (4209.5K): 4209.5 kHz C:SINGAPORE P
D:MAKASSAR Q
E:JAKARTA R

5) Press the ▲ ▼ key to select a receiving station for setting.

- Pressing the ENT key switches alternately between “ “ and “ “.
- If the “SELECT ALL” is “ ”, all station (A-Z) settings changes to “ ”.

STATION(AUTO) STATION(AUTO)
NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
FREQUENCY:RX1(518K) FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL
ENT SELECT ALL
A:JAYAPURA N A:JAYAPURA N
B:AMBON O B:AMBON O
C:SINGAPORE P C:SINGAPORE P
D:MAKASSAR Q D:MAKASSAR Q
E:JAKARTA R E:JAKARTA R

(a) Selection of all stations

STATION(AUTO) STATION(AUTO)
NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
FREQUENCY:RX1(518K) FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL ENT SELECT ALL
A:JAYAPURA N A:JAYAPURA N
B:AMBON O B:AMBON O
C:SINGAPORE P C:SINGAPORE P
D:MAKASSAR Q D:MAKASSAR Q
E:JAKARTA R E:JAKARTA R

(b) Selection of each station

6-29
b. Cancel settings

When the CLR/ MENU/ DISP/ USER key is pressed while setting up “a. Select receiving stations”, the
information screen (the sub screen) as shown in the following figure is displayed.

Select “OK” or “CANCEL”.

OK: Canceling the receiving station settings, and the screen changes according to the
pressed key.
CANCEL: The information screen is closed. Continue the receiving station settings.

STATION(AUTO) ⅩⅠ
NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL
A:JAYAPURA N:GUANGZHOU
B:AMBON O:FUZHOU
*STNS(AUTO) P:MEILUNG
C:SINGAPORE SET*
EXIT WITHOUT
D:MAKASSAR Q:SHANGHAI
E:JAKARTA SAVING.
R:DALIAN
F:BANGKOK RADIO
ARE S:SANDAKAN
YOU SURE?
G:NAHA (SAVE:PRESS’’*’’KEY)
T:MIRI
H:MOJI [OK] U:PENANG
[CANCEL]
I:YOKOHAMA V:CHUKPYON/GUAM
J:OTARU W:PYONSAN
K:KUSHIRO/DANANG X:HO CHI MINH
L:HONG KONG Y:
M:SANYA Z:

c. Set up the next channel (or NAVAREA)

After a setup of a channel (or NAVAREA) finishes, the next channel (or NAVAREA) can be set up
continuously.

Procedures
1) Press the ▲ ▼ key for selecting FREQUENCY (or NAVAREA), and press the ENT key.
Cursor moves to the right side of ":"

2) Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the number of NAVAREA.

And then, press the ENT key.

3) Select a receiving station in the same procedures as “a. Select receiving stations”.

6-30
d. Save (or Clear) settings

Save (or clear) the settings on the sub screen after setting up.

Procedures STATION(AUTO)
NAVAREA :ⅩⅠ
ⅩⅠ

FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. SELECT ALL
Cursor is on the [CLEAR]. A:JAYAPURA N:GUANGZHOU
B:AMBON O:FUZHOU
*STNS(AUTO)P:MEILUNG
C:SINGAPORE SET*
D:MAKASSAR Q:SHANGHAI
SAVE CHANGES TO
E:JAKARTA R:DALIAN
THIS SETTING?
F:BANGKOK [CLEAR]
RADIO S:SANDAKAN
2) Press the ▼ key and select the following items. G:NAHA T:MIRI
[ALL CLEAR]
H:MOJI [OK] U:PENANG
[CANCEL]
I:YOKOHAMA V:CHUKPYON/GUAM
J:OTARU W:PYONSAN
K:KUSHIRO/DANANG X:HO CHI MINH
L:HONG KONG Y:
3) Save settings M:SANYA Z:
Select the [OK], and press the ENT key.

Clear only settings of the screen that is currently open

Select the [CLEAR], and press the ENT key.
The receiving station settings of the screen that is currently opened are restored to its former state, and
the cursor returns to NAVAREA.

Clear all settings

Select the [ALL CLEAR], and press the ENT key.
All the receiving station settings are restored to its former state, and the cursor returns to NAVAREA.

Continue setting up
Select the [CANCEL], and press the ENT key.
This sub screen is closed.
*STNS(AUTO) SET*
SAVE CHANGES TO
THIS SETTING?
[CLEAR]
4) To start save process, select [OK]. [ALL CLEAR]
[OK] [CANCEL]
Then, “SAVE OK” is displayed on the sub screen.
ENT
Press the ENT or CLR key.
RX STATION menu screen appears. *STNS(AUTO) SET*

NOW SAVING...

[OK] [CANCEL]

Saving is completed

*STNS(AUTO) SET*

SAVE OK

[OK] [CANCEL]

6-31
6.3.1.4 Manual receiving station selection (MANUAL MODE SETTING)

To display MANUAL MODE SETTING screen, select 4.MANUAL MODE SETTING from RX STATION menu
(6.3.5).

Select the receiving station of each channel. There is no setup of NAVAREA.

STATION(MANUAL) ⅩⅠ

FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL
A: N:
B: O:
C: P:
D: Q:
E: R:
F: S:
G: T:
H: U:
I: V:
J: W:
K: X:
L: Y:
M: Z:

Fig.6-8 The receiving station selection screen (Manual mode setting)

The items of the receiving station selection screen (manual mode) are as follows;
- FREQUENCY: Select the channel (RX1 (518k), RX2 (490k), RX3 (4209.5k)).
- SELECT ALL: Select all the stations from A to Z.
: A message is received.
: A message is not received.
- Receiving station A – Z: Select receiving stations from A to Z

Notes
When this screen is displayed, the receiving station of RX1 is displayed first.

a. Select receiving stations

Start with selection of "FREQUENCY".

Carry out the procedure from section 3) to 5) of p.6-28 “a. Select receiving stations”

b. Cancel settings

Carry out “b. Cancel settings” of p.6-29.

c. Set up the next channel

Carry out the procedure from section 1) to 3) of p.6-29 “c. Set up the next channel (or NAVAREA)”.

d. Save (or Clear) settings

Carry out the procedure from section 1) to 4) of p.6-30 “d. Save (or Clear) settings”.

6-32
6.3.2 Receiving message type settings (MESSAGE TYPE SETTING)

To display MESSAGE TYPE SETTING menu screen, select 2. MESSAGE TYPE SETTING.

MSG TYPE ⅩⅠ

FREQUENCY:RX1(518K)
SELECT ALL
A:NAV WARNINGS N:[SPARE]
B:MET WARNINGS O:[SPARE]
C:ICE REPORT P:[SPARE]
D:SERCH & RESCUE Q:[SPARE]
E:MET FORECAST R:[SPARE]
F:PILOT SERVICE S:[SPARE]
G:AIS T:[SPARE]
H:LORAN U:[SPARE]
I:[SPARE] V:SPECIAL
J:SATNAV W:SPECIAL
K:OTHER NAVAID X:SPECIAL
L:NAV WARNINGS Y:SPECIAL
M:[SPARE] Z:QRU(NO MSG)

Fig.6-9 MESSAGE TYPE menu screen

The items of the receiving message type selection screen are as follows;
- FREQUENCY: Select the channel (RX1 (518k), RX2 (490k), RX3 (4209.5k)).
- SELECT ALL: Select all the messages from A to Z.
: A message is received.
: A message is not received.
- Receiving message A – Z : Select receiving message from A to Z

Notes
Navigational warning [A], Meteorological warning [B], Search and rescue information/piracy and armed
robbery [D], Navigational warning (additional) [L] are obliged to receive a message. These message
types setting cannot be changed.

a. Select receiving message types

Start with selection of "FREQUENCY".

Carry out the procedure from section 3) to 5) of p.6-28 “a. Select receiving stations”.

b. Cancel settings

Carry out “b. Cancel settings” of p.6-29.

c. Save (or Clear) settings

Carry out the procedure from section 1) to 4) of p.6-30 “d. Save (or Clear) settings”.

6-33
6.3.3 DISPLAY setting menu (DISPLAY SET)

To display DISPLAY SET menu screen, select 3.DISPLAY from MAIN MENU (6.3).
Display form, a buzzer, etc. can be set up on this screen.

DISPLAY SET ⅩⅠ

1.CONTRAST : 7
2.DIMMER
- MAXIMUM : 9
- TYPICAL : 6
- MINIMUM : 4
- ALARM : +2
3.BUZZER : ON
- ALARM MSG : ON
(FOR MESSAGE TYPE:A,B,L)
- RECEIVED MSG : ON
- NAVTEX ALARM : ON
- CLICK : ON
4.LOCAL TIME : ON
(TIME DIFFERENCE): -11:59

5.USER KEY SETTING

6.POS/TIME DISP.SET(1):POS
(2):TIME/NAV

Fig.6-10 DISPLAY SET menu screen

Procedures
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key to select the menu item.
2. When ENT key or key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item is displayed.
- When cursor is on the item 1-4 and 6, cursor moves to the right side of ":"
- When cursor is on the item 5, the menu screen of item 5 appears.
Notes
- To return to the MAIN MENU screen, press the CLR key or key.
- If the key is pressed when cursor is on the right side of ":" of item 1-4 and 6, cursor returns on the
item 1-4 and 6. (1.CONTRAST, 2. DIMMER, ....)

The outlines of menus are as follows;

1. CONTRAST: Adjust the contrast of this display. (See 6.3.3.1)
2. DIMMER: Set up the brightness level of this display. (See 6.3.3.2)
3. BUZZER: Select buzzer ON/OFF. (See 6.3.3.3)
4. LOCAL TIME: Input local time. (See 6.3.3.4)
5. USER KEY SETTING: Assign the often used function for the USER key (See 6.3.3.5)
6. POS/TIME DISP.SET: Set up the display of the POSITION/TIME screen. (See 6.3.3.6)

6-34
6.3.3.1 Contrast adjustment (CONTRAST)

When 1. CONTRAST is selected, CONTRAST is ready to be entered. To adjust the contrast, press the ▲ ▼
key, and then press the ENT key.
1.CONTRAST : 10
The adjustment of the contrast
- “1” is the darkest.
- “13” is the lightest.
The initial setting is “7”.

6.3.3.2 Back light settings (DIMMER)

Brightness can be changed into four levels (Maximum, Typical, Minimum and off) by pressing the DIM key.
These brightness levels are set up in this item.
The increase value of the brightness at the time of alarm generating can be changed from +1 to +9.

Select 2.DIMMER, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".
Number and brightness is changed when the ▲ ▼ key is pressed, and then press the ENT key.
Press the ENT key after setting up to "ALARM". All setting values are saved.

2.DIMMER
- MAXIMUM : 10
- TYPICAL : 8
- MINIMUM : 4
- ALARM : +2

Notes
“MAXIMUM” should enter the largest numerical value and “MINIMUM” should enter the smallest
numerical value.

6.3.3.3 Buzzer settings (BUZZER)

When 3. BUZZER is selected, each buzzer functions can be set enable (ON) or disable (OFF) as followings.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the “ON” or “OFF”.
Press the ENT key after setting up to "CLICK". All buzzer settings are saved.

3.BUZZER : ON
- ALARM MSG : ON
(FOR MESSAGE TYPE:A,B,L)
- RECEIVED MSG : ON
- NAVTEX ALARM : ON ON: A buzzer is sounded.
OFF: A buzzer is not sounded.
- CLICK : ON

BUZZER: OFF: All buzzer functions are disabled.

ON: Each buzzer function as shown below can be enabled.
- ALARM MSG: When a message (A, B and L) is received.
- RECEIVED MSG: When a message (other than A, B and L) is received.
- NAVTEX ALARM: When a failure alarm occurs.
- CLICK: When a key is pressed.

Caution
When search and rescue message (D) is received, buzzer sounds. The SAR buzzer sound can not be
set to “OFF (disable)”.

6-35
6.3.3.4 Time Difference setting (LOCAL TIME)

"LOCAL TIME" can set up time difference to UTC.

When “ON” is selected, “(LT)” is displayed in the POSITION/TIME screen. The time of the POSITION/TIME
screen displays the numerical value which added time difference to UTC.
When “OFF” is selected, “(UTC)” is displayed.

4.LOCAL TIME : ON
(TIME DIFFERENCE): +09:00

Procudure
1. Select 4.LOCAL TIME, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".

2. Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the ENT key.
The cursor moves to the lower line.

3. Press the ▲ ▼ key and select “+ (add) “ or “- (sub)”. Next, input the numerical value within the range of
00:00 to 12:00. ( -12:00 to +12:00)
To save the "LOCAL TIME" settings, cursor should press the ENT key on the rightmost position
(minute).

Notes
The setup time difference is displayed on the POSITION/TIME screen.

6-36
6.3.3.5 Assigning to the USER key (USER KEY SETTING)

The USER key can be assigned to the often used function (screen).
Select 5. USER KEY SETTING, and press the ENT key. USER KEY SETTING screen appears.
USER KEY SETTING ⅩⅠ
USER KEY: P
-----------------------------------

D:POSITION/TIME
E:RX STATION SETTING MENU
F:AUTO MODE SETTING
G:MANUAL MODE SETTING
H:MESSAGE TYPE SETTING MENU
I:DISPLAY SETTING MENU
J:USER KEY SETTING
K:NAVTEX SETTING MENU
L:MAINTENANCE MENU
M:SELF DIAGNOSIS
N:NAVTEX ALARM
O:STATUS

Fig.6-11 USER KEY SETTING screen

Press the ▲ ▼ key and select from “A” to “Z”, and then press the ENT key. “USER KEY” setting is saved.
“ “ mark is displayed on the bottom line when the USER KEY SETTING screen is able to scroll downward.
“ “ mark is displayed on the top line when the USER KEY SETTING screen is able to scroll upward.
To display DISPLAY menu screen, press the CLR.

Refer to the following table about selectable items;

Title Explanation
A MESSAGE LIST1 MESSAGE LIST 1 screen is displayed.
B MESSAGE LIST2 MESSAGE LIST 2 screen is displayed.
C SELECT MESSAGE LIST SELECT MESSAGE LIST screen is displayed.
D POSITION/ITME POSITION/TIME screen is displayed.
E RX STATION SETTING MENU RX STATION menu screen is displayed.
AUTO MODE SETTING screen (RX STATION menu) is
F AUTO MODE SETTING
displayed.
MAMUAL MODE SETTING screen (RX STATION menu) is
G MANUAL MODE SETTING
displayed.
H MESSAGE TYPE SETTING MENU MESSAGE TYPE SETTING screen is displayed.
I DISPLAY SETTING MENU DISPLAY menu screen is displayed.
J USER KEY SETTING This screen (SER KEY SETTING) is displayed.
K NAVTEX SETTING MENU NAVTEX menu screen is displayed.
L MAINTENANCE MENU MAINTENANCE menu screen is displayed.
M SELF DIAGNOSIS SELF DIAGNOSIS screen (MAINTENANCE menu) is displayed.
N NAVTEX ALARM NAVTEX ALARM screen (MAINTENANCE menu) is displayed.
O STATUS STATUS screen (MAINTENANCE menu) is displayed.
P PORT MONITOR PORT MONITOR screen (MAINTENANCE menu) is displayed.
Printing is started if the USER key is pressed on the screen
Y PRINT which can print the external printer. Printing is stopped if the
CLR key is pressed during printing.
Z NON USE The USER key cannot be used.

6-37
6.3.3.6 POSITION/TIME screen settings (POS/TIME DISP.SET)

"POS/TIME DISP.SET" can set up the item displayed on the POSITION/TIME screen.

POSITION/TIME screen can be displayed selecting items of “position (POS)”, “time (TIME)”, and
“navigational information (NAV)”.

6.POS/TIME DISP.SET(1):POS
(2):TIME/NAV

Procudure
1. Select 6.POS/TIME DISP. SET(1), and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".

2. Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the “POS”, “TIME” or “OFF”, and then press the ENT key.
This item is displayed on the upside of the POSITION/TIME screen.

Notes
The setup time difference is displayed on the POSITION/TIME screen.
When you have selected "OFF", cursor ends the setup of this item, without moving to the lower line “(2)”
and pressing the DISP key does not display the POSITION/TIME screen.

3. The cursor moves to the lower line “(2)”. Press the ▲ ▼ key, and then press the ENT key.
This item is displayed on the downside of the POSITION/TIME screen.

(1): POS, The selectable items of “(2)” are as follows.

OFF, TIME, TIME/NAV
(1): TIME, The selectable items of “(2)” are as follows.
OFF, POS, POS/TIME

- When “OFF” is selected, only the item of (1) is displayed on POSITION/TIME screen.
- When “TIME” (or “POS”) is selected, this item is displayed on the downside of the POSITION/TIME
screen.
- When “TIME/NAV” (or “POS/NAV”) is selected, time is displayed on the left side, and navigational
information is displayed on the right side of the POSITION/TIME screen.

Ex) The following figure is an example when selecting “POS” and “TIME/NAV”.
(1): POS
(2): TIME/NAV

POS/TIME XI

The item of (1) 89°59.999’ N

139°59.999’ E

TIME 23:59(UTC) SOG: 102.2KT

The item of (2) COG: 359.9°
DATA 31/12/05 HDT: 359.9°
(DD/MM/YY) ROT:+127.1°/MIN

6-38
6.3.4 NAVTEXsetting menu (NAVTEX)

To display NAVTEX SET menu screen, select 4.NAVTEX from MAIN MENU (6.3).
Character size, printer setting, etc. can be set up on this screen.
NAVTEX SET ⅩⅠ

1.CHARACTER SIZE : NORMAL

2.CER DISP.SETTING : OFF
(CER:CHARACTER ERROR RATE)

3.MESSAGE SCROLL : ON
4.MESSAGE SPEED : FAST
5.PRINTER PROPERTY
- DATA OUT : MANUAL
- DATA FORMAT : ON
- BAUDRATE : 38.4kBPS
- FLOW CONTROL : NONE
- PRINT DIRECTION : UPRIGHT

6.INS MESSAGE OUTPUT SETTING

7.PRINT MESSAGE OUTPUT SETTING

Fig.6-12 NAVTEX SET menu screen

Procedures
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key to select the menu item.
2. When ENT key or key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item is displayed.

Notes
- To return to the MAIN MENU menu screen, press the CLR key or key.
- If the key is pressed when cursor is on the right side of ":", cursor returns on the item.
(1.CHARACTER SIZE, 2. CER DISP.SETTING, ....)

The outlines of menus are as follows;

1. CHARACTER SIZE: Select the character size (See 6.3.4.1)
2. CER DISP.SETTING: Add “CER” to the end of message (See 6.3.4.2)
3. MESSAGE SCROLL: Set up the message scroll function (See 6.3.4.3)
4. MESSAGE SPEED: Select the scrolling speed (See 6.3.4.4)
5. PRINTER PROPERTY: Set up the external printer connection (See 6.3.4.5)
6. INS MESSAGE OUTPUT SETTING: Set up the external equipment output msg (See 6.3.4.6)
7. PRINT MESSAGE OUTPUT SETTING: Set up the external printer output msg (See 6.3.4.7)

6-39
6.3.4.1 Character size setting (CHARACTER SIZE)

Displayed character can be changed into three sizes.

Select 1.CHARACTER SIZE, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".
Press the ▲ ▼ key, and then press the ENT key.
If the ENT key is pressed, the selected character size is saved, and the displayed character is changed.

1.CHARACTER SIZE : NORMAL

The initial setting is “NORMAL”.

NORMAL: The normal character size: 13x9 dots
MEDIUM: The medium character size: 16x9 dots
LARGE: The large character size: 20x16 dots

6.3.4.2 CER setting (CER DISP.SETTING)

A message text can add “CER(*1)“ to the end of message.

Select 2.CER DISP.SETTING, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the ENT key. This setting is saved

2.CER DISP.SETTING : ON
(CER:CHARACTER ERROR RATE)

The initial setting is “OFF”.

ON: “CER” is displayed on the end of message.
OFF: “CER” is not displayed.

(*1)
: Character Error Rate

(When CER DISP.SETTING is set “ON”) (When CER DISP.SETTING is set “OFF”)
IA01 4209.5 15 04/06/09 12:34 IA01 4209.5 15 04/06/09 12:34
123400 UTC JUNE 04 123400 UTC JUNE 04
JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2004 JAPAN NAVTEX N.W. NR 1260/2004
KEIHIN KO, TOKYO WEST PASSAGE. KEIHIN KO, TOKYO WEST PASSAGE.
DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 28 JUNE 2004 DAYTIME DAILY UNTIL 28 JUNE 2004
35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E,WGS-84 35-35-02.0N 139-47-55.3E,WGS-84
(END OF MESSAGE CER : 3.5%) (END OF MESSAGE)
LINE: 18/ 18 LINE: 18/ 18

6-40
6.3.4.3 Automatic scrolling setting (MESSAGE SCROLL)

When character size has been selected “LARGE”, a message text can be automatically scrolled on a screen.

Select 3.MESSAGE SCROLL, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the ENT key. This setting is saved

3.MESSAGE SCROLL : ON

The initial setting is “ON”

ON: A message text scroll.
OFF: A message text does not scroll.

6.3.4.4 Scrolling speed adjustment (MESSAGE SPEED)

The speed of automatic scrolling can be changed into three levels.

Select 4.MESSAGE SPEED, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the ENT key. This setting is saved

4.MESSAGE SPEED : NORMAL

The initial setting is “NORMAL”.

SLOW: A character scrolls at the slowest speed.
NORMAL: A character scrolls at the normal speed.
FAST: A character scrolls at the fastest speed.

6-41
6.3.4.5 External printer settings (PRINTER PROPERTY)

Serial port (RS-232C: MAINTENANCE/PRINTER) conditions can be set up when connecting external printer.

Select 5.PRINTER PROPERTY, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".
After setting up to "FLOW CONTROL", press the ENT key. All settings are saved.
5.PRINTER PROPERTY
- DATA OUT : MANUAL
- DATA FORMAT : ON
- BAUDRATE : 4800BPS
- FLOW CONTROL : NONE
- PRINT DIRECTION : UPRIGHT

The explanations of each item are as follows;

(1) DATA OUT

The data output method for printer is set up.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items. If the ENT key is pressed, Cursor moves to the lower line.
OFF: The message is not outputted to the external printer.
AUTO: After receiving a message, the data is automatically outputted to the external printer.
MANUAL: The data of the selected message is outputted to the external printer.

(2) DATA FORMAT

The output data format is set up.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items. If the ENT key is pressed, Cursor moves to the lower line.
ON: The header and footer are added to a message text.
OFF: Only a message text is printed.
(The example of printing）
Header
---- 518kHz NAVTEX MESSAGE ----
ZCZC IA01
TEST MESSAGE
NNNN
Footer
--- END OF MESSAGE CER = 0.0% ---

(3) BAUDRATE
Baudrate (bits/sec) is set up.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items. If the ENT key is pressed, Cursor moves to the lower line.
Baudrate can be selected from "4800", "9600", and "38.4K." BPS.

(4) FLOW CONTROL

The flow control is set up.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items. If the ENT key is pressed, Cursor moves to the lower line.
NONE: The flow control is not performed.
HARD: The flow control is performed.

(5) PRINT DIRECTION

Print direction is set up.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items. If the ENT key is pressed, all settings are saved.
UPRIGHT: Upright printing (Set up when DPU-414 is connected.)
INVERT: Inverted printing (Set up when NKG-91 is connected.)

The initial settings are as follows. Set up as follows when DPU-414 is connected.
If NKG-91 is connected, please change PRINT DIRECTION into INVERT.
DATA OUT: MANUAL
DATA FORMAT: ON
BAUD RATE: 4800BPS
FLOW CONTROL: NONE
PRINT DIRECTION: UPRIGHT

6-42
6.3.4.6 External equipment message output settings (INS MSG OUTPUT SETTING)

lNS port (DATA OUT) message output conditions can be set up when connecting external equipment.

INS MSG OUTPUT SETTING ⅤⅢ

STATION SELECT ALL

518k: AB-DEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
490k: A-CDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4.2M: -BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
MSG TYPE SELECT ALL

518k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
490k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4.2M: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

The items of the station and message type selection screen are followings;

- Station A to Z and message type A to Z of outputted messages via INS port.

“SELECT ALL” : Select all the station or msg type from A to Z.
“A” to “Z” display : Messages are outputted via INS port.
“–“ display : Messages are not outputted via INS port.

Notes
Navigational warning [A], Meteorological warning [B], Search and rescue information/piracy and armed
robbery [D], Navigational warning (additional) [L] are obliged to receive a message. These message
types setting cannot be changed.

a. Select stations and message type

Press the ▲ ▼ key to select station and messge type for setting.
- Pressing the ENT key switches alternately between “(A-Z) “ and “– “.
- Select the “SELECT ALL” and press the ENT key, settings changes to all.

b. Cancel settings

When the CLR/ MENU/ DISP/ USER key is pressed while setting up “a. Select receiving stations and
message type”, the information screen (the sub screen) as shown in the following figure is displayed.

Select “OK” or “CANCEL”.

OK: Canceling the receiving station settings, and the screen changes according to the
pressed key.
CANCEL: The information screen is closed. Continue the station and message type settings.

*INS MSG SET*

EXIT WITHOUT
SAVING.
ARE YOU SURE?
(SAVE:PRESS ’*’ KEY)
[OK] [[CANCEL]

6-43
c. Save (or Clear) settings

Save (or clear) the settings on the sub screen after setting up.
INS OUTPUT SETTING ⅩⅠ
Procedures STATION SELECT ALL
518k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. 490k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Cursor is on the [ALL CLEAR]. 4.2M: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
*INS MSG SET*
MSG TYPE SAVE
SELECT ALL
CHANGES TO
518k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
THIS SETTING?
2) Press the ▼ key and select the following items. 490k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4.2M: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
[ALL CLEAR]
3) Save settings [OK] [CANCEL]
Select the [OK], and press the ENT key.

Clear all settings

Select the [ALL CLEAR], and press the ENT key.
All the settings are restored to its former state.

Continue setting up
Select the [CANCEL], and press the ENT key. *INS MSG SET*
SAVE CHANGES TO
This sub screen is closed. THIS SETTING?

4) To start save process, select [OK]. [ALL CLEAR]

[OK] [CANCEL]
Then, “SAVE OK” is displayed on the sub screen.
ENT
Press the ENT or CLR key.
NAVTEX menu screen appears. *INS MSG SET*

NOW SAVING...

[OK] [CANCEL]

Saving is completed

*INS MSG SET*

SAVE OK

[OK] [CANCEL]

6-44
6.3.4.7 External printer message output settings (PRINTER MSG OUTPUT SETTING)

Serial port (RS-232C: MAINTENANCE/PRINTER) message output conditions can be set up when
connecting external printer.
The external printer message output settings can be operated when the DATA OUT of 5.PRINTER
PROPERTY is “AUTO” setting.

PRINT MSG OUTPUT SETTING ⅤⅢ

STATION SELECT ALL

518k: AB-DEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
490k: A-CDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4.2M: -BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
MSG TYPE SELECT ALL

518k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
490k: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
4.2M: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

The items of the receiving station and message type selection screen are followings;

- Station A to Z and message type A to Z of outputted messages via printer port.

“SELECT ALL” : Select all the station or msg type from A to Z.
“A” to “Z” display : Messages are outputted via printer port.
“–“ display : Messages are not outputted via printer port.

Notes
Navigational warning [A], Meteorological warning [B], Search and rescue information/piracy and armed
robbery [D], Navigational warning (additional) [L] are obliged to receive a message. These message
types setting cannot be changed.

a. Select stations and message type

Carry out “a. Select stations and message type ” of p.6-43.

b. Cancel settings

Carry out “b. Cancel settings” of p.6-43.

c. Save (or Clear) settings

Carry out the procedure from section 1) to 4) of p.6-44 “c. Save (or Clear) settings”.

6-45
6.3.5 MAINTENANCE menu (MAINTENANCE)

To display MAINTENANCE menu screen, select 5.MAINTENANCE from MAIN MENU (6.3).
Users can check current status of the system by the menu.

MANINTENANCE ⅩⅠ

1.SELF DIAGNOSIS
2.NAVTEX ALARM
3.STATUS

4.PORT MONITOR
5.SOFTWARE VERSION
- PROGRAM : 02.00
- LANGUAGE: 01.00
- OPTION : --.--

Fig.6-13 MAINTENANCE menu screen

Procedures
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key to select the menu item.
2. When ENT key or key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item is displayed.
- When cursor is on the item 1-4, cursor moves to the right side of ":"
- When cursor is on the item 5, the menu screen of item 5 appears.

Notes
- To return to the MAIN MENU screen, press the CLR key or key.
- If the key is pressed when cursor is on the right side of ":", cursor returns on the item.
(1.CHARACTER SIZE, 2. CER DISP.SETTING, ....)

The outlines of menus are as follows;

1. SELF DIAGNOSIS: Perform self diagnosis test. (See 6.3.4.1)
2. NAVTEX ALARM: Display alarm logs for disorders. (See 6.3.4.2)
3. STATUS: Display current status of NAVTEX setting. (See 6.3.4.3)
4. PORT MONITOR: Display serial data of each port. (See 6.3.4.4)
5. SOFTWARE VERSION:Display versions of software installed in NCR-333. (See 6.3.4.5)

6-46
6.3.5.1 Self diagnosis (SELF DIAGNOSIS)

NCR-333 can be self-diagnosed.

Select 1.SELF DIAGNOSIS, and press the ENT key. SELF DIAGNOSIS screen appears.

SELF DIAGNOSIS ⅩⅠ
1.SELF DIAGNOSIS : START
ROM : GOOD
RAM : GOOD
SIO : GOOD
PS : GOOD
ANTENNA CHECK : GOOD
518kHZ OVER ALL TEST : GOOD
490kHZ OVER ALL TEST : GOOD
4209.5kHZ OVER ALL TEST: GOOD When character size has
been selected “NORMAL”,
THE QUICK BLOWN FOX JUMPS OVER these character strings are
THE LAZY DOG.123456789.,?()=/+-: displayed.

2.LCD DIAGNOSIS :CANCEL

3.SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG

Fig.6-14 SELF DIAGNOSIS screen

Procudure
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key in order to select the item to diagnose.

2. When the ENT key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item appears.
Pressing the key can display the same.
- When cursor is on the item 1 or 2, cursor moves to the right side of ":"
- When cursor is on the item 3, the menu screen of item 3 appears.

Notes
- To return to the MAINTENANCE screen, press the CLR key or key.
- If the key is pressed when cursor is on the “START” of the item 1 or 2, cursor returns on the item 1
or 2. (1.SELF DIAGNOSIS or 2.LCD DIAGNOSIS)

The outlines of menus are as follows;

1. SELF DIAGNOSIS: NCR-333 is diagnosed. (See a))
2. LCD DIAGNOSIS: LCD panel is diagnosed. (See b))
3. SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG: The diagnostic result log of the item 1 is displayed. (See c))

6-47
a. The Diagnosis of equipment (SELF DIAGNOSIS)
Procudure

1) Select 1.SELF DIAGNOSIS, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".

2) Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items;

START: Self diagnosis is started. However, the diagnostic results are not printed.
ST-PRTN: Self diagnosis is started. After self diagnosis is completed, the diagnosis results are
printed.
CANCEL: Self diagnosis is not started. Cursor returns to 1.SELF DIAGNOSIS.

3) Select the “START” or “ST-PRTN”, and then press the ENT key.
Self diagnosis starts by the “ROM” test and is ended by the “4209.5 kHz over all test”.
During diagnosis, “SELF DIAGNOSIS” of screen title repeats blink.
The buzzer sounds at the last of diagnosis, and check that the buzzer sounds normally. Press CLR key
to stop the beeping.

1.SELF DIAGNOSIS : START

ROM : GOOD
RAM : GOOD
SIO : GOOD
PS : GOOD
ANTENNA CHECK : GOOD
518kHZ OVER ALL TEST:
490kHZ OVER ALL TEST:
4209.5kHZ OVER ALL TEST:

“OVER ALL TEST” takes about 15 seconds per test.

Whenever one test (OVER ALL TEST) is completed, character string as shown in the following figure is
displayed. When “*“ is displayed in a character string, the test result is NG.
1.SELF DIAGNOSIS : START
ROM : GOOD OVER ALL TEST:
RAM : GOOD "OVER ALL TEST" is the test which outputs
SIO : GOOD
PS : GOOD a test signal from the inside of the circuit,
ANTENNA CHECK : GOOD and receives the signal from each receiver.
518kHZ OVER ALL TEST: GOOD
490kHZ OVER ALL TEST:
4209.5kHZ OVER ALL TEST: Test signal (Character strings):
THE QUICK BLOWN FOX JUMPS OVER
THE QUICK BLOWN FOX JUMPS OVER
THE LAZY DOG.123456789.,?()=/+-: THE LAZY DOG. 123456789.,?()=/+-:

Caution
When the result of the malfunction is displayed, contact our service center or an agency as soon as
possible after referring to troubleshooting of Chapter 7.

The list of diagnosis items

Diagnosis items Explanation Corrective Action
ROM The data memory and the program memory are checked. Replace CMJ-501N.
When the program memory is abnormal (NG), ‘[1]’ is displayed,
and when the data memory is abnormal, ‘[2]’ is displayed.
RAM The memory for temporarily storage is checked.
SIO Serial interfaces are checked.
When the ‘ECDIS/GPS’ port is abnormal (NG), ‘[1]’ is displayed,
and when the ‘Maintenance/Printer’ port is abnormal, ‘[2]’ is
displayed, and when the ‘DISP’ port is abnormal, ‘[3]’ is
displayed.
PS The power supply part is checked.
ANTENNA CHECK The DC voltage of the NAVTEX antenna is checked. Replace CMN-2333.
518KHZ OVER ALL TEST Internal receiver (RX1) is checked.
490KHZ OVER ALL TEST Internal receiver (RX2) is checked.
4209.5KHZ OVER ALL TEST Internal receiver (RX3) is checked.

6-48
b. The diagnosis of LCD panel (LCD DIAGNOSIS)
Procudure
1) Select 2.LCD DIAGNOSIS, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".

2) Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items;

START: Diagnosis is started.
CANCEL: Diagnosis is canceled, and cursor returns to 2.LCD DIAGNOSIS.

3) Select the “START”, and press the ENT key.

This diagnosis blinks the viewing area every 2 seconds. (White -> Black -> White-> ...)

c. Self diagnosis log (SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG)

Procudure
1) Select 3.SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG, and press the ENT key. SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG screen appears.
The newest result is displayed on this screen.

2) To display the next old result, press the ▼ key. (Up to last 10 results)

The diagnosed time is displayed when external GPS receiver is connected.

”--/--/-- --:--“ is displayed when time is not able to be acquired. (External GPS receiver is not connected.)
SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG ⅩⅠ

9.RESULT 29/06/05 12:34 To print a result to the external printer, press the * key
ROM[1][2] :NG
RAM :GOOD in order to display the sub screen.
SIO[1][2][3] :NG Select the “[PRINT OUT]”, and press the ENT key.
PS :GOOD
ANTENNA CHECK :GOOD Printing is started.
518KHZ OVER ALL TEST:GOOD
490KHZ OVER ALL TEST:GOOD
4209.5KHZ OVER ALL TEST:GOOD To stop printing, press the CLR key while printing.

To return to the SELF DIAGNOSIS screen, select the

“[CANCEL]” and press the ENT key.

SELF DIAGNOSIS LOG ⅩⅠ

9.RESULT 29/06/05 12:34

ROM[1][2] :NG
RAM :GOOD
SIO[1][2][3] :NG
PS *DIAGNOSIS LOG* :GOOD
ANTENNA CHECK :GOOD
518KHZ [PRINT
OVER ALL TEST:GOOD
OUT]
490KHZ [CANCEL]
OVER ALL TEST:GOOD
4209.5KHZ OVER ALL TEST:GOOD

6-49
6.3.5.2 NAVTEX alarms (NAVTEX ALARM)

To display NAVTEX ALARM screen, select 2.NAVTEX ALARM from MAINTENANCE menu (6.3.5).
In the NAVTEX ALARM screen, the present alarm is displayed.
On the ALARM HISTORY screen, the alarm which occurred in operation can be displayed from the latest one
to a maximum of 20 affairs.
NAVTEX ALARM ⅩⅠ

11/12/05 15:34
054,A,Printer err

Fig.6-15 NAVTEX ALARM screen

Notes
- To return to the MAINTENANCE screen, press the CLR key or key.
- "NO DATA" is displayed when NAVTEX alarm has not occurred.

To print the NAVTEX alarms to the external printer, press the * key in order to display the sub screen.
Select the “[PRINT OUT]”, and press the ENT key. Printing is started.

To stop printing, press the CLR key while printing.

To return to the NAVTEX ALARM screen, select the “[CANCEL]” and press the ENT key.

NAVTEX ALARM ⅩⅠ

11/12/05 15:34

054,A,Printer err

*NAVTEX ALARM*

[HISTORY]
[PRINT OUT]
[CANCEL]

6-50
a. Alarm history (ALARM HISTORY)

This screen displays a history of alarms which occur while the power is on. It displays the alarm history
from the most recent one maximum 20 lines.
To return to the NAVTEX ALARM screen, press the CLR key or key.
NAVTEX ALARM ⅩⅠ NAVTEX ALARM ⅩⅠ
3.11/12/04 15:30 001 A 3.11/12/04 15:30 001 A
antenna malfunction antenna malfunction
4.11/12/04 15:30 002 A 4.11/12/04 15:30 002 A
power supply error power supply error
5.02/11/04 02:31 001 V 5.02/11/04 02:31 001 V
antenna malfunction antenna malfunction
*NAVTEX ALARM*
6.02/11/04 02:19 001 A 6.02/11/04 02:19 001 A
antenna malfunction antenna malfunction
[PRINT OUT]
7.23/09/04 22:15 001 V 7.23/09/04 22:15 001 V
[CANCEL]
antenna malfunction antenna malfunction
8.23/09/04 22:15 002 V 8.23/09/04 22:15 002 V
power supply error power supply error
9.23/09/04 22:14 002 A 9.23/09/04 22:14 002 A
power supply error power supply error
10.23/09/04 22:13 001 A 10.23/09/04 22:13 001 A
antenna malfunction antenna malfunction

Fig.6-16 ALARM HISTORY screen

Procudure
1) To display the next old result, press the ▼ key.
- “ “ mark is displayed on the bottom line when the alarm history screen is able to be scrolled downward.
- “ “ mark is displayed on the top line when the alarm history screen is able to be scrolled upward.
- Press the ▲ ▼ key and scroll the viewing area.

The time of an alarm occurred and is restored is displayed when external GPS receiver is connected.
”--/--/-- --:--“ is displayed when time is not able to be acquired. (External GPS receiver is not connected.)

The display of the alarm is described.

Alarm message: 001, V, antenna malfufnction
1 2 3
1: The alarm number (refer to the following table)
2: The alarm condition -> “V”: Healthy status, “A”: Alarm is occurring
3: Alarm’s description text (refer to the following table)

The list of NAVTEX alarm

Alarm No. Alarm’s description text The contents of unusual detection
004 Receiver malfunction Unusual detection at the RX
005 Built in self test failure Self diagnosis failure
006 General failure Unusual detection at the power supply part
051 Antenna malfunction Unusual detection of antenna power supply
052 Flash memory error The data in a memory is broken.
053 Rx unit modem error Unusual detection at the modem part
054 Printer error External printer has malfunction
055 EXT SIO output error Unusual detection at the “DISP” output port
056 Receiver 1 malfunction Unusual detection at the RX1
057 Receiver 2 malfunction Unusual detection at the RX2
058 Receiver 3 malfunction Unusual detection at the RX3

2) To print the NAVTEX alarms to the external printer, press the * key in order to display the sub screen.
Select the “[PRINT OUT]”, and press the ENT key. Printing is started.
[PRINT OUT]: Printing is started.
[CANCEL]: Diagnosis is canceled, and the sub screen is closed.

6-51
6.3.5.3 Setting status of the NAVTEX Receiver (STATUS)

To display STATUS screen, select 3.STATUS from MAINTENANCE menu (6.3.5).

The setting information of NCR-333 is displayed on the screen.

STATUS ⅩⅠ
NAVAREA: ⅩⅠ
518kHZ DISABLED STATION:
A--D-----J----OPQR--------
490kHZ DISABLED STATION:
---------J-------------XYZ
4209.5kHZ DISABLED STATION:
---D----------OPQR--------
518kHZ DISABLED MESSAGE TYPE:
-----EF-----MNOPQR--------
490kHZ DISABLED MESSAGE TYPE:
-----EF-----MNOPQR--------
4209.5kHZ DISABLED MESSAGE TYPE:
-----EF-----MNOPQR--------
N OF STORED MSG: 94: 52: 22
N OF SAVE MSG: 39: 21: 5

Fig.6-17 STATUS screen

The setting information of each items are as follows;
- 518 (490, 4209.5) kHz DISABLED STATION:
The alphabet of stations which does not receive is displayed.
- 518 (490, 4209.5) kHz DISABLED MESSAGE TYPE:
The alphabet of message type which does not receive is displayed.
- N OF STORED MSG: The number of the stored messages is displayed. Starting from the left, 518k,
490k, and 4209.5 kHz are displayed. When the number of the stored messages
is the maximum, it is displayed as “FULL”.
- N OF SAVE MSG: The number of the saved messages is displayed. Starting from the left, 518k,
490k, and 4209.5 kHz are displayed. When the number of the saved messages
is the maximum, it is displayed as “FULL”.
- INS MSG OUTPUT SETTING:
The alphabet of stations and msg type which does not output ins is displayed.
- PRINT MSG OUTPUT SETTING:
The alphabet of stations and msg type which does not output printer is
displayed.
Notes
- To return to the MAINTENANCE screen, press the CLR key or key.

Press the * key in order to display the sub screen.

STATUS ⅩⅠ
NAVAREA: ⅩⅠ
518kHZ DISABLED STATION: To print the setting status to the external printer, select
A—D-----J----OPQR--------
490kHZ DISABLED STATION: the “[PRINT OUT]”, and press the ENT key.
---------J-------------XYZ To stop printing, press the CLR key while printing.
*STATUS*
4209.5KHZ DISABLED AREA:
---D----------OPQR--------
[PRINT MESSAGE
518kHZ DISABLED OUT] TYPE: To output the status data to serial ports, select the
-----EF-----MNOPQR--------
[DATA OUT]
490kHZ DISABLED MESSAGE TYPE:
[CANCEL] “[DATA OUT]”, and press the ENT key.
-----EF-----MNOPQR-------- To stop outputting press the CLR key while data
4209.5kHZ DISABLED MESSAGE TYPE:
-----EF-----MNOPQR-------- outputting.
N OF STORED MSG: 94: 52: 100
N OF SAVE MSG: 39: 40:FULL
To return to the STATUS screen, select the “[CANCEL]”
and press the ENT key.

6-52
6.3.5.4 Port monitor (PORT MONITOR)

Select 4.PORT MONITOR, and press the ENT key. PORT MONITOR screen appears.

Select the port for monitoring. It can check whether data is normally outputted from the port.
In addition, the displayed data can be stored temporarily to be rechecked.

PORT MONITOR ⅩⅠ

1.PORT SELECTION: OFF

2.PORT LOG

Fig.6-18 PORT MONITOR screen

Procudure
1. Press the ▲ ▼ key in order to select the items.

2. When the ENT key is pressed, the menu screen of selected item appears.
Pressing the key can display the same.
- When cursor is on the item 1, cursor moves to the right side of ":"
- When cursor is on the item 2, the menu screen of item 2 appears.

Notes
- To return to the MAINTENANCE screen, press the CLR key or key.
- If the key is pressed when cursor is on the right side of ":" of the item 1, cursor returns on the item
1. (1.PORT SELCTION)

The outlines of menus are as follows;

1. PORT SELECTION: Select the port to check the serial in/output data. (See a. The check of
in/output data)
2. PORT LOG: The data stored temporarily is displayed. (See c. Port log)

6-53
a. The check of in/output data (PORT SELECTION)
Procudure
1) Select 1.PORT SELECTION, and press the ENT key. Cursor moves to the right side of ":".

2) Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the following items;

OFF: The monitoring of each port does not carry out.
GPS IN: Input data of the GPS port
DISP IN: Input data of the DISP (Option) port
DISP OUT: Output data of the DISP (Option) port

3) Example - Select the “GPS IN”, and press the ENT key.
PORT MONITOR menu screen changes to the data display screen.
PORT MONITOR ⅩⅠ PORT MONITOR ⅩⅠ
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
1. PORT MONITOR: GPS IN D
ENT $GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126
01.0
2. PORT LOG $GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
D
CLR $GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126
01.0
$GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C

Notes
- When neither the GPS receiver nor MPD is connected to the port of “GPS IN” and “DISP IN”, nothing is
displayed on the data display screen.

b. Store the displaying data temporarily

Procudure PORT MONITOR ⅩⅠ
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
1) Press the * key. The sub screen appears. 4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
D
$GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126
2) Select the “[START]”, and press the ENT key. Storing of 01.0
$GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
*PORT MONITOR*
the displaying data is started. 251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
During storing, the following is displayed on the screen ,0686*5C [START]
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
[STOP]
title. 4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
“ NOW LOGGING... “ D
$GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126
01.0
$GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
Notes 251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C
- When the MENU, DISP or USER key is pressed,
storing of the displaying data is stopped.
- Data is recordable to two screens.
- Data is stored until the power is turned off.

3) For canceling, select the “[STOP]” and press the ENT key.
The sub screen is closed, and storing of the displaying data is stopped.

6-54
c. Port log（PORT LOG）
Procudure
1) Select 2.PORT LOG, and press the ENT key. PORT LOG screen appears.
The data stored in the PORT MONITOR is displayed on this screen.

2) “ “ mark is displayed on the bottom line when the PORT LOG screen is able to be scrolled downward.
- “ “ mark is displayed on the top line when the PORT LOG screen is able to be scrolled upward.
Press the ▲ ▼ key and scroll the viewing area.
PORT LOG ⅩⅠ PORT LOG ⅩⅠ
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
1.PORT MONITOR: GPS IN D
ENT $GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126
01.0
2. PORT LOG $GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
D
CLR $GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126
01.0
$GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C

PORT LOG ⅩⅠ Press the * key. The sub screen appears.

$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393
4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
D To print the setting status to the external printer, select
$GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126 the “[PRINT OUT]”, and press the ENT key.
01.0
$GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
*PORT LOG* To stop printing, press the CLR key while printing.
251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C [PRINT OUT]
$PRMC,012601.00,A,3541.273,N,1393 To output the status data to serial ports, select the
[DATA OUT]
4.251,E,00.0,158.,020903,00.,W,D*2
[CANCEL] “[DATA OUT]”, and press the ENT key.
D
$GPGLL,3541.273,N,13934.251,E,0126 To stop outputting, press the CLR key while data
01.0 outputting.
$GPGGA,012602.00,3541.273,N,13934.
251,E,2,08,01.0,+0050,M,+039,M,05,
,0686*5C To return to the PORT LOG screen, select the
“[CANCEL]” and press the ENT key.

Notes
- All the character strings displayed on the PORT LOG screen are printed.

6-55
6.3.5.5 Software version (SOFTWARE VERSION)

When MAINTENANCE menu screen is displayed, the present software version is displayed on the item 5.
To display the MAIN MENU, press the CLR key.
MANINTENANCE ⅩⅠ

1.SELF DIAGNOSIS
2.NAVTEX ALARM
3.STATUS

4.PORT MONITOR
5.SOFTWARE VERSION
- PROGRAM : 02.00
- LANGUAGE: 01.00
- OPTION : --.--

Fig.6-19 Maintenance manu screen

The explanations of each item are as follows;

- PROGRAM: Program version is displayed.
- LANGUAGE: Langage version is displayed.
- OPTION: Option langage version is displayed.
When the option language is not installed, ”--.--“ is displayed.

6.3.6 The display language setting (LANGUAGE)

To select the display language, select 6.LANGUAGE from MAIN MENU (6.3).
Press the ▲ ▼ key and select the language. When the ENT key is pressed, menu screens are displayed in
the selected language.

6.LANGUAGE: ENGLISH

When the language data is already installed, the language name is displayed as follows.
- FRENCH
- PORTUGUESE
- ITALIAN
- SPANISH

When the option language is already installed, the option language name is displayed.

The initial setting is “ENGLISH”.

Notes
In case the language setting is selected except for “ENGLISH”, the character size is only medium.

6-56
 7. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The performance and longevity of this equipment depend on careful maintenance. To maintain
the best performance, the following periodic inspections are highly recommended.

CAUTION
Keep the power supply voltage within the specified value (10.8 - 35Vdc).

Know the condition of normal status when the equipment is properly functioning.
Keep comparing the current status to the normal status to immediately detect any
malfunctions.

WARNING
Do not attempt to inspect or repair the inside of this equipment with the
exception of qualified service personnel, as doing so may cause fire, electric
shock or malfunction. If any malfunctions are detected, contact our service
center or agents.

Use only specified fuses.

The use of other fuse may cause fire and/or damage.

The fuses are used for NBG-319 or NBG-320.

The power switch on the power distribution panel must be turned off during
replacing a fuse. Remove the cap of the front panel, and then exchange
fuses.

7. 1 General Maintenance and Inspection

Below are listed general maintaining and inspecting items, which can be done with usual tools
and apparatus.

No. Item Maintenance and inspection

Gently clean the surface of the panel, switches, and cover with soft cloth or
1 Cleaning silicon oil. No oil is needed because this unit has no moving mechanisms
inside.

Looseness Inspect for looseness and correctly tighten the following:

2
of parts Screws, nuts and connectors.

7-1
7. 2 Periodic Inspection
Regarding the functions for performing self-diagnosis and monitoring the system status, please
refer to “6.3.5 Maintenance Menu”

7.2.1 Confirming the RX station and Message type

To check the receiving station and message type, please refer to 6.1.3 and 6.3.2. Be sure to set
up the receiving station and message type correctly.

7.2.2 Confirming the Alarm Status

With referring 6.3.5.2, confirm that failure alarm is not occurring. If any alarm occurs, check the
cause of the alarm. NCR-333 Alarm Table is followings.

NCR-333 Alarm Table

Failure alarm list (ALR sentence output)
Alarm Indication Alarm Occurrence Conditions
No.
005 Built in self test failure After carrying out self-diagnosis, NCR-333 detected
006 General failure that the input voltage was abnormal.
005 Built in self test failure After carrying out self-diagnosis, NCR-333 detected
051 Antenna malfunction that the output voltage of antenna terminal was low
voltage.
004 Receiver malfunction After carrying out self-diagnosis, NCR-333 detected
005 Built in self test failure that the receiver 1 (518kHz) could not receive
056 Receiver 1 malfunction because of abnormalities.
004 Receiver malfunction After carrying out self-diagnosis, NCR-333 detected
005 Built in self test failure that the receiver 2 (490kHz) could not receive
057 Receiver 2 malfunction because of abnormalities.
004 Receiver malfunction After carrying out self-diagnosis, NCR-333 detected
005 Built in self test failure that the receiver 3 (4209.5kHz) could not receive
058 Receiver 3 malfunction because of abnormalities.
006 General failure The input voltage is low level.
053 Rx unit modem error The receiver 1 (518kHz) could not receive because
056 Receiver 1 malfunction of internal MODEM failure.
053 Rx unit modem error The receiver 2 (490kHz) could not receive because
057 Receiver 2 malfunction of internal MODEM failure.
053 Rx unit modem error The receiver 3 (4209.5kHz) could not receive
058 Receiver 3 malfunction because of internal MODEM failure.
051 Antenna malfunction The output voltage of antenna terminal is low
voltage.
052 Flash memory error The flash memory data is abnormal.
054 Printer error External printer is abnormal.
055 EXT SIO output error “DISP” output port is abnormal.

7-2
7. 3 Trouble Shootings
7.3.1 Trouble Shootings

WARNING
Do not attempt to inspect or repair the inside of this equipment with the
exception of qualified service personnel, as doing so may cause fire, electric
shock or malfunction. If any malfunctions are detected, contact our service
center or agents.

For reference, this section presents a troubleshooting guideline for finding defective sections.
Symptom of Error Possible Cause or Cause of Fault Countermeasures
Power is not supplied Power is not distributed from the Supply power from the distribution
when the power switch inboard distribution panel. panel.
is pressed. Power is not supplied from the Check that the wiring of the power
power supply unit or NCR-333. unit is correct.
Check that the output voltage of the
power unit or NCR-333 is correct.
Power that the power unit supplies Replace the power unit.
is out of range.
The fuses in the Power Supply Unit Check that the wiring is correct and
(Option) are blown out. replace the fuses.
The power supply cable is broken. Replace the power supply cable.
The controller switch is broken. Replace the CMD-953 circuit board.
Some dots are missing The LCD malfunctions. Replace the LCD.
on the LCD. The control unit malfunctions. Replace the CMJ-501N circuit
board.
No alarming sound is The buzzer malfunctions. Replace the CMD-953 circuit board.
generated. The control unit malfunctions. Replace the CMJ-501N circuit
board.

The illumination does The control unit malfunctions. Replace the CMJ-501N circuit
not light. board.
The LCD malfunctions. Replace the LCD.
No NAVTEX message The polarity or antenna cable is Check if the polarity is correct and
is received. incorrect. connect it.
Neither the receiving station nor the Refer to “6.3.1” or “6.3.2”.
message type is selected correctly.
The NAVTEX antenna (NAW-333) Replace the NAW-333.
is damaged.
The following alarm number Replace the CMN-2333.
appears: 004.
Internal receiver 1, 2 or 3 is broken.
Sensor data (external The polarity of the serial cable is Check if the polarity is correct and
GPS, gyro, and incorrect. connect it.
rate-of-turn) cannot be The interface between the sensor Check if the interface is correct
loaded. and NCR-333 is incorrect. before its connection.
The sentence that the sensor Check the output command and the
generates is not supported by the version.
NCR-333.
The serial format (baud rate, etc.) Check the serial format of the
does not meet the setting of the sensor.
controller.
The sensor (GPS, gyro, rate-of-turn Replace the sensor.
indicator) malfunctions.

7-3
 Symptom of Error Possible Cause or Cause of Fault Countermeasures
Sensor data (external The DPU (CMJ-501N) malfunctions. Replace the CMJ-501N circuit
GPS, gyro, and board.
rate-of-turn) cannot be
loaded.
The external printer The external printer is not ON. Turn on the external printer.
does not print The printer power is not turned on. Check the printer power cable.
Printer property (printer settings) is Refer to “6.3.4.5”.
incorrect.

7.3.2 Maintenance Units

Maintenance units for repair are followings.

No. Unit Name Model Note

1 RX UNIT CMN-2333
2 DPU CMJ-501N
3 KEYBOARD UNIT CMD-953-1
4 NAVTEX ANTENNA NAW-333-1 ANTENNA for NCR-333
5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT NBG-319 DC: +12/24Vdc
6 POWER SUPPLY UNIT NBG-320 AC:100/220Vac,DC:+24Vdc
7 Whip Antenna 5ABBE00001 0.6 m

Fuses
No. Unit Name Model Note
1 5A Fuse ULTSC 5A N1 For NBG-319
2 2A Fuse MQ4 250V 2A N1 For NBG-320
3 4A Fuse MQ2 125V 4A N1 For NBG-320

7.3.3 Spear parts for periodic maintenance

Spear parts for periodic maintenance are followings.

No. Unit Name Code Decline period Note

1 LCD Unit CCN-392 40,000 hours 5 years in
continuous operation
When the thermal paper of
Printer 25m roll length is used, about
2 DPU-414 Approx. 500,000 lines
(Option) 90 thermal papers can be
used.
When the thermal paper of
Printer 25m roll length is used, about
3 NKG-91 Approx. 100 million pulses
(Option) 500 thermal papers can be
used.
4 Printer paper 6ZCAF00252A For DPU-414
5 Printer paper 7ZPJD0384 For NKG-91

7-4
 8. AFTER-SALES SERVICE
Warranty

Warranty period is one year from the purchase day.

Warranty

Keeping period of maintenance parts is ten years from the production is discontinued.

Before returning repair

If what appears to be a malfunction is detected, refer to “7.3 Troubleshooting” to check if the

equipment is actually defective before requesting repair.
If the defect persists, immediately stop operation and call our service center or agents.

During the warranty period, our agencies or we will repair the malfunction without any fee,
according to the specified procedure.
After the warranty expires, we will repair the malfunction for a fee, if repair is possible. In this case,
send the parts or we’ll repair onboard in a specified port. The parts may be repaired in a plant if it’s
unrepairable onboard.
Item for notification
Product name, type, manufactured data, serial number,
information about the malfunction (the more detailed, the better),
information about the alarm number and software version,
your company or organization name, address and phone number.

Periodical maintenance recommendation

Performance of this equipment may degrade over time because parts wear out, although degradation
depends on how this unit has been maintained.
We recommend periodic professional maintenance checks in addition to daily maintenance.

Call our service center or agents for periodic professional maintenance (This maintenance requires a
service charge).

Call our office or the nearest agency for detailed information about after-sales service.

[JRC offices or the nearest agency]

See the List of JRC offices or the nearest agency at the end of this manual.

8-1
 9. SPECIFICATIONS
9.1 NAVTEX RECEIVER (NCR-333)

9.1.1 Receiver
(1) Receiving frequency : 518kHz, 490kHz and 4209.5kHz
(2) Receiving modulation : F1B
(3) Sensitivity : CER ≦ 1x10-2 at 1uV (CER: Character Error Rate)
(4) Antenna input : 50 ohms for NAVTEX antenna
50 ohms for wide-band antenna
High impedance for wire antenna

9.1.2 Operation panel

(1) Type of display : 5.7-inch FSTN LCD, 320×240 dots
(2) Key board : 12 keys
(3) Back-light : For LCD and key board
(4) Dimmer control : Bright, medium1, medium2, off (Selectable from keyboard)

9.1.3 Power supply

(1) Input voltage : 12 / 24Vdc (+30%, -10%)
(2) Power consumption : 9 W (at 24 Vdc input)

9.1.4 External interfaces

(1) INS (Integrated Navigation System) communication ports DATA IN / DATA OUT
One communication port meets the requirements of IEC 61162-1
- Baudrate : 4800bps
- Data bit : 8bits
- Parity : none
- Stop bit : 1bit
- Flow control : none
(2) External printer / maintenance port PRINTER/MAINTENANCE
One communication port meets the requirements of RS-232C (D-sub 9pin).
- Baud rate : User setting (4800 / 9600 / 38.4k bps)
- Data bit : 8bits
- Parity : none
- Stop bit : 1bit
- Flow control : User setting (Hard / None)
(3) Remote maintenance data output port DATA OUT2
One output port meets the requirements of IEC 61162-1
(4) Photo mos relay terminals EXT ALM
One port for external alarm device
(5) Photo coupler terminals BK
One port for 12VDC or 24VDC
(6) MPD (Multi purpose display) communication port DISP
One communication port meets the requirements of RS-485

9-1
9.1.5 Environmental condition
Durability and resistance to environmental conditions: protected from the weather (IEC 60945)
(1) Operating temperature : -15°C to +55°C (IEC 60945)
(2) Storage temperature : -25°C to +75°C
(3) Water resistance : IPX2

9.1.6 Supported interface sentences

Indication Sentence format Supported sentence formatters

DATA IN Input data
IEC61162-1 Longitude/Latitude RMC, GGA, GLL
DATA OUT (NMEA Ver 1.5 - Time of Position
2.3) Datum Reference DTM

Speed Over Ground (SOG) RMC, VTG

Course Over Ground (COG) RMC, VTG
Heading HDT
Rate of Turn ROT
Acknowledge alarm ACK
IEC61097-6 Request NAVTEX messages NRM
Set NAVTEX mask NRM
Output data
IEC61162-1 Set alarm state ALR
IEC61097-6 NAVTEX received message NRX
Set NAVTEX mask NRM

9.1.7 Received message log

(1) Stored message : Stores the 200 last received messages (*1). (Each channel)
(2) Saved message : Stores the 50 stored messages (*1). (Each channel)
(*1)
: message ... 500 character long message

Stored messages are erased 70 hours after their reception.

The source of time for handling message ageing is RMC sentence from an external source
(DATA IN).
When the data from the external source is not inputted, it is counted by the internal timer.

9-2
9.2 NAVTEX ANTENNA (NAW-333 - Option)

9.2.1 Electrical characteristics

(1) Receiving frequency : 518kHz, 490kHz and 4209.5kHz
(2) Bandwidth : 504kHz : ±20kHz
4209.5kHz : ±100kHz
(3) Consumption current : 6.5Vdc 23mA (Typ.)
(4) Impedance : 50 ohms

9.2.2 Environmental condition

(1) Operating temperature : -25°C to +55°C (IEC 60945)

9.3 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (NBG-320 - Option)

(1) Input voltage : 100-120 / 200-220 Vdc ±10%, 50/60Hz Single phase
: 24Vdc (+30%, -10%) (Back up power supply)
(2) Output voltage : Typ. 12Vdc ±10%
6.5Vdc ±10% (for External Printer)
(3) Maximum current : 1.5 A (24V)
2.0 A (6.5V)

9.4 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (NBG-319 - Option)

(1) Input voltage : 10.8 - 35Vdc

(2) Output voltage : 10.8 - 35Vdc
Typ. 6.5Vdc ±10% (for External Printer)
(3) Maximum current : 1.5 A (12 / 24V)
2.0 A (6.5V)

9-3
9-4
 APPENDIX

LOCATION & TIME SCHEDULE FOR NAVTEX COAST STATIONS

Note: Based on status in 2005.

NAVAREA Ⅰ
Range Freq
Country Coast station Position ID Tx time (UTC)
(nm) (kHz)
Belgium Oostende 51 11N 02 48E 55 518 T 0310,0710,1110,1510,1910,2310
Estonia Tallinn 59 30N 24 30E 250 518 U 0320,0720,1120,1520,1920,2320
Iceland Reykjavik Radio 518 R 0250,0650,1050,1450,1850,2250
64 05N 21 51W 550
490 R 0318,0718,1118,1518,1918,2318
Ireland Valentia 51 27N 09 49W 400 518 W 0340,0740,1140,1540,1940,2340
Ireland Malin Head 55 22N 07 21W 400 518 Q 0240,0640,1040,1440,1840,2240
France Niton 50 35N 01 18W 270 518 K 0140,0540,0940,1340,1740,2140
Netherlands Ned Coast Guard Radio 52 06N 04 15E 110 518 P 0230,0630,1030,1430,1830,2230
Norway Bodo Radio 67 16N 14 23E 450 518 B 0010,0410,0810,1210,1610,2010
Norway Rogaland Radio 58 48N 05 34E 450 518 L 0150,0550,0950,1350,1750,2150
Norway Vardoe Radio 70 22N 31 06E 450 518 V 0330,0730,1130,1530,1930,2330
Norway Svalbard Radio 78 04N 13 38E 450 518 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000
Norway Orlandet 63 40N 09 33E 450 518 N 0210,0610,1010,1410,1810,2210
Sweden Stockholm Radio 64 28N 21 36E 300 518 H 0110,0510,0910,1310,1710,2110
Sweden Stockholm Radio 55 29N 14 19E 300 518 J 0130,0530,0930,1330, 1730,2130
Sweden Grimeton 57 06N 12 23E 300 518 D 0030,0430,0830,1230,1630,2030
UK Cullercoats 518 G 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100
55 02N 01 26W 270
490 U 0320,0720,1120,1520,1920,2320
UK Portpatrick 518 O 0220,0620,1020,1420,1820,2220
54 51N 05 07W 270
490 C 0020,0420,0820,1220,1620,2020
UK Niton 518 E 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
50 35N 01 18W 270
490 I 0120,0520,0920,1320,1720,2120
UK Oostende 51 11N 02 48E 150 518 M 0200,0600,1000,1400,1800,2200
Russia Murmansk 68 58N 33 05E 140 518 C 0120,0520,0920,1320,1720,2120
Russia Arkhangelsk 64 33N 40 32E 280 518 F 0200,0600,1000,1400,1800,2200

NAVAREA Ⅱ
France Cross Corsen 518 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000
48 28N 05 03W 300
490 E 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
France Niton 50 35N 01 18W 270 490 T 0310,0710,1110,1510,1910,2310
Portugal Horta 38 32N 28 38W 640 518 F 0050,0450,0850,1250,1650,2050
Portugal Monsanto 518 R 0250,0650,1050,1450,1850,2250
38 44N 09 11W 530
490 G 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100
Spain Coruña 43 21N 08 27W 400 518 D 0030,0430,0830,1230,1630,2030
Spain Tarifa 36 01N 05 34W 400 518 G 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100
Spain Las Palmas 28 10N 15 25W 400 518 I 0120,0520,0920,1320,1720,2120
NAVAREA Ⅲ
Bulgaria Varna 43 04N 27 46E 350 518 J 0130,0530,0930,1330,1730,2130
Croatia Split (Hvar Is) 43 30N 16 29E 85 518 Q 0240,0640,1040,1440,1840,2240
Cyprus Cypradio 35 03N 33 17E 200 518 M 0200,0600,1000,1400,1800,2200
Egypt Alexandria 31 12N 29 52E 350 518 N 0210,0610,1010,1410,1810,2210
Egypt Sérapeum (Ismailia) 30 28N 32 22E 4209.5 X 0750,1150
France CROSS La Garde 518 W 0340,0740,1340,1540,1940,2340
43 06N 05 59E 250
490 S 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
Greece Iraklion 35 20N 25 07E 280 518 H 0110,0510,0910,1310,1710,2110
Greece Kerkyra 39 37N 19 55E 280 518 K 0140,0540,0940,1340,1740,2140
Greece Limnos 39 52N 25 04E 280 518 L 0150,0550,0950,1350,1750,2150
Itary Roma 41 48N 12 31E 320 518 R 0250,0650,1050,1450,1850,2250
Itary Augusta 37 14N 15 14E 320 518 V 0330,0730,1130,1530,1930,2330
Itary Cagliari 39 14N 09 14E 320 518 T 0310,0710,1110,1510,1910,2310
Itary Trieste 45 41N 13 46E 320 518 U 0320,0720,1120,1520,1920,2320
Israel Haifa 32 49N 35 00E 200 518 P 0020,0420,0820,1220,1620,2020
Malta Malta 35 49N 14 32E 400 518 O 0220,0620,1020,1420,1820,2220
Russian Novorossiysk 44 42N 37 44E 300 518 A 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
Spain Cabo de la Nao 38 43N 00 09E 300 518 X 0350,0750,1150,1550,1950,2350
Turkey Istanbul 41 04N 28 57E 300 518 D 0030,0430,0830,1230,1630,2030
Turkey Samsun 41 17N 36 20E 300 518 E 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
Turkey Antalya 36 53N 30 42E 300 518 F 0050,0450,0850,1250,1650,2050
Turkey Izmir 38 22N 26 36E 300 518 I 0120,0520,0920,1320,1720,2120
Ukraine Mariupol 47 06N 37 33E 280 518 B 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100
Ukraine Odessa 46 29N 30 44E 280 518 C 0230,0630,1030,1430,1830,2230
NAVAREA Ⅶ

Range Freq
Country Coast station Position ID Tx time (UTC)
(nm) (kHz)
Nambia Walvis Bay 23 03S 14 37E 378 518 B 0010,0410,0810,1210,1610,2010
South Africa Cape Town 33 40S 18 43E 500 518 C 0020,0420,0820,1220,1620,2020
South Africa Port Elizabeth 34 02S 25 33E 500 518 I 0120,0520,0920,1320,1720,2120
South Africa Durban 30 00S 31 30E 500 518 O 0220,0620,1020,1420,1820,2220

NAVAREA Ⅷ

India Mumbay 19 05N 72 50E 250 518 G 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100

India Madras 13 08N 80 10E 518 P 0230,0630,1030,1430,1830,2230
Mauritius Mauritius Radio, Cassis 20 10S 57 28E 400 518 C 0020,0420,0820,1220,1620,2020

NAVAREA Ⅸ

Bahrain Hamala 26 09N 50 28E 300 518 B 0010,0410,0810,1210,1610,2010

Egypt Serapeum (Ismailia) 518 X 0350,0750,1150,1550,1950,2350
30 28N 32 22E 200
4209.5 X 0750,1150
Egypt Kosseir 26 06N 34 17E 400 518 V 0330,0730,1130,1530,1930,2330
Iran Bushehr 28 59N 50 50E 300 518 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000
Iran Bandar Abbas 27 07N 56 04E 300 518 F 0050,0450,0850,1250,1650,2050
Saudi Arabia Jeddah 21 23N 39 10E 390 518 H 0705,1305,1905
Oman Muscat 23 36N 58 30E 270 518 M 0200,0600,1000,1400,1800,2200
Pakistan Karachi 24 51N 67 03E 400 518 P 0230,0630,1030,1430,1830,2230
NAVAREA ⅩⅠ

Range Freq
Country Coast station Position ID Tx time (UTC)
(nm) (kHz)
China Sanya 18 14N 109 30E 250 518 M 0200,0600,1000,1400,2200
China Guangzhou 23 08N 113 32E 250 518 N 0210,0610,1010,1410,2210
China Fuzhou 26 01N 119 18E 250 518 O 0220,0620,1020,1420,2220
China Shanghai 31 08N 121 33E 250 518 Q 0240,0640,1040,1440,2240
China Dalian 38 52N 121 31E 250 518 R 0250,0650,1050,1450,2250
Indonesia Jayapura 02 31S 140 43E 300 518 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000
Indonesia Ambon 03 42S 128 12E 300 518 B 0010,0410,0810,1210,1610,2010
Indonesia Makassar 05 06S 119 26E 300 518 D 0030,0430,0830,1230,1830,2030
Indonesia Jakarta 06 06S 106 54E 300 518 E 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
Japan Otaru 43 19N 140 27E 400 518 J 0130,0530,0930,1330,1730,2130
Japan Kushiro 42 57N 144 36E 400 518 K 0140,0540,0940,1340,1740,2140
Japan Yokohama 35 14N 139 55E 400 518 I 0120,0520,0920,1320,1720,2120
Japan Moji 34 01N 130 56E 400 518 H 0110,0510,0910,1310,1710,2110
Japan Naha 26 05N 127 40E 400 518 G 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100
Malaysia Penang 05 26N 100 24E 350 518 U 0320,0720,1120,1520,1920,2320
Malaysia Miri 04 28N 114 01E 350 518 T 0310,0710,1110,1510,1910,2310
Malaysia Sandakan 05 54N 118 00E 350 518 S 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
Korea Chukpyon 518 V 0330,0730,1130,1530,1930,2330
37 03N 129 26E 200
490 J 0130,0530,0930,1330,1730,2130
Korea Pyonsan 518 W 0340,0740,1340,1540,1940,2340
35 36N 126 29E 200
490 K 0140,0540,0940,1340,1740,2140
Singapore Singapore 01 25N 103 52E 0020-0030,0420-0430,0820-0830,
400 518 C
1220-1230,1620-1630,2020-2030
Thailand Bangkok Radio 13 43N 100 34E 200 518 F 0050,0450,0850,1250
USA Guam 13 29N 144 50E 100 518 V 0100,0500,0900,1300,1700,2100
Vietnam Ho Chi Minh Ville Radio 10 47N 106 40E 400 518 X 0350,0750,1150,1550,1950,2350
Vietnam Da Nang Radio 16 05N 108 13E 400 518 K 0140,0540,0940,1340,1740,2140
Vietnam Hai Phong 490 W 0340,1540
20 44N 106 44E 400
4209.5 W 0230,0630,1030,1430,1830,2230
China Hong Kong 22 13N 114 15E 400 518 L 0150,0550,0950,1350,1750,2150
Taiwan MEILUNG 518 P
216
CHILUNG 4209.5 P

NAVAREA ⅩⅢ

Russia Vladivostok 43 07N 131 53E 280 518 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000

Russia Kholmsk 47 02N 142 03E 300 518 B 0010,0410,0810,1210,1610,2010
Russia Murmansk 68 46N 032 58E 300 518 C 0020,0420,0820,1220,1620,2020
Russia Magadan 59 40N 151 01E 518 D 0030,0430,0830,1230,1630,2030
Russia Beringovskiy 518 E 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
Russia Arkhangelsk 64 51N 040 17E 300 518 F 0050,0450,0850,1250,1650,2050
Russia Astrakhan 45 47N 047 33E 250 518 W 0340,0740,1140,1540,1940,2340
NAVAREA Ⅳ
Range Freq
Country Coast station Position ID Tx time (UTC)
(nm) (kHz)
UK Bermuda 32 23N 64 41W 280 518 B 0010,0410,0810,1210,1610,2010
Canada Riviere-au-Renard C 0020,0420,0820,1220,1620,2020
50 11N 66 07W 300 518
D 0035,0435,0835,1235,1635,2035
Canada Wiarton 44 20N 81 10W 300 518 H 0110,0510,0910,1310,1710,2110
Canada St. Johns 47 30N 52 40W 300 518 O 0220,0620,1020,1420,1820,2220
Canada Thunder Bay 48 25N 89 20W 300 518 P 0230,0630,1030,1430,1830,2230
Canada Sydney, Nova Scotia Q 0240,0640,1040,1440,1840,2240
46 10N 60 00W 300 518
J 0255,0655,1055,1455,1855,2255
Canada Yarmouth U 0320,0720,1120,1520,1920,2320
43 45N 66 10W 300 518
V 0335,0735,1135,1535,1935,2335
Canada Labrador 53 42N 57 01W 300 518 X 0350,0750,1150,1550,1950,2350
Canada Iqaluit 518 T 0310,0710,1110,1510,1910,2310
63 43N 68 33W 300
490 S 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
Netherlands Curaçao 12 10N 68 52W 400 518 H 0110,0510,0910,1310,1710,2110
USA Miami 25 37N 80 23W 240 518 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000
USA Boston 41 43N 70 30W 200 518 F 0445,0845,1245,1645,2045,0045
USA New Orleans 29 53N 89 57W 200 518 G 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
USA Portsmouth 36 43N 76 00W 280 518 N 0130,0530,0930,1330,1730,2130
USA Savannah 32 08N 81 42W 200 518 E 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
USA Isabella 18 28N 67 04W 200 518 R 0200,0600,1000,1400,1800,2200

NAVAREA ⅩⅡ
Canada Prince Rupert 54 20N 130 20W 300 518 D 0030,0430,0830,1230,1630,2030
USA Tofino 48 55N 125 35W 300 518 H 0110,0510,0910,1310,1710,2110
USA San Francisco 37 55N 122 44W 350 518 C 0400,0800,1200,1600,2000,2400
USA Kodiak 57 46N 152 34W 200 518 J 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
USA Honolulu 21 22N 158 09W 350 518 O 0040,0440,0840,1240,1640,2040
USA Cambria 35 31N 121 03W 350 518 Q 0445,0845,1245,1645,2045,0045
USA Astoria 46 10N 123 49W 216 518 W 0130,0530,0930,1330,1730,2130
NAVAREA Ⅵ
Range Freq
Country Coast station Position ID Tx time (UTC)
(nm) (kHz)
Argentina Ushaia 54 48S 68 18W 280 518 M 0200, 1000, 1800 0600, 1400, 2200
Argentina Rio Gallegos 51 37S 65 03W 280 518 N 0210, 1010, 1810 0610, 1410, 2210
Argentina Comodoro Rivadavia 45 51S 67 25W 280 518 O 0220, 1020, 1820 0620, 1420, 2220
Argentina Bahia Blanca 38 43S 62 06W 280 518 P 0230, 1030,1830 0630, 1430, 2230
Argentina Mar del Plata 38 03S 57 32 W 280 518 Q 0240, 1040, 1840 0640, 1440, 2240
Argentina Buenos Aires 34 36S 58 22W 560 518 R 0250, 1050, 1850 0650, 1450, 2250
Uruguay La Paloma 518 F 0050,0450,0850,1250,1650,2050
34 40S 54 09W 280
490 A 0000,0400,0800,1200,1600,2000

NAVAREA ⅩⅤ

Chile Antofagasta A 0400,1200,2000

23 40S 070 25W 300 518
H 0000,0800,1600
Chile Valparaiso B 0410,1210,2010
32 48S 071 29W 300 518
I 0010,0810,1610
Chile Talcahuano C 0420,1220,2020
36 42S 073 06W 300 518
J 0020,0820,1620
Chile Puerto Montt D 0430,1230,2030
41 30S 072 58W 300 518
K 0030,0830,1630
Chile Punta Arenas E 0440,1240,2040
53 09S 070 58W 300 518
L 0040,0840,1640
Chile Isla de Pascua F 0450,1250,2050
27 09S 109 25W 300 518
G 0050,0850,1650

NAVAREA ⅩⅥ
Peru Paita 05 05S 81 07W 200 518 S 0300,0700,1100,1500,1900,2300
Peru Callao 12 03S 77 09W 200 518 U 0320,0720,1120,1520,1920,2320
Peru Mollendo 17 01S 72 01W 200 518 W 0340,0740,1140,1540,1940,2340
 APPENDIX

ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
 7ZPNB0008

⬉ᄤֵᙃѻક᳝ᆇ⠽䌘⬇ᯢ
᮹ᴀ᮴㒓᷾ᓣӮ⼒
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements
of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited

᳝↦᳝ᆇ⠽䋼៪‫ܗ‬㋴ⱘৡ⿄ঞ৿䞣
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements䋩

ᔶᓣৡ(Type): NCR-333 ৡ⿄(Name): NAVTEX Receiver

᳝↦᳝ᆇ⠽䋼៪‫ܗ‬㋴
䚼ӊৡ⿄ (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
(Part name) 䪙 ∲ 䬝 ݁Ӌ䫀 ໮⒈㘨㣃 ໮⒈Ѡ㣃䝮
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)

໽㒓
(Antenna)
㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍

ᰒ⼎㺙㕂
(Display Unit)
㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍

໪䚼䆒໛(Peripherals)
䊶䗝ᢽ(Options)
䊶ᠧॄᴎ(Printer) 㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍
䊶⬉㒓㉏(Cables)
䊶᠟‫(ݠ‬Documennts)

䂾䋺㸼⼎䆹᳝↦᳝ᆇ⠽䋼೼䆹䚼ӊ᠔᳝ഛ䋼ᴤ᭭Ёⱘ৿䞣ഛ೼6-7ᷛ‫ޚ‬㾘ᅮⱘ䰤䞣㽕∖ҹϟDŽ
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩿Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
㬍䋺⴫␜䆹᦭Ქ᦭ኂ‛䋼⥋ዋ࿷䆹ㇱઙ⊛ᨱ৻ဋ䋼᧚ᢱਛ⊛฽㊂⿥಴SJ/T11363-2006 ᷛಎ㾘ቯ⊛㒢㊂ⷐ᳞䇯
䇭䇭䇭(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
䇭䇭䇭 the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)

JRC Code No. : 7ZPJD0304B

5(ЁढҎ⇥݅੠೑⬉ᄤֵᙃѻક∵ᶧ᥻ࠊㅵ⧚ࡲ⊩
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China
 NCR-333
NAVTEX RECEIVER

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
[email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
MODEL NCR-333 e-mail : [email protected]
[email protected]
CODE No.7ZPJD0304B 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
MAR. 2007 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan
Tron SART20

USERS MANUAL
 www.jotron.com

EC Declaration of Conformity, available at www.jotron.com

Abbreviations and definitions

EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility

LED
Light Emitting Diode

PWB
Printed Wire Board

RF
Radio Frequency

SART
Search and Rescue Transponder

VHF
Very High Frequency

2 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

Amendment Records
AMEND- INCORP. DATE PAGE(S) VERSION REASON
MENT NO. BY FOR CHANGE

1 ES 14.09.07 Total: 24 A New product

2 ES 02.04.08 10, 15 B Added text

3 ES 29.07.08 1 C Background
Lifeboat bracket
4 ES 04.08.08 15,16 D updated

5 ES 14.08.08 9,13,21 E Battery label

6 TH 12.02.09 10, 13-19, new tot. 28 F Brackets and layout

7 ES 16.12.09 24 G Added text

8 FIT 05.11.10 24-25 H Added information

New pics on figure
9 TH 01.02.11 15 I 4.1.2b and 4.1.3

84145_UM_SART20_I 3
 www.jotron.com

The information in this book has been carefully checked and is believed to
be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies.

CAUTION!
This equipment contains CMOS integrated circuits. Observe handling pre-
cautions to avoid static discharges which may damage these devices. Jo-
tron AS reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any
products or modules described herein to improve reliability, function or de-
sign. Jotron AS does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of the described product.

WARNING / IMPORTANT
Jotron AS is a prime manufacturer of safety equipment designed for rescue
of human lives and their property. For safety equipment to be effective in
line with the design parameters it is important that they are handled, stowed
and maintained in compliance with the manufacturers instructions. Jotron
AS cannot be held responsible for any damage caused due to incorrect use
of the equipment or breach of laid down procedures or for failure of any
specific component or other parts of the equipment.

The chapter covering battery replacement (6.2.1) is added for information

only. Jotron AS does not take any responsibility for improper disassembling/
assembling of the beacon. We strongly recommend all service to be done
by authorized Jotron agents. In addition to normal service, Jotron agents
have the necessary equipment and knowledge to test the operational func-
tions of the beacon. Non-original maintenance and/or service parts may
destroy the equipment function and performance.

4 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

Table of contents
1 General description 7
1.1 Tron SART20 features 8

2 Technical specifications 10
2.1 Electrical specifications 10
2.2 Mechanical specification 10

3 Functional description 11
3.1 General 11
3.1.1 Tron SART20 electronic assembly 11
3.1.2 Battery module 12
3.1.3 Bottom lid 12

4 Installation 13
4.1 Brackets 13
4.1.1 Wall bracket 13
4.1.2 Lifeboat bracket 14
4.2 Installation tips 16
4.2.1 How to use the brackets in life rafts 16
4.2.2 Installation diagram 17
4.2.3 Mounting a pipe 17
4.3 Using the telescopic pole 19
4.4 Using the 10m rope 20

5 Operating instructions 20
5.1 Activating Tron SART20 20
5.2 Deactivating Tron SART20 20
5.3 Test of Tron SART20 21

6 Maintenance and troubleshooting 23

6.1 Maintenance 23
6.2 Service 23
6.2.1 Replacing the battery module 24
6.2.2 Battery disposal 26
6.2.3 Incineration 26
6.2.4 Land filling 26
6.2.5 Recycling 26

7 Service agents 27

84145_UM_SART20_I 5
 www.jotron.com

Battery safety data sheet

(Form: EEC directive 91/155)

(2) SAFETY ADVICE

S2 Keep out of reach of children.
S8 Keep container dry.
S26 In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water
and seek medical advice.
S43 In case of fire, use D type extinguishers. Never use water.
S45 In case of accident or if you feel unwell, seek medical advice immedi
ately (show the label where possible).

(3) FIRST AID MEASURES

In case of contact of cell contents with eyes, flush immediately with water for
15 min. With skin, wash with plenty of water and take off contaminated clothes.
If inhaled, remove from exposure, give oxygen, and seek medical advice.

(4) FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES

Extinguishing media
Suitable: Type D fire extinguishers
Not to be used: Water - CO2 - Halon, dry chemical or foam extinguishers

Special exposure hazards

Generation of chlorine, sulphur dioxide, disulphur dichloride during
thermal decomposition.

Special protective equipment

Use protective working boots, rubber apron and safety glasses with side shie-
lds.

6 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Tron SART20 is emergency equipment consisting of:

1. Tron SART20 radar transponder.
2. Mounting rope for life rafts / life boats.

The 9 GHz radar transponder type Tron SART20 is developed by Jotron AS to

meet the rules and regulations for use on vessels and life rafts in the maritime
service. Tron SART20 meets the specifications for 9 GHz radar transponders
for use in search and rescue operations at sea.

The operating range of the Tron SART20 is up to 30 nautical miles, depending

on the height of the electronic unit and the radar height of the search and res-
cue unit (sea or airborne). With a radar height of 20m and the Tron SART20
placed at 1m above sea level, the range will be up to 10 nautical miles.

Tron SART20 is buoyant, however to obtain maximum performance the tran-

sponder should be placed in a vertical position and as high up as possible in
order to achieve maximum coverage.

Several mounting brackets and mounting aids are available to ensure correct
mounting and use of the radar transponder.

The purpose of the Tron SART20 is to perform a secondary alarm when se-
arch and rescue units are searching for a life raft / lifeboat in distress. The Tron
SART20 will help the units to pinpoint exactly where the distressed boat is lo-
cated in a larger area. This is done with the help of the radar on the searching
ship or helicopter.

When the Tron SART20 is interrogated (hit) by a radar signal, it will immediately
start to transmit a number of sweeps covering the complete maritime 3 cm
radar band.

These sweeps are detected on the radar screen and are used to navigate di-
rectly towards the distressed life raft, for details on radar display see chapter
5.3.

84145_UM_SART20_I 7
 www.jotron.com

Maximum distance to a ship will normally be about 10 nm and approximately

30nm to a helicopter, dependent on the helicopters altitude. The transponder
will not give any alarms further away than this.

The primary alarm will usually be an Emergency Position Indicating Radio

Beacon (EPIRB) or distress call on VHF / HF - manual or via digital selcall.

The Tron SART20 should be activated immediately after activation of the EPIRB
or by instruction from the rescue control centre.

The batteries of the Tron SART20 will last at least 96 hours in standby after
activation and then minimum 8 hours of continuous operation.

Although the transponder does not send any alarm via satellite, VHF or other
radio communication, the use should be limited to short tests and emergency
situations.
This is to save battery capacity in case of a situation where the transponder is
needed.

1.1 Tron SART20 features

Watertight:
Tron SART20 is watertight to a depth of minimum 1 meter.

Buoyant:
Tron SART20 is buoyant in case the transponder is accidentally dropped into
the water. To increase coverage the SART20 should always be held or mounted
as high as possible.

Rugged design:
The Tron SART20 will withstand a drop from 20 meters into the water. It is re-
sistant to seawater, oil and sunlight.

Handling:
Tron SART20 is designed for easy operation, with a brief operating instruction
printed on the unit. It comes standard with a 10 meter rope and a shackle hook
to be used for hanging the SART20 on the inside of a life raft.

8 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

Indicators:
Tron SART20 is equipped with an LED and a built in buzzer to indicate operation.
The LED will normally give a flash each 4 seconds to show that the Tron SART20
is activated.
When a search and rescue unit is approaching the buzzer will sound each time
the SART20 is hit by the radar. A continuous sound from the buzzer means that
the ship or helicopter is close to the Tron SART20 and the radar is hitting the
Tron SART20 continuously.

Battery unit.
The battery module is to be replaced every 5.year. A battery expiry label on the
Tron SART20 housing displays the expiry date.
A new battery comes complete with cable and connector.

Figure 1.1, Battery expiry label

84145_UM_SART20_I 9
 www.jotron.com

2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Frequency: X-band (3 cm) (9.2 - 9.5 GHz)
Temperature range: Operating: -20 to +55°C
Storage: -30 to +65°C
Radiated power: > 400 mW e.i.r.p (+26 dBm)
Sweep type: 12 sweep sawtooth type
Forward 7.5 us “ ms
Return 0.4 us “0.1 ms
Starts with return sweep.
Receive sensitivity: Better than -50 dBm e.r.s.
Response delay: Max 0.5 ms
Antenna pattern: Horizontal polarization.
Omni directional radiation in the horizontal plane.
Greater than “12.5 degrees elevation angle in the
vertical plane.
Battery: Two C-size SAFT LSH 14 light Lithium batteries,
5 years service life.
Battery capacity: 96 hours standby +8 hours continuous operation
when activated by a radar with 1 kHz prf at -20°C.
5 years storage.

2.2 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION

Materials used:
Transponder housing: Polycarbonate with 10% fiberglass.
Bracket: Anodized aluminum.
Transponder dimensions:
Max diameter: 89 mm
Length: 250 mm
Weight: 482 g
Transponder with standard storage bracket:
Max diameter: 90 mm
Length: 250 mm

10 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3.1 GENERAL
Tron SART20 consists of a housing sealed at the lower end with a bottom lid
and may be split into the following main parts:
1. Bottom lid.
2. Housing with Tron SART20 electronic assembly and battery module.
The housing is made of polycarbonate.
1 2

Figure 3.1, Tron SART20 disassembled

3.1.1 Tron SART20 electronic assembly

Tron SART20 electronic assembly is inserted into the Tron SART20 housing.
It consists of the transceiver module and antenna.
1. Transceiver Board in metal box
2. Antenna (9GHz).

1 2

Figure 3.1.1 Tron SART20 electronic assembly

84145_UM_SART20_I 11
 www.jotron.com

3.1.2 BATTERY MODULE

The battery module is inserted into the Tron SART20 housing.
A battery expiry label on the Tron SART20 housing displays the battery expiry
date.

A new battery module comes complete with cable and connector and can be
changed by opening the bottom lid at of the Tron SART20.

Figure 3.1.2 TRON SART20 BATTERY

- module without cable and connector Battery expiry
label
3.1.3 BOTTOM LID
The Bottom lid includes four items:

1. The winder hook

2. The screw ring
3. The light tower
4. The O-ring

1 3

Figure 3.1.3 Bottom lid

12 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

4 INSTALLATION

Tron SART20 can be mounted several ways, depending on the options availa-
ble. As a general rule, the transponder should be mounted as high as possible
to increase line of sight to the search and rescue units.

Metal objects close to the transponder should be avoided, these will limit the
performance in the directions they are located.

4.1 BRACKETS
There are two different mounting brackets available.
1. Wall bracket
2. Lifeboat bracket (optional)

4.1.1 WALL BRACKET

A wall bracket is delivered with the Tron SART20 and should be used for sto-
rage of the transponder. The bracket should preferably be mounted in a vertical
position and in a place where the Tron SART20 is easily available in case of an
emergency.

Figure 4.1.1a, wall bracket. Figure 4.1.1b, Tron SART20

mounted in wall bracket.

The bracket should be mounted with four screws (Ø 4 mm).

84145_UM_SART20_I 13
 www.jotron.com

4.1.2 LIFEBOAT BRACKET (optional)

The outdoor lifeboat bracket should be mounted vertically on the roof of the
lifeboat (as high as possible).

Activate the transponder and put it into the bracket. Secure the transponder
to the bracket. The bracket will fit a pipe with a maximum diameter of 50mm.

Figure 4.1.2a, Lifeboat bracket.

Item Document Title

nr. nr.
1 M-82746 WALL BRACKET
2 M-84163_WELDAMENT M-84163_BRACKET_UNIVERSAL_
WELDAMENT D 1
3 M-80312 Nut nylock M4 DIN 985
4 M-84676 Screw, DIN965 - Pozidrive M4x12
5 M-84854 Screw, DIN965 - Pozidrive M6x70
6 M-84855 Screw, DIN965 - Pozidrive M6x90
7 M-84838 PIPE CLAMP
13 M-84875 WASHER PLATE
14 M-91469 Nut nylock M6 DIN 985
15 M-82275 WASHER, DIN9021 Ø6mm

14 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

Figure 4.1.2a, Tron SART20 lifeboat bracket. Figure 4.1.2b, Tron SART20 to
put into lifeboat bracket.

Figure 4.1.3 Example of Mounting the Bracket on

Interior and Exterior Walls of a Lifeboat

84145_UM_SART20_I 15
 www.jotron.com

4.2 INSTALLATION TIPS

4.2.1 How to use the bracket in life rafts

Tent air tube

Entrance/Exit SART20 main unit

Hang the SART20 from the SART20

installation seat or radar reflector

SART20 main unit

Pole

Figure 4.2.1, How to mount Tron SART20 to a life raft

16 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

4.2.2 Installation diagram

Tron SART20 main unit

Clip
The state when inserted
into the wall bracket
Insert the clip of the
SART20 main unit into the
wall bracket from a top

Wall

Wall bracket:
- For mounting, use 3 mm
screws or wood screws,
depending on the wall type

Figure 4.2.2, Installation diagram of the SART20 main unit and the wall bracket

4.2.3 Mounting to a pipe

Figure 4.2.3, Examples of pipe mounting

84145_UM_SART20_I 17
 www.jotron.com

Figure 4.2.4, Mounting to a pipe, example of reference

18 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

4.3 USING THE TELESCOPIC POLE

Figure 4.3, Tron SART20 with telescopic pole attached.

A telescopic pole can be used to extend the height of the Tron SART20, inside
or outside the life raft/boat. Simply extend the attached pole to the full length
(app. 1,2m from the top of the Tron SART20). Make sure that the rod is locked
by pulling hard when it is fully extended. The rod can now be fastened or held
by a person. Ensure the rod is held as vertical as possible when activating the
Tron SART20.

84145_UM_SART20_I 19
 www.jotron.com

4.4 USING THE 10M ROPE

The 10m. rope is meant to hang the Tron SART20 inside a life raft. Any objects
that the rope can be attached to can be used. As long as the transponder is
kept away from any metal objects, the
performance will not be notable degraded because of the canvas of the life raft.

Figure 4.4, Tron SART20 with 10m rope attached.

5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

5.1 ACTIVATING TRON SART20

1. Break seal at switch.
2. Pull locking pin and make sure that the switch enters the “ON” position. An
audible “BEEP” will be heard and the indicator led will start to flash.
3. Place (or hold) the transponder in a vertical position as high as possible.
When the Tron SART20 is within range of an active 3 cm radar, the inter-
nal loudspeaker will be activated. A handheld VHF radio should now be used
to establish contact with the approaching boat or helicopter.

5.2 DEACTIVATING TRON SART20

1. Move the switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Replace the locking pin.

20 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

5.3 TEST OF TRON SART20

Test of the Tron SART20 is done using the ships own 3 cm radar. The radar
display will show different patterns depending on the range to the transponder.
See Figure 5.3a, b and c for details of the radar display. Note that the examples
shown are typical and will vary with the radar performance (height, power out-
put and sensitivity).

With the transponder located close to the radar the signals will appear as rings
on the radar display. The rings may be broken in some sectors, depending on
ship construction and other obstacles, and does not indicate an error in the
transponder. Placing it further away will reduce the signals to 12 dots on the
radar display, showing
the direction to the transponder.

1. Hold the switch on the Tron SART20 in the “TEST” position.

2. Simultaneously a person should observe the radar display to check for cor
rect pattern. The radar should be set for a 10 nm range.

3. The test should preferably be done in open sea to avoid interference on the
radar display from land echoes.

4. Alternatively, a radar of a nearby ship can be used to test the transponder.

A ship to ship VHF channel should then be used to confirm operation.

Figure 5.3a
Typical display when Tron SART20 is located near (<0.2 nm) the radar.
Radar range is 10 nm. Rings are off.

84145_UM_SART20_I 21
 www.jotron.com

Figure 5.3.b
Typical display when Tron SART20 is located close (1nm) to the radar.
Radar range is 10 nm. Rings are at 2 nm.

Figure 5.3c
Typical display when Tron SART20 is located away (>2 nm) from the radar.
Radar range is 10 nm. Rings are at 2 nm.

22 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

CAUTION!
While the Tron SART20 is activated it will respond to any 3 cm radars
within range. Tests must be made as short as possible (5 min) to avoid
interference and to avoid wasting battery capacity.

6 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 MAINTENANCE
Tron SART20 requires the following maintenance:

At least every 6. month.

The transponder should be taken out of its bracket and tested against a radar,
using the procedure in chapter 5.3. Either the ships own radar could be used or
the radar of a nearby ship. Note that the self test use the internal battery and
will reduce the operational lifetime of the equipment - therefore the test should
be limited to not more than once every month.

Every 5. year.
The battery unit must be replaced every 5 year. Storage of batteries over a long
period of time will reduce their capacity. To ensure long and reliable operation
the battery unit must be replaced every 5 year. The battery replacement can be
performed on board using the procedure in chapter 6.2.1.

6.2 SERVICE
Warranty Service
The warranty of the equipment is void if the customer has tried to repair, mo-
dify or rebuild the unit, deliberate or accidental damage, failure to follow Jotron
instructions with respect to approved service agents or if the unit has been ex-
posed to environmental conditions outside the specifications of the unit. As
standard Jotron AS warrants that this product will be free from defects in mate-
rials and workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date received by end
user, limited to 18 months from purchase from Jotron AS.

If the unit is in need of repair, please return it carriage paid to the agent that you
purchased it from. Provided that the unit(s) returned for repair is found to be
under warranty, man-hour cost and material cost will be covered by Jotron AS.
Additional costs not related to repair/replacement of the unit will not be co-
vered.

84145_UM_SART20_I 23
 www.jotron.com

Out of Warranty Service

For defects arising from normal wear and tear after 12 months of operation,
limited to 18 months from Jotron AS, normal service conditions will apply. For
details see: www.jotron.com

6.2.1 REPLACING THE BATTERY MODULE

Below is a description on how to change batteries on AIS-SART

Dissasembly:

Twist the rubber grip It might be difficult And then twist off Opened
anti-clockwise to to remove the lid. If the lid
remove the lid so, remove the rub-
ber grip first

Rubber holder below Pull out the battery Pull out the cable from connector
battery and electro-
nics removed

Remove old Silaca

gel bags See these pictures in colours on www.jotron.com

24 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

Assembly:

Install the new bat- Connect cable to Add 2x5 g Silica Mount rubber
tery. Make sure the electronics, gel bags holder
cable is within the black= left,
guide red= right

Remove old O-ring Use acid-free Fit the new Reinstall lid- tigh-
using a Credit Card Vaseline on the O-ring ten without tools
new O-ring

Replace the rub- Assembly com-

ber grip pleted

See these pictures in colours on www.jotron.com

84145_UM_SART20_I 25
 www.jotron.com

6.2.2 BATTERY DISPOSAL

Dispose in accordance with applicable regulations, which vary from country
to country.(In most countries, the disposal of used batteries is regulated and
end-users are invited to dispose of them correctly, through non-profit orga-
nizations, mandated by local governments or organized on a voluntary basis
by professionals).Lithium batteries should have their terminals insulated prior
to disposal.

6.2.3 INCINERATION
Incineration should never be performed by battery users but by trained profes-
sionals in authorized facilities with proper gas and fumes treatment.

6.2.4 LAND FILLING

Leachability regulations (mg/l)

Component Leachability EC limit EPA Other*

Iron 100 5
Nickel 100 500 2 0,5

* Applicable to France

6.2.5 RECYCLING
Send to authorized recycling facilities, through a licensed waste carrier.

26 84145_UM_SART20_I
 www.jotron.com

7 SERVICE AGENTS

Please look at www.jotron.com for Marine Service Agents.

Jotron Group subsidiary companies:

Jotron UK Ltd.
Crosland Park
Cramlington
NE23 1LA
United Kingdom
Tel +44 1670 712000
Fax +44 1670 590265
E-mail: [email protected]

Jotron Asia Pte. Ltd.

Changi Logistics Center
19 Loyang Way #04-26
Singapore 508724
Tel +65 65426350
Fax +65 65429415
E-mail: [email protected]

Jotron USA, Inc.

10645 Richmond Avenue, Suite 170
Houston, TX 77042
USA
Tel +1 713 268 1061
Fax +1 713 268 1062
E-mail: [email protected]

84145_UM_SART20_I 27
㧣㨆㧼㧶㧰㧜㧡㧝㧤 ᦭ലᦼ㒢࡜ࡌ࡞⾍ઃⷐ㗔ᦠ㧔㧶㧾㧯㧕

Tron SART20, Procedure for putting on the battery expiry date label
1. Procedure for putting in the battery expiry date label (82957)

It is necessary to put " the battery expiry date label " (Refer to the figure below) that indicates the
expiry date of a built-in battery module under the side of the main body of Tron SART20.
Put "the battery expiry date label" on the main body according to the following procedure when
installing SART20 on the shipboard or exchanging the battery.

1) Take "82957 Expiry date label" out of the packing box of Tron SART20.
Use the label included in the ”five years maintenance kit (82615)” when changing the battery
every five years..
2) Take ”82957 Expiry date label” out of the plastic bag.
3) Cut the part (Correspond to the date ("Month" and "year ") after five years from the
installation day or exchange day) out of the label with a punch, scissors or a retractable knife
etc.
4) Put the label on the position under the side of the Tron SART20.

Example: When installing Tron SART20 (or exchanging the battery) in February, 2009

࡮The expiry date is the date when five years were added to February, 2009.
࡮2009 + 5 = 2014 (after five years) Expiry date : ”February(2), 2014”
࡮Cut out the part of "2014" and "2" as shown in the figure below.
2014
Cut out this

2. Confirmation of the battery production date and installation limit

Confirm the label of the battery production date that displayed on the clip of the Tron SART20 when
you install the Tron SART20 for the first time.
Or, confirm the battery production date and installation limit when exchanging the battery.

㧖Installation limit : Install latest 18 months after production date.

Example: When the production date is July 2010 , the installation limit is as follows.

7(July) 2010 + 18 months(One year and six months) = 1(January) 2012

Note : When the month changes during the week, the previous month is made ”Production date”.

Example: When the year and week number is 13 ,2010, week number ”13” equals ” 29 March 2010 
      to 4 April 2010”.
Production date is March 2010, not April 2010.
7ZPJD0462A
 JQE-103
406MHz Satellite EMERGENCY POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEACON
(406MHz Satellite EPIRB)

OPERATION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
CODE No.7ZPSC0215A 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
DEC. 2007 Edition 2 JRC Printed in Japan Actual Producer:TAIYO MUSEN CO.,LTD.
PREFACE

Thank you for purchase of the JQE-103 406MHz EMERGENCY POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEACON
( Satellite EPIRB).

It is designed for use by mariners in distress to initiate the transmission of an emergency distress
locating signal to the Satellites.

• Please read this Operation manual carefully and carry out proper operation.

• Please keep the manual importantly to refer when it is necessary.

• Please use it when questions and troubles are caused in operation, by any chance.

ATTENTIONS BEFORE USING

• JRC cannot accept responsibility for any loss due to incorrect operation, malfunction and other
causes except product guarantee condition and liability by law.

• Specifications of Satellite EPIRB and its accessories may change without notice for improvement.

i
ABOUT WARNING LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES
＜Attached to Satellite EPIRB main body＞
(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(3)
(4)

(3) (4)

＜Attached to Automatic Release Bracket＞

(5) （7）

(5)
(6)

(6)

(7)

ii
BEFORE OPERATION

About safety symbols

This manual and the terminal are indicated the following safety symbols for your correct operation
to prevent your and somebody’s injury or damage to the product and assets.
The symbols and descriptions are as follows.
You should understand well them before reading this manual and operating the terminal.

DANGER
This symbol denotes that improper
handling poses a high risk of causing
death or serious injury.

WARNING This symbol denotes that improper

handling poses a risk of causing death or
serious injury.

CAUTION This symbol denotes that improper

handling poses a risk of causing injury or
damage to the product and/or assets.

Example of symbols

The △ symbol denotes DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION.

The inside illustration of the △symbol denotes meaning of the DANGER,
WARNING or CAUTION more concretely. (this example warns of possible
electrical shock.)

The symbol denotes prohibited action.

The inside illustration of the symbol denotes the specific prohibited action
more concretely. (this example indicated disassembly is prohibited.)

The ● symbol denotes obligatory operation or instruction.

The inside illustration of the ● symbol denotes obligatory operation or
instruction more concretely. (this example indicates unplugging is the
obligatory instruction.)

iii
CAUTIONS DURING OPERATION

WARNING
<Use of Main body>
If the false distress alert is transmitted, take the following instructions immediately.
(1) Stop the transmission immediately.
(2) Report the following information to the Maritime Safety Agency.
(a) Ship’s Name, Type and Flag
(b) MMSI (Maritime Mobile Service Identification) of Satellite EPIRB
(c) Position and Time at the false transmission
(d) Cause of the false transmission
(e) Type, Serial Number and Delivery Date of the Satellite EPIRB

（Information addressee）
(1) In Japan, contact to the Japan Coast Guard & Rescue Department.
(TLX: +72-222-5193 JMSAHQ J, TEL: +81-3-3591-6106)
(2) For outside of Japan, contact to the closest coast guard agency or equivalent organization in
the country.
To throw down this unit on the surface of the sea, it must be dropped from the 20 meters or less
height on the sea. Do not absolutely throw down this unit when the surface of the sea is frozen
over as the unit may be damaged.

If the Satellite EPIRB is taken out from water in distress, it stops sending distress signals.
Do not pull up the Satellite EPIRB from water during emergencies.

This unit must not be used for other than emergency disaster.
Otherwise, a large trouble will be given to the search rescue organization.

<Use of Selector switch>

Do not set the selector switch to “ON “except the case of manual activation in the emergency.
Distress signals are emitted when turning the selector switch “ON”.

Confirm that the selector switch is set to “READY”, and the Satellite EPIRB is not wet, when the
Satellite EPIRB main body is removed from automatic release bracket except in the emergency.

The selector switch is set to “READY” position at factory.

Do not turn the selector switch to “ON” unless in case of emergency.

The selector switch must be set to the “READY” position while sailing.

iv
 WARNING
<Use of Hydraulic pressure sensor>
The hydraulic pressure sensor activates the cutter using spring force.
Do not disassemble the hydraulic pressure sensor, nor apply pressure to it. Serious injury
could result.
Once the hydraulic pressure sensor operates, it cannot be reused.
Be careful for Satellite EPIRB so as not to be stolen or not to be activated by mischief when the ship
is in port.

<Installation: Main body>

Confirm that the ship’s name and ID correspond to those indicated on the label of the Satellite EPIRB
main unit. Rescue work will be planned and executed based on the information of ship’s name and
ID sent from the Satellite EPIRB. Proper planning of rescue work would not be possible if ship’s
name and ID are wrong.
If the ship’s name and ID indicated on the label of the Satellite EPIRB main unit is wrong, ask the
purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches to change it with correct ship’s name and
ID.

When the ship meets disaster, a large trouble will be given to the search rescue organization when
ship information on Satellite EPIRB is wrong.
Remove the Satellite EPIRB if MMSI/new ship name cannot be renewed.
This unit may be damaged due to vibration.
Do not absolutely install this unit in an extremely vibrating place such as a handrail.

This unit must not be installed in a place where a strong magnetic field is generated. The Satellite
EPIRB may activate by the magnetic force.

The Satellite EPIRB must be installed apart from the compass and so for the 2 meters or more
so that the magnetism is not influenced. The magnet in the automatic release bracket may
affect the compass and so forth.

This unit must not be used in a poor-view place such as a control room, engine room and survival
boat (with metal canopy) that may prevent the distress signal from reaching. We recommend that
this unit is used on a wide-view deck, bridge, or on the surface of the sea.

Mount the Satellite EPIRB main unit on the automatic release bracket properly.
Improper mounting causes the Satellite EPIRB not to be automatically released from the bracket in
an emergency.
<Installation: Battery and Hydraulic pressure sensor>
The battery and hydraulic pressure sensor which expired effective periods expired must not
absolutely be used. If such battery and sensor are used, the distress signal may not be
emitted at the emergency disaster. Take care that their lives do not expire.
It is strongly prohibited to install old ID’s Satellite EPIRB removing its battery only.

v
 WARNING
<Installation: Lanyard>
Never connect the lanyard to the automatic release bracket or ship body.
It disturbs the automatic release at emergency.

<Maintenance: Main body>

Ask the maintenance of Satellite EPIRB to the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC
branches. This device is used in urgent accident, and equipment should ensure it.

The Satellite EPIRB needs to have periodical maintenance at a service shop authorized by local
authority at regulated interval.
The Satellite EPIRB may not be activated at the emergency if there is a trouble in the equipment.
And there is a possibility not to be able to inform the distress to the search rescue organization.

Do not continue to use the Satellite EPIRB when deterioration in the performance is found at
periodical maintenance.
The Satellite EPIRB may not be activated at the emergency if there is a trouble in the equipment.
Also, confusion of search and rescue operations might happen by false transmission.
Repair or replace when deterioration in the performance is found.

Do not troubleshoot or repair the internal equipment of the Satellite EPIRB by yourself.
Any electrical work by any person other than our trained maintenance staff may cause fire or
abnormal operation of this equipment or electrical shock for you.
Do not disintegrate this equipment. Electronic circuit which generates high voltage is exist inner
main body of Satellite EPIRB. There is a possibility that Satellite EPIRB cannot keep the watertight
and cannot actuate correctly, if it is disintegrated without reason.

Do not adjust the internal circuit without a calibrated measuring instrument or exchange the parts
because the internal circuit is adjusted finely to specifications. If the equipment works abnormally,
please contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches.

<Maintenance: Conductive switch terminal>

The Satellite EPIRB may not transmit the distress signal even if it is on the water when the
conductive switch terminal is smeared by oily dust. Perform periodical cleaning of the Satellite
EPIRB in accordance with the procedure described in section 4-3.

The distress signal may transmit by removing the Satellite EPIRB main unit from the automatic
release bracket when the conductive switch terminals are covered by wet salt. Perform periodical
cleaning of the Satellite EPIRB in accordance with the procedure described in section 4-3.
<Abandonment: Main body>
Request abandonment to the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches for the
disused Satellite EPIRB.
There is a possibility that the emergency beacon is transmitted from disused Satellite EPIRB when it
is disposed improperly. If the emergency beacon is transmitted by improper disposal, large
confusion is caused in search and rescue operations.

vi
 WARNING
<Abandonment: Battery>
Do not make the used battery to short-circuit, discharging electricity compulsorily or using for
other usages. Send used batteries to the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC
branches.

Do not discard used batteries. Send used batteries to the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of
the JRC branches, to avoid causing environmental problem by throwing them away.

<Procedure when sell the ship>

Ask the procedures (submitting continuous usage or abandonment of radio station license, and
confirmation of continuous usage of Satellite EPIRB) and works (returning or abandonment of
equipment, rewriting MMSI of inner main body, and installation to the new ship) to purchasing dealer,
JRC agent or one of the JRC branches (refer to CHAPTER 4-7, After Service)
If these procedures and works are not executed, false transmission or wrong ID code signal might be
emitted in distress, and it causes serious confusion for search and rescue operation. Also the
owner of the vessel will receive strict warning from the organization that manages the search and
rescue operation for marine vessel.
When an existing Satellite EPIRB is resold to another ship, the MMSI and ship name of the Satellite
EPIRB must be changed. It sometimes happens that the MMSI and ship name of Satellite EPIRB
is not changed as following reasons.
New ship name is undecided yet.
New MMSI cannot be acquired.
Ship’s dealer is taking necessary procedures.
New MMSI is not acquired yet, but Satellite EPIRB is included in the sales contract of
the used vessel.

vii
 CAUTION
Open slowly the cover of release bracket.
If you open faster, EPIRB main unit may deviate from release bracket and fall down.

<Executing test>
In this test, permitted distress signal for the test purpose is transmitted only by one burst.
Do not execute the test repeatedly in a short time frame.

Execute the test in 00 - 05 minutes of each o’clock for the reduction of processing capacity in the
satellite.

This test must not be performed, as the Satellite EPIRB main unit remains removed from the
automatic release bracket. The distress signal may erroneously be emitted.

<Warning label>
Do not remove, destroy, or modify warning labels.

Ask purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches to replace any stained, illegible, or
damaged label if it can affect maintenance and use.

<Others>
Ask the service to purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches if the battery, hydraulic
pressure sensor or stopper pin is replaced or the abnormal status is recognized in the Satellite
EPIRB.

If you want to replace or repair the battery or hydraulic pressure sensor, contact the purchasing
dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches.

Do not wipe the both of conductive switch terminals in the same time.
It might cause the false transmission of distress signal due to the sensor detects the water and
activated.
Do not wipe the Satellite EPIRB with seawater. If the salt content is adhered to the Satellite
EPIRB, It might cause the false transmission.

Never loosen the conductive switch terminal.

There is a possibility of not transmitting the signal at emergency if the conductive switch terminal is
loosened.

Take care not to get hurt at the end of the antenna or band of the automatic release bracket.

Do not use a solvent (paint-thinner, alcohol etc.) or alkaline/neutral detergent to clean up the Satellite
EPIRB.
It causes crack on the resin if such a detergent is used, and Satellite EPIRB may not operate
properly in the worst case by leaking etc.
viii
APPEARANCE

Satellite EPIRB

Fig.1 Satellite EPIRB

Automatic release bracket

Fig.2 Automatic release bracket

ix
GLOSSARY

EPIRB
Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon

GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System

Cospas-Sarsat
International satellite system for maritime search and rescue

LEOSAR
Low-Earth-Obit Satellite System for Search and Rescue

MMSI
Maritime Mobile Service Identity

SAR
Search And Rescue

x
OPERATION AT EMERGENCY (MANUAL ACTIVATION)

Turn the stopper to arrow mark direction breaking the stopper pin.
Turn ON the selector switch. Then, the indication lamp flashes and distress signal is transmitted
for over 48 hours. After setting, turn the stopper back to original position to keep switch ON.

Stopper pin

Selector switch Stopper

Stopper Stopper pin Selector switch

Operation of the selection switch is available by opening the hatch of the automatic release
mounting bracket.

Selector switch

Hatch

Fig.3 Operation procedure at emergency

xi
CONTENTS

PREFACE....................................................................................................................................................................................................i

ATTENTIONS BEFORE USING.........................................................................................................................................................i

ABOUT WARNING LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES ..........................................................................................ii

BEFORE OPERATION........................................................................................................................................................................iii

CAUTIONS DURING OPERATION................................................................................................................................................iv

APPEARANCE........................................................................................................................................................................................ix

GLOSSARY...............................................................................................................................................................................................x

OPERATION AT EMERGENCY (MANUAL ACTIVATION)..................................................................................................xi

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................1-1

1.1 System Outline...............................................................................................................................................................................1-1

1-2 Feature of Satellite EPIRB .........................................................................................................................................................1-2

1-3 Configration...................................................................................................................................................................................1-3
1-3-1 Components............................................................................................................................................................................1-3
1-3-2 Satellite EPIRB main unit .....................................................................................................................................................1-4
1-3-3 Automatic release bracket .....................................................................................................................................................1-5

CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION................................................................................................................................2-1

2-1 Checking of the components......................................................................................................................................................2-1

2-2 Caution of installation..................................................................................................................................................................2-1

2-3 Outline of installation...................................................................................................................................................................2-2

CHAPTER 3. OPERATION.....................................................................................................................................3-1

3-1 Selector switch...............................................................................................................................................................................3-1

3-2 Power OFF.....................................................................................................................................................................................3-2

3-3 Manual activation.........................................................................................................................................................................3-3

3-4 Automatic activation....................................................................................................................................................................3-4

3-5 Lanyard..........................................................................................................................................................................................3-5

3-6 Test...................................................................................................................................................................................................3-6

3-7 Mounting of the Satellite EPIRB main unit into automatic release bracket...................................................................3-8
3-8 Removal of Satellite EPIRB main unit from automatic release bracket....................................................................... 3-12

CHAPTER 4. IMPLEMENTATION / MAINTENANCE / CHECK / CLEANING ................................................4-1

4-1 Implementation.............................................................................................................................................................................4-1

4-2 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................................................................4-2

4-3 Periodical cleaning of conductive switch terminal ................................................................................................................4-3

4-4 Test...................................................................................................................................................................................................4-5

4-5 Parts for periodical replacement...............................................................................................................................................4-5

4-6 Cleaning of Satellite EPIRB main unit....................................................................................................................................4-6

4-7 After service...................................................................................................................................................................................4-7

4-7-1 Longevity /exchange time of Satellite EPIRB....................................................................................................................4-7
4-7-2 How to discard the Satellite EPIRB .....................................................................................................................................4-7
4-7-3 Necessary procedure for Satellite EPIRB installed in the vessel to be resold..................................................................4-9

CHAPTER 5. SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................................................................................5-1

5-1 Electrical specifications ...............................................................................................................................................................5-1

CHAPTER 6. JRC SERVICE NETWORK ............................................................................................................6-1

 CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 System Outline
Satellite EPIRB is a beacon installed onto the ship under GMDSS rule. Should the ship sink, the Satellite
EPIRB will automatically float on the water, emit 406.028 MHz and 121. 5 MHz distress beacon for over 48 hours.

The 406.028 MHz beacon is received by LEOSAR of the COSPAS/SARSAT system, and distress position is
measured by Doppler effect between moving speed of the satellite and rotation of the earth.
1
This emergency information (i.e. position data and MMSI) is relayed to the Local User Terminal (LUT).
The emergency information is also relayed to the Rescue Coordination Centers (RCC) for SAR activity in all over
the world through Mission Control Center (MCC).
The 121.5 MHz homing beacon is used to detect the direction in a short distance so that the emergency
can easily be searched from an aircraft and ship at the scene.

1-1
1-2 Feature of Satellite EPIRB

The Satellite EPIRB emergency position indicating radio beacon has the following features.

▪ Transmitting 2 types of distress signals: 406.028 MHz and 121.5 MHz.

▪ The Satellite EPIRB main unit attached to the automatic release bracket is automatically released
within water depth 4 meters and sends two types of distress signals.

▪ After release from the automatic release bracket, the Satellite EPIRB main unit starts to send distress
signals upon sensing water. If the Satellite EPIRB main unit is removed from the automatic release
bracket on board the ship by mistake, it sends no distress signal.

▪ Manual activation to send distress signal is possible by turning selector switch ON.

▪ The transmitting of the 406.028 MHz distress signal starts 50 seconds after the power has been
turned on, and then the 0.44 second distress signal is repeatedly sent at 50 second intervals for 48 or
more hours.

▪ The transmitting of the 121.5MHz distress signal starts 50 seconds after the power has been turned
on, and then it is continuously sent for 48 or more hours.

▪ This unit normally operates even if it is dropped from the 20 meters height on the surface of the sea.

▪ This unit continuously operates at the temperature ranging from -20°C to +55°C for 48 or more hours.

1-2
 1-3 Configration

1-3-1 Components

Name
Table 1-3-1 Components list

Dimension, etc. Weight Q’ty

1
JQE-103 Satellite EPIRB
120(W) x 529(H) x 116(D) mm Approx. 1.3 kg 1
（including antenna）
NYH-12 Automatic
175(W) x 585(H) x 175(D) mm Approx. 2.9 kg 1
release bracket
Stainless bolt with hexagonal hole
4 each.
（M6x20）
(3 is needed
Installation materials Stainless nut （M6x1） ---
and
Stainless washer （M6x1）
1 for spare)
Stainless spring washer （M6x1）

Operation manual 7ZPSC0215A --- 1

Quick reference
operation guide 7ZPSC0218 --- 1

Installation manual 7ZPSC0217 --- 1

Test data sheet --- --- 1

1-3
1-3-2 Satellite EPIRB main unit

Indicator lamp Antenna

Stopper pin
Orange LED
(Lights while power ON)

Yellow LED
(Lights while TEST)
Stopper
Red LED (Lights while
Selector switch transmitting 406.028MHz)

Antenna

Selector switch

EPIRB main unit

Fig.1-3-2 EPIRB main unit

1-4
1-3-3 Automatic release bracket

Fig.1-3-3 Automatic release bracket

1-5
 CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION
This unit must be installed by the dealer or service person.
Therefore, this chapter provides only general information related to the system.
For detailed information about the system, please refer to the Installation Manual.

NOTE

Refer the Installation manual for the detail of installation.

2
WARNING
The selector switch is set to “READY” position at factory.
Do not turn the selector switch to “ON” unless in case of emergency.

Antenna

Indicator lamp

Selector switch

Fig.2 Selector switch

2-1 Checking of the components

After unpacking, check for all the components listed in Section 1-3 “Configuration”.

2-2 Caution of installation

(1) The Satellite EPIRB must be installed in a place where it is not directly exposed to waves and the
automatic release bracket can smoothly be operated.

(2) The Satellite EPIRB must be installed in a place where works and passing are not prevented and the
Satellite EPIRB can easily be operated.

(3) The Satellite EPIRB must be installed vertically.

(4) The automatic release bracket contains a magnet. The magnetic compass and so forth must be put
apart from the automatic release bracket 2 meters or more so that it is not influenced.

(5) The Satellite EPIRB must be installed in a place where it is hard to be stolen.

2-1
 WARNING
This unit may be damaged due to vibration. Do not absolutely install this unit in an extremely
vibrating place such as a handrail.

This unit must not be installed in a place where a strong magnetic field is generated. The Satellite
EPIRB may activate by the magnetic force.

The Satellite EPIRB must be installed apart from the compass and so for the 2 meters or more so that
the magnetism is not influenced. The magnet in the automatic release bracket may affect the
compass and so forth.

2-3 Outline of installation

Install the Satellite EPIRB main unit to the automatic release bracket confirming followings.
(1) Selector switch is set to “READY” position.
(2) Stopper pin is not broken.

Antenna

Stopper pin

Stopper

Selector switch

Fig.2-3 Satellite EPIRB main unit and automatic release bracket

2-2
 CHAPTER 3. OPERATION
3-1 Selector switch
The selector switch of this unit has following three positions.
(1) READY
Used to automatic activation. Distress signals are emitted immediately when the conductive switch
senses water after the Satellite EPIRB main unit is released from the automatic release bracket. That is,
the Satellite EPIRB main unit must float on the water surface to be able to emit distress signals.
(2) TEST
Used to check the functions of the Satellite EPIRB main unit. For details, see Section 3-6 “TEST”.
(3) ON

3
Used to manual activation. Distress signals are emitted when turning the selector switch ON.

NOTE
Manual activation is not possible unless breaking the stopper pin.
Therefore, broken stopper pin is the evidence that the EPIRB had been once activated manually. In that case,
replacing of the battery is required together with stopper pin.

NOTE
Release the stopper by breaking stopper pin to set the selector switch from READY to ON.

Stopper pin

Selector switch Stopper

Stopper Stopper pin Selector switch

When broken stopper pin is found at periodical check, replacing of the battery must be required together with
stopper pin as it is considered that the unit had been manually activated and the battery had been exhausted.
The selector switch can be set to “TEST” without breaking the stopper pin.

Fig.3-1a Setting procedure of the Selector switch

3-1
 Be sure to return the stopper to the original position after the selector switch was set.

Stopper

Stopper pin Selector switch

Fig.3-1b Reset of the Stopper

3-2 Power OFF

Confirm that the selector switch is set to “READY” (If not, set it to “READY”), and take the Satellite EPIRB out
of water. Then the Satellite EPIRB stops its activation.

Antenna

Stopper pin

Stopper

Selector switch

Fig.3-2 Power off

3-2
3-3 Manual activation

WARNING
Do not set the selector switch to “ON “except the case of manual activation in the emergency.
Distress signals are emitted when turning the selector switch “ON”.

If the selector switch is set to “ON”, the Satellite EPIRB is activated, and it sends distress signals 50 seconds
later regardless of its status.

When you activate the Satellite EPIRB manually, open the hatch of automatic release bracket, release the
stopper by breaking the stopper pin, and set the selector switch to “ON”. 3
To stop activation, set the selector switch to "READY", and take the Satellite EPIRB out of water if it is in the
water.
Be sure to return the stopper to the original position after the selector switch was set.

At activation - selector switch “ON”

Stopper pin

Selector switch Stopper

Stopper Stopper pin Selector switch

Fig.3-3a The status when Selector switch is turned to ON

Stop activation - selector switch “READY”

Antenna

Stopper pin

Stopper

Selector switch

Fig.3-3b The status when Selector switch is turned to "READY"

3-3
 CAUTION
Open slowly the cover of release bracket.
If you open faster, EPIRB main unit may deviate from release bracket and fall down.

NOTE
Manual activation is not possible unless breaking the stopper pin.
Therefore, broken stopper pin is the evidence that the EPIRB had been once activated manually. In that case,
replacing of the battery is required together with stopper pin.

3-4 Automatic activation

If the ship sank as the selector switch is set to the READY position, the automatic release bracket releases the
Satellite EPIRB main unit within water depth 4 m. The released Satellite EPIRB floats and senses the fact
that it is floating on the water surface. The power is turned on automatically on the water, and the Satellite
EPIRB starts to send distress signals 50 seconds later.

WARNING
If the Satellite EPIRB is taken out from water in distress, it stops sending distress signals.
Do not pull up the Satellite EPIRB from water during emergencies.

Once the hydraulic pressure sensor operates, it cannot be reused.

Be careful for Satellite EPIRB so as not to be stolen or not to be activated by mischief when the ship is
in port.

3-4
3-5 Lanyard

The lanyard is used to tow the Satellite EPIRB by connecting with a float or survival boat.

WARNING
Never connect the lanyard to the automatic release bracket or ship body.
It disturbs the automatic release at emergency.

Fig.3-5 The lanyard

3-5
3-6 Test

This unit has the following test functions. It is recommended to perform this test once a week at the condition
installed in bracket. Set the selector switch to “TEST” for performing this test. The selector switch can be
turned to “TEST” without releasing the stopper.

Indicator lamp

Stopper pin

Orange LED

Stopper Yellow LED

Selector switch Red LED

Fig.3-6 Position of the Selector switch when test is ongoing

Selector switch
Test contents Satellite EPIRB status Test result Action
position
Yellow LED and orange The battery voltage is
-
LED light for 4 sec. normal.
TEST Yellow LED and orange Contact
Check the The battery is
LED blink for 4 sec. in 0.5 purchased
battery somewhat consumed.
sec. interval. dealer or JRC
voltage *1
Yellow LED and orange Contact
The battery is
LED blink for 4 sec. in purchased
exhausted.
0.1sec. interval. dealer or JRC
Yellow LED and red LED 406.028MHz
-
light for 0.44 sec. transmitter is normal.
The signal is not
Yellow LED lights for 0.44 Contact
Emission transmitted though
sec. purchased
check of the SYNTH circuit
(Red LED does not light.) dealer or JRC
406.028MHz works.
Contact
Malfunction of
LED does not light at all. purchased
the transmitter.
dealer or JRC
Indicator lamp flashes at The indicator lamp
-
Check the 2.6 sec. Interval. is normal.
Indicator Contact
Indicator lamp does not Malfunction of the
lamp purchased
flash. indicator lamp.
dealer or JRC
READY - - - -
Satellite EPIRB is in the normal status when results of above tests are normal.

3-6
*1 Voltage of the battery varies by temperature.
Especially, the voltage decrease is remarkable at the low temperature. At the low temperature, LED
might blink even if the battery voltage is normal.
This test result is effective at the ambient temperature 23°C ± 5°C.

NOTE
Power consumption by performing this test is very little.
Even if performing this test every week until expiry date of the battery, the Satellite EPIRB still possible to
transmit the distress signal over 48 hours.
If an error is detected by this test or the effective periods of the battery and hydraulic pressure sensor
expired, contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches.

3
WARNING
The battery and hydraulic pressure sensor which expired effective periods must not absolutely be
used. If such battery and sensor are used, the distress signal may not be emitted at the
emergency disaster. Take care that their lives do not expire.

CAUTION
In this test, permitted distress signal for the test purpose is transmitted only by one burst.
Do not execute the test repeatedly in a short time frame.

Execute the test in 00 - 05 minutes of each o’clock for the reduction of processing capacity in the
satellite.

This test must not be performed, as the Satellite EPIRB main unit remains removed from the
automatic release bracket. The distress signal may erroneously be emitted.

If you want to replace or repair the battery or hydraulic pressure sensor, contact the purchasing
dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches.

3-7
3-7 Mounting of the Satellite EPIRB main unit into automatic release bracket

Mount the Satellite EPIRB main unit into the automatic release bracket, in accordance with the following
procedure.

(1) Set the band on the mount base of the automatic release bracket.

Fig.3-7a Mounting band to automatic release bracket (1)

Pin

Band

Plate

Fig.3-7b Mounting band to automatic release bracket (2)

3-8
(2) Then, put the Satellite EPIRB main unit on the mount base.

1) Fit the bottom of the Satellite EPIRB main unit on the bottom stopper of the mount base of automatic
release bracket.

Mount base of the

3
Automatic release bracket

Bottom of the
EPIRB main unit

Bottom stopper

Fig.3-7c Installation of Satellite EPIRB main unit into automatic release bracket

2) Fit the bottom of antenna on cushion A.

Fig.3-7d Mounting antenna to cushion A

3-9
 3) Insert the top of antenna on cushion B

Antenna

Insert this part

Cushion B

Fig.3-7e Mounting antenna to cushion B

(3) Put the mount cover on the mount base from bottom side, and fasten the belt over the mount cover to do
not bend, and fasten with catch clip. Then, insert the lock pin to the catch clip.
The hydraulic pressure sensor is made of resin, and it may be damaged by excessive impact or stress.
Be careful not to give too much impact or stress to it.

Fig.3-7f Fixing Catch clip

3-10
(4) Open the hatch, and confirm following things. Be sure to shut the hatch after confirmed those.
▪ Selector switch is set to “READY”.
▪ Stopper is set tightly.
▪ Stopper pin is not broken.

3
Hatch

Fig.3-7g Confirmation after mounting

Antenna

Stopper pin

Stopper

Selector switch
Fig.3-7h Confirmation of automatic release bracket (inside)

3-11
 WARNING
Mount the Satellite EPIRB main unit on the automatic release bracket properly.
Improper mounting causes the Satellite EPIRB not to be automatically released from the bracket in an
emergency.

3-8 Removal of Satellite EPIRB main unit from automatic release bracket

Remove the Satellite EPIRB main unit from the automatic release bracket by reverse order of procedure in
CHAPTER 3-7, (2) to (4).

3-12
 CHAPTER 4. IMPLEMENTATION / MAINTENANCE / CHECK / CLEANING
4-1 Implementation
The selector switch must be set to the “READY” position while sailing.

WARNING
The selector switch must be set to the “READY” position while sailing.

Antenna

Stopper pin

4
Stopper

Selector switch

Fig.4-1 Confirmation of Selector switch position

If the ship sank as the selector switch is set to the READY position, the automatic release bracket releases the
Satellite EPIRB main unit within water depth 4 m. The released Satellite EPIRB floats and senses the fact
that it is floating on the water surface. The power is turned on automatically on the water, and the Satellite
EPIRB starts to send distress signals 50 seconds later.

WARNING
Once the hydraulic pressure sensor operates, it cannot be reused.
Be careful for Satellite EPIRB so as not to be stolen or not to be activated by mischief when the
ship is in port.

NOTE

The lanyard is used to tow the Satellite EPIRB by connecting with a float or survival boat.
Please refer to page ix “OPERATION AT EMERGENCY” for the operation of the Satellite EPIRB at
distress.

4-1
4-2 Maintenance
For details of maintenance, refer to the Installation Manual. This chapter describes the simple procedure for
routine maintenance which you should follow on board the ship every day to maintain the system in a good
condition.
If any abnormality is found, or it is necessary to replace the battery or hydraulic pressure sensor, contact the
purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches .

Check item Action

(1) Is the selector switch (1) Confirm whether the selector switch is fixed to the READY
set to READY? position with the stopper.

(2) Is not the stopper pin (2) Replace the stopper pin and battery. Ask us or our dealer for
broken? the replacement. (Broken stopper pin shows that the Satellite
EPIRB had been manually activated and the battery is
exhausted.)
(3) Is the unit in the floatable (3) Do not put something on the Satellite EPIRB, and do not bind
state? the Satellite EPIRB.
Too much icing must be eliminated so that the antenna, selector
switch, indicator lamp, and hydraulic pressure sensor are not
damaged.
(4) Are the catch clip and lock (4) Tightly fasten if they are loosened.
pin of the automatic
release bracket fastened?

(5) Is the automatic release (5) Fasten the screws which are fixing the automatic release bracket
bracket firmly installed? to the ship body if they are loosened.

(6) Isn’t there any deformation (6) Contact the purchased dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC
or damage on the main branches if there is any deformation or damage on those.
unit and automatic release
bracket?

(7) Aren’t the accessories such (7) Contact the purchased dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC
as the lanyard, antenna, branches if they are damaged or missing.
usage labels etc. damaged
or missing?

(8) Did not the battery expire? (8) Pay attention to the battery effective period indicated on the
label. Contact the purchased dealer, JRC agent or one of the
JRC branches if it expired.
(9) Did not the hydraulic
pressure sensor effective (9) Pay attention to the hydraulic pressure sensor effective period.
period expire? Contact the purchased dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC
branches when its expiry date approaches.

(10) Is not the Satellite EPIRB (10) Excessive vibration will damage the Satellite EPIRB and
installed in automatic release bracket.
the place where the Contact the purchased dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC
vibration is extreme? branches to change the installation place if the Satellite EPIRB is
installed in the place where the vibration is extreme.

The metallic part of the automatic release bracket is made of stainless steel.
Its surface may rust by adhesion of iron powders, but extent of the corrosion will be little to do not affect the
mechanical intensity under the ordinary use.

4-2
4-3 Periodical cleaning of conductive switch terminal
(1) Importance of periodical cleaning
This Satellite EPIRB transmits distress signal after detecting water when it is activated by automatic
release.
Although the Satellite EPIRB is stored in a case (automatic release bracket), small dust may invades into
the case and adhere on the conductive switch terminal as the automatic release bracket is not water-tight
structure. The Satellite EPIRB may not be activated properly when oily dust adhered on its conductive
switch terminal.

WARNING
The Satellite EPIRB may not transmit the distress signal even if it is on the water when the
conductive switch terminal is smeared by oily dust. Perform periodical cleaning of the Satellite
EPIRB in accordance with the procedure described below.

4
The distress signal may transmit by removing the Satellite EPIRB main unit from the automatic
release bracket when the conductive switch terminals are covered by wet salt. Perform periodical
cleaning of the Satellite EPIRB in accordance with the procedure described below.

(2) Cleaning procedure

The conductive switch terminal and its surrounding, and the side of Satellite EPIRB main unit should
always be kept clean so that the Satellite EPIRB can be activated properly. Please perform following
periodical cleaning about once a month.

1) Confirm that the Satellite EPIRB main unit is not wet, and the selector switch is set to “READY”.
2) Remove the Satellite EPIRB main unit from the automatic release bracket.
3) Wipe the side of Satellite EPIRB main unit carefully by using soft cloth wet with the fresh water and
squeezed hard. Be sure to wipe the two conductive switch terminal one by one.
If the Satellite EPIRB starts to transmit the distress signal during the cleaning by any mistake,
re-install the Satellite EPIRB main unit to the automatic release bracket immediately (within 50 sec.
after transmission started) to stop the transmission.

Conductive switch terminal

Fig.4-3a Conductive switch terminal

4-3
 CAUTION
Do not wipe the both of conductive switch terminals in the same time.
It might cause the false transmission of distress signal due to the sensor detects the water and
activated.

Do not use salt water to wipe the Satellite EPIRB. Using salt water may cause false transmission
of the distress signal by adhering salt on the conductive switch terminals.

Do not loosen the conductive switch terminal.

Conductive switch terminal

Fig.4-3b Conductive switch terminal

4) Visually confirm that the Satellite EPIRB main unit is clean enough, then re-install the Satellite
EPIRB main unit to the automatic release bracket.

Please perform the above mentioned cleaning about once per month.

4-4
4-4 Test

This unit has the following test functions. Please refer section 3-6 “Test” for the details.

CAUTION
In this test, permitted distress signal for the test purpose is transmitted only by one burst.
Do not execute the test repeatedly in a short time frame.

Execute the test in 00 - 05 minutes of each o’clock for the reduction of processing capacity in the
satellite.

This test must not be performed as the Satellite EPIRB main unit remains removed from the

4
automatic release bracket. The distress signal may erroneously be emitted.

4-5 Parts for periodical replacement

This Satellite EPIRB has the following parts to be replaced periodically.

If the replacement period approaches, contact us or our dealer.

Table 4-5 Parts for periodical replacement

Parts to be replaced Replacement period

(1) Battery replacement set

a) Battery 5 years after installation

b) O-ring (2 kinds) (Described on the label)

c) Protection seal

2 years after installation

(2) Hydraulic pressure sensor (Described on the hydraulic pressure sensor)

After manual activation

(3) Stopper pin
(Replace the exhausted battery together)

NOTE
Please note that the replacement time of the battery-replacement-set and the hydraulic pressure sensor is not
always corresponding.

4-5
4-6 Cleaning of Satellite EPIRB main unit

The main body of Satellite EPIRB is made of the resin such as polycarbonates.
Solvents and alkaline detergents affects the resin material.
Please pay attention to followings when the maintenance/cleaning of ship’s hull or onboard equipments.

CAUTION
Do not use a solvent (paint-thinner, alcohol etc.) or alkaline/neutral detergent to clean up the body of
Satellite EPIRB.
It causes crack on the resin if such a detergent is used, and Satellite EPIRB may not operate properly
in the worst case by leaking etc.

(1) Use soft cloth wet with the warm fresh water to wipe the body of Satellite EPIRB main unit.

(2) Do not write letters etc. with an oily pen on the body of Satellite EPIRB since the solvent contained in the
oily pen affects the body.

(3) Cover the Satellite EPIRB with vinyl cloth to protect from spray of paints when re-painting the ship's hull for
maintenance.

(4) Detach the Satellite EPIRB (together with automatic release bracket) from the ship's wall at the cleaning
of ship's hull with a high-pressure washing machine so that the washing liquid does not splash on the
Satellite EPIRB directly or indirectly.

(5) Contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches immediately for repair when you
found a crack on the body of Satellite EPIRB.

4-6
4-7 After service

4-7-1 Longevity /exchange time of Satellite EPIRB

The longevity of Satellite EPIRB is approximately 7years (exchange it for the new article every seven years.)

Satellite EPIRB automatically releases from ship and floats on the sea surface when the ship sank, and has
the function to transmit the distress signal to inform the accident position. Therefore, the Satellite EPIRB is
generally installed on the deck etc. where the obstacle to avoid smooth floating is few. Deterioration in the
performance is not avoided in many years even if the periodical maintenance is performed because the
Satellite EPIRB is exposed to wind and rain, waves, and direct sunshine in this place.

A part of the function of the Satellite EPIRB may be restored by exchanging parts, but exchange of parts may
cost a large sum. Especially, when quality of the case is changed by weathering and slightly cracked, it
causes the malfunction because of the invasion of water though the case uses a plastic system material with
weather resistance. It costs a large sum to exchange this one.

4
In case of the Satellite EPIRB that has passed over seven years after installation, replacing to new Satellite
EPIRB is much practical than keeping maintenance when cost and reliability are considered.

Therefore, the replacement of Satellite EPIRB would be recommended at its periodical maintenance for the
EPIRB which passed nearly seven years after installation. Please understand the Satellite EPIRB is for safety
product, and we recommend to replace it ahead of time for the new article.

4-7-2 How to discard the Satellite EPIRB

Satellite EPIRB is the device to inform the location of the vessel in distress by transmitting ID code signal of the
vessel. If the signal is emitted by Satellite EPIRB except for emergency purpose, it causes serious confusion
for search and rescue operation. In addition, if the Satellite EPIRB is installed on the vessel, the owner of the
vessel will receive strict warning from the organization which manages the search and rescue operation for
marine vessel. For this reason, it is strictly prohibited to emit the unnecessary signal from Satellite EPIRB,
even accidental emission. It is also prohibited to emit the signal from unused EPIRB wherever it stores.
When the Satellite EPIRB is not necessary for the vessel due to the reason of scrapping or selling vessel,
and/or changing to new Satellite EPIRB, contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of JRC branches,
and ask them to take necessary procedure for disposal as mentioned below.

(1) To avoid accidental emission, fix the switch position of Satellite EPIRB to “READY” with stopper and
install the Satellite EPIRB to its automatic release mounting bracket. In case of removing the Satellite
EPIRB from the automatic release mounting bracket, pack it not to get wet by water. Then, ask the the
purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches to remove the battery from the Satellite
EPIRB.

(2) Submit the document for the abandonment of Satellite EPIRB or for the change of Satellite EPIRB to the
managing organization, following to the regulation concerning to Satellite EPIRB.

(3) Contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches and notify the name of the vessel
and serial number of the Satellite EPIRB to be abandoned.

(4) Follow the local regulation in case of disposal.

4-7
 WARNING •

Request abandonment to a service shop, manufacturer or its dealer for the disused Satellite EPIRB.

There is a possibility that the emergency beacon is transmitted from disused Satellite EPIRB when it
is disposed improperly. If the emergency beacon is transmitted by improper disposal, large
confusion is caused in search and rescue operations.

Do not make the used battery to short-circuit, discharging electricity compulsorily or using for other
usages. Send used batteries to the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches.

Do not discard used batteries. Send used batteries to the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of
the JRC branches, to avoid causing environmental problem by throwing them away.

Note (1): The any necessary cost to dispose or to change Satellite EPIRB, including the
document submitting fee, the cost returning Satellite EPIRB to agent/manufacturer
should be taken care of by the user.

(2): Please acknowledge that the battery disposal cost and carriage become charged.

4-8
4-7-3 Necessary procedure for Satellite EPIRB installed in the vessel to be resold

In case of that Japanese flag vessel is resold to Japanese client and new owner succeeds
in the radio station license.
(Contact t the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches, and ask them to take necessary
procedure and work as mentioned below.)

(1) To avoid accidental emission, make sure that the switch position of Satellite EPIRB is set to “READY”,
that the switch is fixed by the stopper, and that the Satellite EPIRB main unit does not get wet. Then, store the
proper place until new ID code is available.

(2) Submit the necessary document for the continuous usage of radio station license concerning to Satellite
EPIRB to the managing organization, following to the Japanese regulation.

(3) When the document is approved, make sure MMSI protocol and rewrite ID code and the name of vessel to

4
new one and then, install the Satellite EPIRB on proper place referring to the manual.

In case of that Japanese flag vessel is resold to Japanese client and new owner does not
succeed in the radio station license.
(Contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches, and ask them to take necessary
procedure and work as mentioned below.)

(1) To avoid accidental emission, make sure that the switch position of Satellite EPIRB is set to “READY”, that
the switch is fixed by the stopper, and that the EPIRB main unit does not get wet. Then, store the Proper
place until it is disposed.

(2) Submit the necessary document for the abandonment of radio station license concerning to
Satellite EPIRB to the managing organization, following to the Japanese regulation.

(3) Contact the purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches, and ask them to take necessary
procedure and work for the disposal of the Satellite EPIRB.

In case of that Japanese flag vessel is resold to overseas (outside of Japan) client.
(Contact the agent, the dealer, the service shop or the manufacturer which supplied the Satellite EPIRB, and ask
them to take necessary procedure and work as mentioned below.)

(1) To avoid accidental emission, make sure that the switch position of Satellite EPIRB is set to “READY”, that
the switch is fixed by the stopper, and that the Satellite EPIRB main unit does not get wet.
Then, store the proper place until new ID code is available.

(2) Submit the necessary document for the continuous usage of radio station license concerning to
Satellite EPIRB to the managing organization, following to the Japanese regulation.

(3) Make sure if the EPIRB has the effective type approval at new nationality, or if the Satellite EPIRB is
permitted for usage without effective type approval at new nationality. The Satellite EPIRB installed in
Japanese flag vessel has HK type approval.

(4) Confirm that whether the explanation displayed in Satellite EPIRB main body is written in English or not
(ask the disposal to purchasing dealer, JRC agent or one of the JRC branches when the Satellite EPIRB

4-9
 displays Japanese sign only, because it cannot be equipped with foreign flag vessel).

(5) If the continuous usage of Satellite EPIRB is not permitted, contact the dealer, the service shop or the
manufacturer, and ask them for the abandonment of the Satellite EPIRB.

(6) If it is permitted to use the Satellite EPIRB continuously in the same vessel, request new owner to submit
the information about MMSI at new nationality and new vessel name with a formal document.
Then, contact the dealer, the service shop or the manufacturer, and ask them for rewriting the data
in the EPIRB.

(7) Rewrite the vessel name and MMSI to those which are registered by new owner.

(8) Install the Satellite EPIRB on proper place referring to the manual.

NOTE

Write the new MMSI in the main body of Satellite EPIRB, when the MMSI is newly delivered.

WARNING
Ask the procedures (submitting continuous usage or abandonment of radio station license, and
confirmation of continuous usage of Satellite EPIRB) and works (returning or abandonment of
equipment, rewriting MMSI of inner main body, and installation to the new ship) to purchasing dealer,
JRC agent or one of the JRC branches (refer to CHAPTER 4-7, After Service)
If these procedures and works are not executed, false transmission or wrong ID code signal might
be emitted in distress, and it causes serious confusion for search and rescue operation. Also the
owner of the vessel will receive strict warning from the organization that manages the search and
rescue operation for marine vessel.

When an existing Satellite EPIRB is resold to another ship, the MMSI and ship name of the Satellite
EPIRB must be changed. It sometimes happens that the MMSI and ship name of Satellite EPIRB
is not changed as following reasons.
New ship name is undecided yet.
New MMSI cannot be acquired.
Ship’s dealer is taking necessary procedures.
New MMSI is not acquired yet, but Satellite EPIRB is included in the sales contract of
the used vessel.

When the ship meets disaster, a large trouble will be given to the search rescue organization when
ship information on Satellite EPIRB is wrong.

Remove the Satellite EPIRB if MMSI/new ship name cannot be renewed.

It is strongly prohibited to install old ID’s Satellite EPIRB removing its battery only.

4-10
 CHAPTER 5. SPECIFICATIONS

5-1 Electrical specifications

A) General specifications

A-(1) Main unit

When the Satellite EPIRB is left in the water at 10m depth for five minutes, no
Water-proof
abnormality arises to Satellite EPIRB.
Operation temperature -20°C to +55°C
Set the Satellite EPIRB on a vibration tester, and apply the following vibration
Vibration to the direction of up and down, right and left, and back and forth for fifteen
minutes each. (The sweep rate must be 1 octave/minute or less.)
Frequency Total amplitude
0 to 12.5 Hz 3.20 mm
12.5 to 25 Hz 0.76 mm
25 to 50 Hz 0.20 mm

Let the Satellite EPIRB freely drop from a height of 20m onto a water surface
Impact
twice.
Weight and dimension

Casing material / color

120(W) x 529mm(H) x 116(D) mm, Approx. 1.3 kg

SAS resin / orange (8.5R 5.5/11.0) 5

Indicator lamp Xenon lamp Luminous intensity : 0.75 cd or more

Transmission 48 hours or more

A-(2) Automatic release bracket

Release method of Satellite

Water pressure detection
EPIRB

Method of fixing case Band

Release depth 1.5 m to 4.0 m

Operation temperature -20°C to +55°C

Dimension 175(W) x 585(H) x 175(D) mm

Weight Approx. 2.9 kg

Validity period of Hydraulic

2 years after installation
pressure sensor

5-1
 B) Electrical specifications

B-(1) 406 MHz

Long-time stability 406.028 MHz (within +2 kHz, -5 kHz)
Short term : Less than 2 x 10-9/100 ms
Medium term
Frequency stability
Mean slope : Less than ±1 x 10-9/min.
Residual frequency variation : Less than 3 x 10-9
Output power Less than 5 W ±2 dB

Intensity of unwanted radiation during modification is shown below.

Pc
0dBｃ

-20 -20
Transmitting spurious dBｃ dBｃ
-30 -30
dBｃ dBｃ
-35dBｃ -35dBｃ
-40 -40
dBｃ dBｃ

-24kHz -12 -7 -3 3 7 12 -24kHz

kHz kHz kHz ｆｃ kHz kHz kHz
406.0MHz 406.1MHz

Data encoding Bi-phase L

Modulation method Phase modulation (PSK : G1B)

Phase deviation ±1.1 ± 0.1 radian (peak value)

Rise in modulation 50 μs to 250 μs

Antenna polarization Linear polarization

Antenna gain -3 dBi to 4 dBi Elevation angle : 5° < < 60°

VSWR 1.5 or less

Impedance 50Ω

B-(2) Digital message

Repetition time of
47.5 to 52.5 sec. (random)
transmission
Transmission time 440 ms ± 1% (short message)

Digital message As setting

Bit rate 400 bps ± 1%

Bit synchronization All 15 bits are “1”

Synchronization frame 000101111

5-2
B-(3) Homing signal

Transmitting frequency 121.5 MHz ± 6.075 kHz

Peak radiation power 50 mW ±3 dB

Modulation AM

Modulation frequency 300 Hz to 1600 Hz

Modulation repetition cycle 2 Hz to 4 Hz

B-4) Battery
Model Model P-35

Type Lithium Manganese dioxide pack

Composition Serial 3 cells

Voltage Nominal 8.4 V

Capacity 10.4 Ah

Validity period 5 years after installation

B-(5) Activation
5
The Satellite EPIRB starts to transmit the distress signal upon detection of
Automatic
water after release of Satellite EPIRB from the automatic release bracket.
The Satellite EPIRB starts to transmit the distress signal by turning selector
Manual
switch to “ON”.

5-3
5-4
 CHAPTER 6. JRC SERVICE NETWORK

Please contact the dealer from which you purchased the device or our marketing offices that is nearest to
you for any question as to the after-sales service (See back cover).
Please refer to the back of the book for more information.

•
JRC Tokyo http://www.jrc.co.jp

JRC Amsterdam http://www.jrcams.nl

JRC Seattle http://www.jrcamerica.com

6-1
 JQE-103
406MHz Satellite EMERGENCY POSITION INDICATING RADIO BEACON
(406MHz Satellite EPIRB)

OPERATION
MANUAL

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : [email protected]
[email protected]
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : [email protected]
[email protected]
CODE No.7ZPSC0215A 01ETM ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
JAN. 2009 Edition 3 JRC Printed in Japan Actual Producer:TAIYO MUSEN CO.,LTD.